Ge - D60 Relay

Title Page
g
D60 Revision: 3.4x
GE Industrial Systems
D60 Line Distance Relay

UR Series Instruction Manual
Manual P/N: 1601-0089-F5 (GEK-106440D) Copyright 2009 GE Multilin
837766A1.CDR
E83849
RE
T GIS ERE
GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
LISTED IND.CONT. EQ. 52TL
ISO9001:2000
EM
U LT I L
GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2000 QMI # 005094 UL # A3775
Addendum
g
ADDENDUM
GE Industrial Systems
This Addendum contains information that relates to the D60 Line Distance Relay relay, version 3.4x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-106440D (revision F5) but are not included in the current D60 operations. The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the D60 relay: Signal Sources SRC 3 to SRC 6 STUB BUS: The final Stub Bus protection is not implemented for this release. This feature can be implemented using a Phase IOC function and the auxiliary contact from the line disconnect, incorporated into a simple FlexLogic equation.
The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the object models described in Appendix C: UCA/MMS Protocol.
NOTE
GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE D60 ................................ 1-7 MOUNTING AND WIRING................................................................................. 1-9 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 1-9 FACEPLATE DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 1-9 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-10 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-10 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-10 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-11 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-11 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-11 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-11
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.5 USING THE RELAY
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-6 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-10 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-11 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-11 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-12 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-12 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-13 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-13 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-14 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-14 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-15 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-15 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-15 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-15
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
3. HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-4 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-5 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-6 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................................................. 3-7 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-7 CT/VT MODULES .............................................................................................. 3-8 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 3-9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-15 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ............................................................................. 3-16 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................................................... 3-16 IRIG-B .............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.2 WIRING
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS

3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-19 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-21 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-21 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-22 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-25 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-27 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-27 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-28
4. HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW...........................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3 FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-5 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-8 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-8 BREAKER CONTROL ........................................................................................4-8 MENUS ...............................................................................................................4-9 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-11
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
5. SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.15 5.2.16 5.2.17 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-7 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-8 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-10 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-11 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-17 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-17 FAULT REPORT ..............................................................................................5-18 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-19 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-21 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-22 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS .........................................................5-25 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-25 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-27 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-28 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-29 DIRECT I/O.......................................................................................................5-31 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-36
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.3.1 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-37 5.3.2 ON A 14.4 KV SYSTEM WITH A DELTA CONNECTION AND A VT PRIMARY TO SECONDARY TURNS RATIO OF 14400:120, THE VOLTAGE VALUE ENTERED WOULD BE 120, I.E. 14400 / 120.POWER SYSTEM5-38 5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ..........................................................................................5-39 5.3.4 LINE ..................................................................................................................5-41 5.3.5 BREAKERS ......................................................................................................5-42 5.3.6 FLEXCURVES .............................................................................................5-45
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC................................................................5-52 FLEXLOGIC RULES .....................................................................................5-61 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-61 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE ................................................................................5-62
vi
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 5.5.9 5.5.10 5.5.11 5.5.12 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................... 5-66 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS................................................................................... 5-66 FLEXELEMENTS ......................................................................................... 5-67 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ............................................................................. 5-71 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-72 SETTING GROUP ........................................................................................... 5-72 LINE PICKUP................................................................................................... 5-73 DISTANCE ....................................................................................................... 5-75 POWER SWING DETECT ............................................................................... 5-89 LOAD ENCROACHMENT................................................................................ 5-97 PHASE CURRENT .......................................................................................... 5-99 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-109 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-116 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-119 BREAKER FAILURE ...................................................................................... 5-125 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-134 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-141 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-141 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-142 TRIP OUTPUT ............................................................................................... 5-148 SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-151 AUTORECLOSE ............................................................................................ 5-155 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-166 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-169 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-171 PILOT SCHEMES .......................................................................................... 5-176 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-190 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-192 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-193 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-195 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-196 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-197 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-198 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-199 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-199 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-203 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-204 TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-205 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-205 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-206
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.9 TESTING
6. ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 6-4 AUTORECLOSE ................................................................................................ 6-4 REMOTE DEVICES ........................................................................................... 6-4 DIGITAL COUNTERS ........................................................................................ 6-5 SELECTOR SWITCHES.................................................................................... 6-5 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-5 ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-6 DIRECT INPUTS................................................................................................ 6-6 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS.............................................................................. 6-7
6.2 STATUS
GE Multilin
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.3 METERING

6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................................................6-8 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-11 SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-13 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-14 FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................6-14 TRANSDUCER I/O ...........................................................................................6-14 FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................6-15 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-17 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-17 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-17 BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-18 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-19 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-19
6.4 RECORDS
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-1 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-3 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
7.2 TARGETS
8. THEORY OF OPERATION
8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS

8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.4.1 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.5.6 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................8-1 PHASOR ESTIMATION......................................................................................8-1 DISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................8-2 MEMORY POLARIZATION ................................................................................8-5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS ANALYSIS...................................................................8-6 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................8-9 EXAMPLE .........................................................................................................8-12 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................8-14 EXAMPLE .........................................................................................................8-14 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................8-15 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................8-18 PHASE SELECTION ........................................................................................8-21 COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS FOR PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES.................8-22 PERMISSIVE ECHO SIGNALING ....................................................................8-26 PILOT SCHEME / PHASE SELECTOR COORDINATION...............................8-27 CROSS-COUNTRY FAULT EXAMPLE............................................................8-28
8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS
8.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING
9. APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES

9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................9-1 IMPACT OF MEMORY POLARIZATION............................................................9-1 HIGH-SET OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS..........................................................9-1
viii
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS 9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)

9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.5.1 9.5.2 PHASE DISTANCE............................................................................................ 9-2 GROUND DISTANCE ........................................................................................ 9-3 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 9-4 DIRECT UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (DUTT) ................................. 9-4 PERMISSIVE UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT) ......................... 9-4 PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT) ........................... 9-4 HYBRID POTT SCHEME (HYB-POTT) ............................................................. 9-5 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING ...................................................... 9-6 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 9-7 DISTANCE ......................................................................................................... 9-7 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT ..................................................... 9-8 HIGH-SET PHASE OVERCURRENT ................................................................ 9-8 PHASE DISTANCE PROTECTION ................................................................... 9-9 EXAMPLE ........................................................................................................ 9-10
9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES
9.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS
A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST
B. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.2.4 B.2.5 B.2.6 B.3.1 B.3.2 B.4.1 B.4.2 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1 PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7 MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-8 DATA FORMATS .............................................................................................B-47
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
C. UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONS
C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL

C.1.1 C.1.2 C.1.3 UCA....................................................................................................................C-1 MMS...................................................................................................................C-1 UCA REPORTING .............................................................................................C-6
D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS.
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

D.1.1 D.1.2 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1 POINT LIST......................................................................................................D-10
GE Multilin
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.1.1 E.1.2 E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... E-1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................. E-4 BINARY INPUT POINTS ................................................................................... E-8 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT.................................................... E-13 COUNTERS..................................................................................................... E-14 ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................ E-15
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
F. MISCELLANEOUS
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 F.1.2 F.2.1 F.3.1 REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... F-1 CHANGES TO THE D60 MANUAL ................................................................... F-1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY............................................................................... F-6
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.3 WARRANTY
INDEX
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
WARNING
CAUTION
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/ or downtime. 1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.

GE Power Management
Technical Support: Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A 360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
Made in Canada
Model: Mods: Wiring Diagram: Inst. Manual: Serial Number: Firmware: Mfg. Date:
D60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A 000 ZZZZZZ D MAZB98000029 D 1998/01/05
Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE) Ensure that the following items are included: Instruction Manual GE enerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format) mounting screws For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT: GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 TELEPHONE: FAX: E-MAIL: HOME PAGE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only) (905) 201-2098 gemultilin@indsys.ge.com http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
GE Multilin
1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems. Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device). It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs. Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly. High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5 milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and Canadian power utilities, in their Utilities Communications Architecture 2 (MMS/UCA2) project. In late 1998, some European utilities began to show an interest in this ongoing initiative. IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.
Input Elements
Contact Inputs Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs CT Inputs VT Inputs Remote Inputs Direct Inputs
Input Status Table
CPU Module
Protective Elements Pickup Dropout Output Operate
Status
Output Elements
Contact Outputs Virtual Outputs Analog Outputs Remote Outputs -DNA -USER Direct Outputs
Logic Gates
Table
LAN Programming Device Operator Interface

827822A2.CDR
Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features. Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay. Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices. b) UR SIGNAL TYPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry contacts are supported. The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations. The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines. The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs. The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic operands inserted into UCA2 GOOSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and userdefined (UserSt) functions. The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
GE Multilin
1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1 GETTING STARTED
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
Solve Logic
PKP DPO OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION 1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques. Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instantaneous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, I/O Control, HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system. Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection, Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications. 1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to Elements section in Chapter 5. An example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Digital Elements section. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC Sources section in Chapter 5. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section in Chapter 5.
1-4
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay. The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format. The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC. Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended) Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP 64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended) and 50 MB of available hard drive space (200 MB recommended) Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in High Color mode (16-bit color) RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay 1.3.2 INSTALLATION After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE enerVista CD. 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software. When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
5.
In the enerVista Launch Pad window, click the Install Software button and select the D60 Line Distance Relay from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Check Now button to list software items for the D60.
GE Multilin
1-5
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 6.
1 GETTING STARTED
Select the D60 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the Download Now button to obtain the installation program.
7. 8. 9.
enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, doubleclick the installation program to install the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
10. Click Finish to end the installation. The D60 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launchpad window, as shown below.
1-6
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE D60
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the enerVista UR Setup software. Please refer to the enerVista UR Setup Help File and Chapter 4 of this manual for more information. a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Install and start the latest version of the enerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions). Select the UR device from the enerVista Launchpad to start enerVista UR Setup. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the enerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site. Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality. 9. Enter the relay IP address (from SETTINGS in the IP Address field.
PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS)
Enter the relay Modbus address (from the PRODUCT SETUP BUS SLAVE ADDRESS setting) in the Slave Address field. Enter the Modbus port address (from the PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting) in the Modbus Port field.
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MOD-
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS PROTOCOL
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the three enerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main enerVista UR Setup window. The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) below to begin communications. b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Install and start the latest version of the enerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin. Select the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the enerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site. Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications.
GE Multilin
1-7
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE Enter the relay slave address and COM port values (from the SETTINGS SERIAL PORTS menu) in the Slave Address and COM Port fields.
1 GETTING STARTED
PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
1
8.
Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the enerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main enerVista UR Setup window.
9.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) Connecting to the Relay below to begin communications. c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY 1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Expand the Site List by double-clicking or by selecting the [+] box
Communications Status Indicator Green = OK, Red = No Comms
2. 3. 4.
The Display Properties window will open with a flashing status indicator on the lower left of the enerVista UR Setup window. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier). The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications. Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual and the enerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the enerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
1-8
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.4UR HARDWARE
1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS carefully. 1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the CPU Communications Ports section of Chapter 3.
Figure 14: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS To communicate through the D60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the D60 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, , GND) are connected to the D60 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU Communications Ports section in Chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 , 1 nF) as described in the Chapter 3. 1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
GE Multilin
1-9
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values. key may be
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below.
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTINGS
COMMANDS
TARGETS
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
No Active Targets
USER DISPLAYS (when in use)
User Display 1
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
PASSWORD SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted
SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP
1-10
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state. Select the menu message SETTINGS RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The faceplate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING: 1. COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations: operate breakers via faceplate keypad change state of virtual inputs clear event records clear oscillography records operate user-programmable pushbuttons
PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS
2. SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values. Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic section in Chapter 5 for additional details. 1.5.7 COMMISSIONING Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
GE Multilin
1-11
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
1-12
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The D60 Line Distance Relay is a microprocessor-based relay intended for use on transmission lines of any voltage level, without, with, and in the vicinity of series compensation, in three-pole and single-pole tripping applications. The primary function of the relay consists of four phase and ground distance zones of protection, either mho or quadrilateral as per user selection, with built-in logic for the five common pilot-aided schemes. The distance elements are optimized to provide good measurement accuracy with a fast operating time, even when used with Capacitive Voltage Transformers, and can be supervised by detection of power swings. The relay also provides directional ground overcurrent elements, which are commonly used as part of an overall line protection system. D60 phase distance zones can be configured to work with voltages and currents fed from VTs and CTs located independently from one another on either side of a three-phase power transformer. The relay compensates accordingly to preserve reach and correct target information regardless of the location and type of fault. This feature allows backup protection applications for generators and power transformers. A Close-Into-Fault, or Switch-On-To-Fault, function is performed by the Line Pickup element. Out-of-step tripping, threepole/single-pole dual-breaker autoreclosing, synchrocheck, fault location, and many other functions are also available. In addition, overcurrent and undervoltage protection, fault diagnostics, power metering, and RTU functions are provided. The D60 provides phase, neutral, and ground time overcurrent protection. The time overcurrent functions can be programmed with multiple curve shapes or FlexCurve for optimum coordination. Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor). Diagnostic features include an Event Recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and Data Logger acquisition of up to 16 channels, with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault. A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2, Modbus/ TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (UR web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time. The D60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single Line Diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
GE Multilin
2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 21: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE NUMBER 21G 21P 25 27P 27X 50BF 50DD 50G 50N 50P 50_2 51G 51N FUNCTION Ground Distance Phase Distance Synchrocheck Phase Undervoltage Auxiliary Undervoltage Breaker Failure Current Disturbance Detector Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Ground Time Overcurrent Neutral Time Overcurrent DEVICE NUMBER 51P 51_2 52 59N 59P 59X 59_2 67N 67P 67_2 68 78 79 FUNCTION Phase Time Overcurrent Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent AC Circuit Breaker Neutral Overvoltage Phase Overvoltage Auxiliary Overvoltage Negative Sequence Overvoltage Neutral Directional Overcurrent Phase Directional Overcurrent Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent Power Swing Blocking Out-of-Step Tripping Automatic Recloser
52
52
CLOSE
TRIP
59X 27X
Monitoring
25 (2)
79
50DD
50P (2)
50_2 (2)
51P (2)
51_2 (2)
50BF (2)
21P (4)
67P (2)
67_2 (2)
68
78
50N (2)
51N (2)
67N/G (2)
21G (4)
Data From/To Remote End (via Communications)
Pilot Schemes
59P
FlexElementTM
Metering
51G (2)
Transducer Inputs
27P (2)
50G (2)
59N

837709AE.CDR
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
2-2
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION Breaker Arcing Current (I2t) Breaker Control Contact Inputs (up to 96) Contact Outputs (up to 64) Control Pushbuttons Data Logger Digital Counters (8) Digital Elements (16) Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Comms Event Recorder Fault Detector and Fault Report FUNCTION Fault Locator FlexElements (16) FlexLogic Equations Line Pickup Metering: Current, Energy, Frequency, Power, Power Factor, Voltage MMS/UCA Communications MMS/UCA Remote I/O (GOOSE) Modbus Communications Modbus User Map Non-Volatile Latches Non-Volatile Selector Switch FUNCTION Oscillography Pilot Schemes Setting Groups (6) Time Synchronization over SNTP Transducer I/O User Definable Displays User Programmable LEDs User Programmable Pushbuttons User Programmable Self-Tests Virtual Inputs (32) Virtual Outputs (64) VT Fuse Failure
GE Multilin
2-3
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1.2 ORDERING
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, and consists of the following module functions: power supply, CPU, CT/VT DSP, digital input/output, transducer input/output. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations which must be specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following table (full details of available relay modules are contained in Chapter 3: Hardware). Table 23: D60 ORDER CODES
D60 - * 00 - H * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P BASE UNIT CPU D60 - * 00 - V D60 | | | A | | C | | D | | 00 | H H V * | | | | | C P F * - F ** - H ** - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H | | | L | | | 8A | | 8B | | | XX 4A 4A 4B 4B 4C 4C 4L 4L 67 67 6A 6A 6B 6B 6C 6C 6D 6D 6E 6E 6F 6F 6G 6G 6H 6H 6K 6K 6L 6L 6M 6M 6N 6N 6P 6P 6R 6R 6S 6S 6T 6T 6U 6U 5C 5C 5E 5E 5F 5F ** - U ** - W ** | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5C 5E 5F | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5C 5E 5F - # ** | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5C 5E 5F 7A 7B 7C 7D 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7P 7R 7S 7T 7W 72 73 76 77 Full Size Horizontal Mount Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note below for value of slot #) Base Unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP) RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) No Software Options Horizontal (19 rack) Horizontal (19 rack) with User-Programmable Pushbuttons Vertical (3/4 rack) 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT No Module 4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs 4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs 4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs 14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latchable Outputs 8 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 8 Form-C Outputs 16 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 8 Fast Form-C Outputs 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 8 RTD Inputs 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Inputs 8 dcmA Inputs 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
SOFTWARE MOUNT/ FACEPLATE POWER SUPPLY CT/VT DSP DIGITAL I/O
TRANSDUCER I/O (maximum of 3 per unit) INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
NOTE
For vertical mounting units, # = slot P for digital and transducer input/output modules; # = slot R for inter-relay communications modules
2-4
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a replacement CPU module or Faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit. Table 24: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES UR - ** POWER SUPPLY CPU | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1H 1L 9A 9C 9D 3C 3F 4A 4B 4C 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 8A 8B 8C 8D 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7Q 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7P 7R 7S 7T 7W 72 73 74 75 76 77 5C 5E 5F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) Horizontal Faceplate with Display & Keypad Vertical Faceplate with Display & Keypad 4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs 4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs 4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs 14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latchable Outputs 8 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs 2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 8 Form-C Outputs 16 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 8 Fast Form-C Outputs 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode LED (L90 only) Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode LED (L90 only) Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED (L90 only) Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, single-mode LASER (L90 only) 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703, Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single -mode, LASER (L90 only) IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 8 RTD Inputs 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 RTD Inputs 8 dcmA Inputs
FACEPLATE DIGITAL I/O
CT/VT DSP
UR INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER I/O
GE Multilin
2-5
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
Dynamic (100% memory-polarized) MHO or QUAD, selectable individually per zone 4 All zones reversible 0.02 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30 Left Blinder (Quad only): Reach: 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Time delay: Timing accuracy: Current supervision: Level: Pickup: Dropout: Memory duration: VT location: CT location: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater line-to-line current 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1 all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers
NOTE
PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic:
Number of Zones: Directionality: Reach (secondary ): Reach accuracy:
Distance: Characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Directional supervision: Characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Right blinder (Quad only): Reach: 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90 in steps of 1
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications): 0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PHASE DISTANCE OPERATING TIME CURVES

The operating times are response times of a microprocessor part of the relay. See output contacts specifications for estimation of the total response time for a particular application. The operating times are average times including variables such as fault inception angle or type of a voltage source (magnetic VTs and CVTs).
Phase Element (21P)

30 SIR = 0.1 SIR = 1 SIR = 10 SIR = 20 SIR = 30
25 Operating Time [ms]
20
15
10
0 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% Fault Location [%]
837717A1.CDR
2-6
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION GROUND DISTANCE

Characteristic: Dynamic (100% memory-polarized) MHO, or QUAD, selectable individually per zone 4 All zones reversible 0.02 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30 Z0M/Z1 angle:
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
90 to 90 in steps of 1
Number of zones: Directionality: Reach (secondary ): Reach accuracy:
Right blinder (Quad only): Reach: 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Left blinder (Quad only): Reach: 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Time delay: Timing accuracy: Current supervision: Level: Pickup: Dropout: Memory duration: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater neutral current (3I_0) 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
Distance characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Distance comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Directional supervision: Characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Zero-sequence compensation Z0/Z1 magnitude: 0.50 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01 Z0/Z1 angle: 90 to 90 in steps of 1 Zero-sequence mutual compensation Z0M/Z1 magnitude: 0.00 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications): 0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Operation time: Reset time: 1 to 1.5 cycles (typical) 1 power cycle (typical)
GROUND DISTANCE OPERATING TIME CURVES

The operating times are response times of a microprocessor part of the relay. See output contacts specifications for estimation of the total response time for a particular application. The operating times are average times including variables such as fault inception angle or type of a voltage source (magnetic VTs and CVTs).
Ground Element (21G)

35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% Fault Location [%]
837718A1.CDR
SIR = 0.1 SIR = 1 SIR = 10 SIR = 20 SIR = 30
GE Multilin
Operating Time [ms]
2-7
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS LINE PICKUP

Phase IOC: Undervoltage pickup: Overvoltage delay: Current: 0.000 to 30.000 pu 0.000 to 3.000 pu 0.000 to 65.535 s Phasor or RMS 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97% to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve) Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Operate at > 1.03 actual Pickup 3.5% of operate time or cycle (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading <2% 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <20 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz Operate at 1.5 Pickup 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97% to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating 1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve) Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) and Linear Operate at > 1.03 Actual Pickup 3.5% of operate time or cycle (whichever is greater)
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC

Pickup level: Dropout level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) > 2.0 CT rating: 1.5% of reading Overreach: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Operate time: Timing accuracy: < 2% 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 < 20 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz Operate at 1.5 Pickup 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 90 (quadrature)
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: for 0.1 to 2.0 CT: for > 2.0 CT: Curve shapes:
PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Relay connection: Quadrature voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase B (VCA), phase C (VAB) ACB phase seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC), phase C (VBA) Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu Characteristic angle: Angle accuracy: 0 to 359 in steps of 1 2
Curve multiplier: Reset type: Timing accuracy:
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating Overreach: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Operate time: Timing accuracy:
Operation time (FlexLogic operands): Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):< 12 ms, typically Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):< 8 ms, typically
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Polarizing current: Operating current: Level sensing: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Operating current: Level sensing: Zero-sequence: Negative-sequence: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage, Current, Dual V_0 or VX IG I_0 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|), K = 0.0625; IG 90 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage V_2 I_2 |I_0| K |I_1|, K = 0.0625 |I_2| K |I_1|, K = 0.125 0 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC

Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy:
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier (Time dial): 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Reset type: Timing accuracy:
2-8
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse; Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Operate at < 0.90 Pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) Phasor only 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS BREAKER FAILURE

Mode: Current supervision: Current supv. pickup: Current supv. dropout: 1-pole, 3-pole Phase, Neutral Current 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup
Current supv. accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: 0.75% of reading or 2% of rated (whichever is greater) above 2 CT rating: 2.5% of reading
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1 Max angle difference: Max freq. difference: Dead source function: 0 to 100 in steps of 1 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2 (L = Live, D = Dead)
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy:
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
AUTORECLOSURE
Two breakers applications Single- and three-pole tripping schemes Up to 2 reclose attempts before lockout Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Operate time: Timing accuracy: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time:
PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Direct Underreaching Transfer Trip (DUTT) Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip (PUTT) Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (POTT) Hybrid POTT Scheme Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
TRIP OUTPUT
Collects trip and reclose input requests and issues outputs to control tripping and reclosing. Communications timer delay: 0 to 65535 s in steps of 0.001 Timing accuracy: Functions: Characteristic: Measured impedance: Tripping mode: Current supervision: Pickup level: Dropout level: 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater Power swing block, Out-of-step trip Mho or Quad Positive-sequence Early or Delayed 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup
POWER SWING DETECT
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step
Fwd / reverse reach (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Left and right blinders (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Impedance accuracy: Angle accuracy: Timers: Timing accuracy: 5% 2 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90 in steps of 1 Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140 in steps of 1
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
GE Multilin
2-9
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS LOAD ENCROACHMENT

Responds to: Minimum voltage: Reach (sec. ): Impedance accuracy: Angle: Angle accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Positive-sequence quantities 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.02 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 5% 5 to 50 in steps of 1 2 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 60 Hz
2.2.2 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS FLEXLOGIC

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable) Lines of code: Internal variables: Supported operations: 512 64 NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), Latch (Reset dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 32 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 4 (A through D) 40 (0 through 1 of pickup) 80 (1 through 20 of pickup) 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 8 any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode Level, Delta Over, Under 30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 20 ms to 60 days Reset mode:
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: Programmability: 48 plus Trip and Alarm from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input Self-reset or Latched from any digital input or user-programmable condition 3, interruptible at any time approximately 3 minutes all LEDs on all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s 16 2 20 alphanumeric characters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
LED TEST
Initiation: Number of tests: Duration of full test: Test sequence 1: Test sequence 2: Test sequence 3: Number of displays: Lines of display: Parameters: Invoking and scrolling:
Inputs: Number of timers: Pickup delay: Dropout delay:
FLEXCURVES
Number: Reset points: Operate points: Time delay:
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
FLEX STATES
Number: Programmability:
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7 Operation: drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Number of pushbuttons: 12 Mode: Display message: Self-Reset, Latched 2 lines of 20 characters each 2 1 to 7 in steps of 1 Time-out or Acknowledge 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 step-up and 3-bit restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or Synch/ Restore mode
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: Operating signal:
SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements: Upper position limit: Selecting mode: Time-out timer: Control inputs: Power-up mode:
Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value Operating mode: Comparator direction: Pickup Level: Hysteresis: Delta dt:
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Number: Output: Execution sequence: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant 16 (individually programmed) Stored in non-volatile memory As input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic
2-10
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records: Sampling rate: Triggers: 64 64 samples per power cycle Any element pickup, dropout or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state FlexLogic equation AC input channels Element state Digital input state Digital output state In non-volatile memory 1024 events to 1 microsecond Any element pickup, dropout or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state Self-test events In non-volatile memory
DATA LOGGER
Number of channels: Parameters: Sampling rate: Storage capacity: 1-second rate: 60-minute rate: 1 to 16 Any available analog actual value 1 sec.; 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min. (NN is dependent on memory) 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days Single-ended Fault resistance is zero or fault currents from all line terminals are in phase 1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
Data:
Data storage:
FAULT LOCATOR
Method: Maximum accuracy if: Relay accuracy:
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: Time-tag: Triggers:
Data storage:
Worst-case accuracy: (user data) VT%error + CT%error + (user data) ZLine%error + (user data) METHOD%error + (Chapter 6) RELAY ACCURACY%error + (1.5%)
2.2.4 METERING RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND

Accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.0% of reading 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 1.0% of reading at 0.8 < PF 1.0 and 0.8 < PF 1.0 1.0% of reading at 0.2 PF 0.2
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: 2.0% of reading 0 to 2 109 Mvarh 3-phase only 50 ms
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: Accuracy:
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: I > 0.25 pu: 0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement) 0.05 Hz 0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement) Phases A, B, and C present and maximum measured currents 3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present and maximum measured currents 2.0%
REAL POWER (WATTS)
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy: Accuracy: Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate:
APPARENT POWER (VA)

1.0% of reading 2.0% of reading 0 to 2 109 MWh 3-phase only 50 ms
DEMAND
Measurements:
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy:
GE Multilin
2-11
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary: CT rated secondary: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: 1 to 50000 A 1 A or 5 A by connection 20 to 62 Hz < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): Sensing current: Range: Accuracy: Isolation: 100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10 Copper 5 mA 50 to +250C 2C 36 V pk-pk 1 to 10 V pk-pk TTL 22 k
Conversion range: Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical Sensitive Ground module: 0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated 1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated 50.0 to 240.0 V 1.00 to 24000.00 20 to 62 Hz < 0.25 VA at 120 V 1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral 1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable) 379 10% 1 to + 20 mA DC 0.2% of full scale Passive
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: DC shift: Input impedance:
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: VT ratio: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: Conversion range: Voltage withstand:
REMOTE INPUTS (MMS GOOSE)

Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs Number of remote devices:16 Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
DIRECT INPUTS
Number of input points: 32 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 16 Yes, No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Recognition time: Debounce timer:
CRC alarm: Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1 Unreturned message alarm: Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): Input impedance: Conversion range: Accuracy: Type:
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY LOW RANGE

Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: 24 to 48 V at 3 A 20 / 60 V
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: Voltage loss hold-up: Power consumption: 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms 50 ms duration at nominal Typical = 35 VA; Max. = 75 VA
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: Nominal AC voltage: Min/max AC voltage: 125 to 250 V at 0.7 A 88 / 300 V 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A 88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz
INTERNAL FUSE RATINGS

Low range power supply: 7.5 A / 600 V High range power supply: 5 A / 600 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: DC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical 10 000 A
2-12
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: 6A 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V 0.10 A DC max. at 125 V < 4 ms Silver alloy
FAST FORM-C RELAY

Make and carry:
INPUT VOLTAGE 250 V DC 120 V DC 48 V DC 24 V DC
0.1 A max. (resistive load)

IMPEDANCE 2 W RESISTOR 20 K 5 K 2 K 2 K 1 W RESISTOR 50 K 2 K 2 K 2 K
Minimum load impedance:
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: Control: Control mode: Applicable voltage: Trickle current: Threshold current: 6A 0.25 A DC max. < 4 ms Silver alloy separate operate and reset inputs operate-dominant or reset-dominant approx. 15 to 250 V DC approx. 1 to 2.5 mA approx. 80 to 100 mA
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Operate time: Power: Resistance:
< 0.6 ms 2 watts 100 ohms
INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR:
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)

Capacity: Isolation: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC 300 Vpk
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 s: 10 A Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: 6A 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V 0.10 A DC max. at 125 V < 8 ms Silver alloy
REMOTE OUTPUTS (MMS GOOSE)

Standard output points: 32 User output points: 32 32
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points:
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS RS232

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated together at 36 Vpk 1200 m
ETHERNET PORT
10Base-F: 820 nm, multi-mode, supports halfduplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST connector 820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/fullduplex fiber optic with ST connector RJ45 connector 10 db 7.6 dBm 1.65 km
RS485
1 or 2 rear ports: Typical distance: Redundant 10Base-F: 10Base-T: Power budget: Max optical Ip power: Typical distance:
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
GE Multilin
2-13
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE RS422 G.703 TYPICAL DISTANCE 1200 m 100 m
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE 820 nm LED 1300 nm LED 1300 nm ELED 1300 nm Laser 1550 nm Laser FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR TYPE Multimode Multimode Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode ST ST ST ST ST TYPICAL DISTANCE 1.65 km 3.8 km 11.4 km 64 km 105 km
2
NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode TRANSMIT POWER 20 dBm 21 dBm 21 dBm 1 dBm +5 dBm RECEIVED SENSITIVITY 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm POWER BUDGET 10 dB 9 dB 9 dB 29 dB 35 dB
NOTE
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.
2 dB 3 dB/km 1 dB/km 0.35 dB/km 0.25 dB/km One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 1300 nm multimode 1300 nm singlemode 1550 nm singlemode Splice losses:
NOTE
These Power Budgets are calculated from the manufacturers worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode MAX. OPTICAL INPUT POWER 7.6 dBm 11 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses. Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES

Cold: Dry Heat: IEC 60068-2-1, 16 h at 40C IEC 60068-2-2, 16 h at +85C
OTHER
Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6 days Altitude: Installation Category: Up to 2000 m II
2-14
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60255-22-4 Oscillatory transient: Insulation resistance: Dielectric strength: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-6 ANSI/IEEE C37.90 EN 61000-4-5 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 60255-22-3 Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
Conducted RFI:
IEC 61000-4-6
Voltage dips/interruptions/variations: IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 60255-11 Power frequency magnetic field immunity: IEC 61000-4-8 Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1 Shock and bump: IEC 60255-21-2
Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2 Surge immunity: RFI susceptibility:

NOTE
Type test report available upon request.
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS THERMAL

Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2.2.13 APPROVALS APPROVALS

UL Listed for the USA and Canada CE: LVD 73/23/EEC: EMC 81/336/EEC:
IEC 1010-1 EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE MOUNTING

Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
GE Multilin
2-15
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2-16
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The vertical and horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment. The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.
UR SERIES
Figure 31: D60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS
GE Multilin
3-1
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
Figure 32: D60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION
3-2
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 33: D60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS
Figure 34: D60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS
GE Multilin
3-3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
WARNING
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation! Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots. The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 35: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits. INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted. Type 9C and 9D CPU modules are equipped with 10Base-T and 10Base-F Ethernet connectors for communications. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
3-4
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
837704AC.CDR
Figure 36: REAR TERMINAL VIEW Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 37: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F & H SLOTS
GE Multilin
3-5
3.2 WIRING 3.2WIRING

TRIPPING DIRECTION
3 HARDWARE 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING

TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
CAUTION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
(5 Amp)
B C
52
52
A
CURRENT POLARIZATION SOURCE
F 4b
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 4a
F 8a
VX
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 2c
F 3c
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 4c
VA
IG5
IG1
IA5
IA1
IC1
IC5
IB5
IB1
VA
VC
VB
VX
VC
VB
IG
IA
IB
IC
F 8c
VOLT & CURRENT SUPV.
F 1c
CURRENT INPUTS
H1
V I
H2
V I
H 8b
SURGE
H3
V I
H4
GE Multilin
V I
H6 W 5a W 5c W 6a W 6c W 5b W 7a W7c W 8a W 8c W7b W 8b
( DC ONLY )
V I
W2
CONTACT IN W 7a CONTACT IN W 7c CONTACT IN W 8a CONTACT IN W 8c COMMON W7b SURGE
W3
W4
6C
P1
P2 U 1a U 1c U 2a U 2c U 1b U 3a U 3c U 4a U 4c U 3b U 5a U 5c U 6a U 6c U 5b U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b
CONTACT IN U1a CONTACT IN U1c CONTACT IN U2a CONTACT IN U2c COMMON U1b CONTACT IN U3a CONTACT IN U3c CONTACT IN U4a CONTACT IN U4c COMMON U3b CONTACT IN U5a CONTACT IN U5c CONTACT IN U6a CONTACT IN U6c COMMON U5b CONTACT IN U7a CONTACT IN U7c CONTACT IN U8a CONTACT IN U8c COMMON U7b SURGE
P3
P4
P5
P6
DIGITAL I/O
P7
DIGITAL I/O
P8
P 1a P 1b P 1c P 2a P 2b P 2c P 3a P 3b P 3c P 4a P 4b P 4c P 5a P 5b P 5c P 6a P 6b P 6c P 7a P 7b P 7c P 8a P 8b P 8c M1a M1b M1c M2a M2b M2c M3a M3b M3c M4a M4b M4c M5a M5b M5c M6a M6b M6c M7a M7b M7c M8a M8b M8c
PERSONAL COMPUTER
RS-232 DB-9
(front)
M1
DC AC or DC Shielded twisted pairs
B 1b B 1a B 2b B 3a B 3b B5b HI B 6b LO B 6a B 8a B 8b
D2a D3a D4a D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER
M2
9 PIN CONNECTOR
25 PIN CONNECTOR
POWER SUPPLY
M3
CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER
M4
M5
1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9

UR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22
COMPUTER
COM
RS485 COM 1 RS485 COM 2
M6
COM
Ground at Device end

No. 10AWG Minimum
SURGE
CPU
IRIG-B
DIGITAL I/O
M7
M8
GROUND BUS
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
837712AB.CDR
F
8 CT/VT
X W V U T
6 I/O * 6 I/O *
R
6
P N M L
6 I/O *
J
6
H G
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
MODULES MUST BE GROUNDED IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED
I/O *
I/O
(Rear View)
* Optional
Figure 38: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
3-6
This diagram is based on the following order code: D60-A00-HCL-F8A-H6H-M6K-P6C-U6D-W6A.
6D
9A
6K
CONTACT IN W 5a CONTACT IN W 5c CONTACT IN W 6a CONTACT IN W 6c COMMON W 5b
DIGITAL I/O
6A
W1
D60 LINE DISTANCE RELAY
H5
H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON
H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H7b
8A / 8B DIGITAL I/O
VOLTAGE INPUTS 6H
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5b H 5c H 6a H 6b H 6c W1a W1b W1c W2a W2b W2c W3a W3b W3c W4a W4b W4c
TC1
VOLTAGE SUPV.
TC2
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of UR module hardware is shown in the following table: Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE TYPE 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9
1
MODULE FUNCTION FROM Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Reserved for Future Reserved for Future Reserved for Future Analog I/O Digital I/O CT/VT CPU
TERMINALS TO Chassis Chassis Chassis N/A N/A N/A Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis High (+); Low (+); () 48 V DC (+) and () Relay Terminals N/A N/A N/A All except 8b All (See Precaution 2) All All except 7b
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH (AC) 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1 2000 V AC for 1 minute 1 N/A N/A N/A < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute < 50 VDC
See TEST PRECAUTION 1 below.
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute. For testing of dielectric strength where the test interval may exceed one minute, always observe the following precautions: 1. 2. The connection from ground to the Filter Ground (Terminal 8b) and Surge Ground (Terminal 8a) must be removed before testing. Some versions of the digital I/O module have a Surge Ground connection on Terminal 8b. On these module types, this connection must be removed before testing. 3.2.3 CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR! The D60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
CAUTION
NOTE
The power supply module can be ordered with either of two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for details): LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections. The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors Table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
GE Multilin
3-7
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
Figure 39: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION 3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on Channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or Channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to Phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for connection to Phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to Phase C and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this channel is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system neutral and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG). a) CT INPUTS VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.
CAUTION
The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (Type 8A) or with a sensitive ground input (Type 8B) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for more details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used. CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. b) VT INPUTS The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features. Substitute the tilde ~ symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figures.
~ 4b
IG
~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 3b
~ 8a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 4a
~ 5a
~ 1a
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 2c
~ 8c
~ 6c
~ 3c
~ 5c
~ 7c
~ 1c
VC
VB
VA
VX
VC
VB
VX
IG5
IA5
VOLTAGE INPUTS 8A / 8B
CURRENT INPUTS
827831A9-X5.CDR
Figure 310: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
3-8
IG1
VA
IA1
IA
IB
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IC
~ 4c
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a digital input/output module is ordered with contact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be totally isolated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the available number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically isolated, each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four outputs to be supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts. The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position. UR-SERIES FORM-A / SOLID STATE (SSR) OUTPUT CONTACTS: Some Form-A/SSR outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On = 1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below above for the Form-A outputs with: a) optional voltage monitor b) optional current monitor c) with no monitoring
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff
~#a I ~#b V ~#c a) Voltage with optional current monitoring Voltage monitoring only If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff I
~#a
Load
Load
+
~#b V ~#c
Both voltage and current monitoring If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff
~#a V I ~#b ~#c b) Current with optional voltage monitoring Current monitoring only If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff V
~#a
Load
Load
+
~#b ~#c
Both voltage and current monitoring (external jumper a-b is required) 827821A5.CDR
~#a ~#b ~#c
Load
+
c) No monitoring
Figure 311: FORM-A /SOLID STATE CONTACT FUNCTIONS
GE Multilin
3-9
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (Cont Op # Von, Cont Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control command. Refer to the Digital Elements section of Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A/SSR contacts can be applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring. Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels! USE OF FORM-A/SSR OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE
WARNING
For Form-A/SSR output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the Form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance. The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A/SSR contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).
Table 32: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6B I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6C I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C ~6D I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6E I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6F I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C
~6G I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6H I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
3-10
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
~6K I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C
~6L I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6M I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6N I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
3
~6P I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6R I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6S I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6T I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6U I/O MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~67 I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A
~4A I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State
~4B I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State
~4C I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State
~4L I/O MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs Not Used
GE Multilin
3-11
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
827719CY-X1.dwg
Figure 312: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
3-12
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
MOSFET Solid State Contact
827719CY-X2.dwg
Figure 313: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2) CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION
GE Multilin
3-13
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
A dry contact has one side connected to Terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit. A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 7b COMMON ~ 8b SURGE 6B ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 8b SURGE
24-250V
B 1b CRITICAL B 1a FAILURE B 2b B 3a 48 VDC OUTPUT B 3b + B 5b HI+ CONTROL B 6b LO+ POWER B 6a B 8a SURGE B 8b FILTER
POWER SUPPLY
827741A4.CDR
Figure 314: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts. There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE
3-14
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input/output modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/ output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number. Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5C, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
827831A9-X1.CDR
Figure 315: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING
GE Multilin
3-15
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relays faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors. Note that the baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
Figure 316: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION 3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS a) OPTIONS In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s) depending on the CPU module installed.
CPU TYPE 9A 9C 9D COM1 RS485 10Base-F and 10Base-T Redundant 10Base-F COM2 RS485 RS485 RS485
SURGE GROUND
827831A9-X6.CDR
Figure 317: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
3-16
CPU
D2a D3a D4a D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
9C
COM
RS485 COM 1 RS485 COM 2
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
NORMAL RS485 COM 2
COM 1
9A
Tx2 Rx210BaseF
ALTERNATE COM 1 NORMAL RS485 COM 2

IRIG-B
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
COM
COM
CPU
SURGE
SURGE
CPU
IRIG-B
IRIG-B
COM
9D
Tx
Rx 10BaseF
NORMAL
Tx1 Rx110BaseF
NORMAL
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE b) RS485 PORTS
3.2 WIRING
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system or PLC is possible. To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485 terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely. Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed. Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
ZT (*) DATA
SHIELD
TWISTED PAIR
RELAY
D2a D3a RS485 +
DATA
RS485 PORT RS485 36V D7b

Required
COM SURGE
CHASSIS GROUND
D4a
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER
COMP 485COM
GROUND SHIELD AT SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY OR AT UR RELAY ONLY
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END (TYPICALLY 120 Ohms and 1 nF)
RELAY
D2a D3a D7b D4a RS485 + 485 SURGE COMP 485COM
UP TO 32 DEVICES, MAXIMUM 4000 FEET
RELAY
ZT (*)
D2a D3a D7b D4a
485 + 485 SURGE COMP 485COM

LAST DEVICE
827757A5.DWG
Figure 318: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
3-17
3.2 WIRING c) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT
3 HARDWARE
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for CPU types 9C and 9D. The 9D CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB). When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required. 3.2.9 IRIG-B
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL
IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR

(DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
RELAY
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE + D5a IRIG-B(+) RECEIVER D6a IRIG-B(-)
827756A4.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
Figure 319: IRIG-B CONNECTION IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
3-18
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.3DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The D60 direct inputs/outputs feature makes use of the Type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The Direct I/O feature uses the communications channel(s) provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay. The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of sixteen (16) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
UR #1
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
842006A1.CDR
UR #2
UR #3
UR #4
Figure 320: DIRECT I/O SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION The following diagram shows the interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules. Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required connections are as follows: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, UR2-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, and UR4-Tx2 to UR1Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1 Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #1
UR #2
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #3
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #4
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2

842007A1.CDR
Figure 321: DIRECT I/O DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION
GE Multilin
3-19
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
The following diagram shows the interconnection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels. UR1 and UR3 have single Type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the Direct I/O data to cross-over from Channel 1 to Channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2. This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
Tx Rx
UR #1
Channel #1
Tx1
UR #2
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2
Channel #2 UR #3
Tx Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 322: DIRECT I/O SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors. Table 33: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
MODULE TYPE 7A 7B 7C 7D 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7R 7S 7T 7W 72 73 74 76 77 SPECIFICATION 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1: RS422, Channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
3-20
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: Connection Location: 7A / 7B / 7C Slot X 7H / 7I / 7J Slot X
RX1 TX1
RX1 TX1
3
RX2 TX2 1 Channel 2 Channels
831719A2.CDR
Figure 323: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: Connection Location: 72/ 7D Slot X TX1 RX1 73/ 7K Slot X TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 324: LASER FIBER MODULES When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
GE Multilin
3-21
3 HARDWARE 3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b
Shld. Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 1
SURGE
Shld. Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 2
SURGE
Figure 325: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
7R
Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 1
G.703 CHANNEL 1
SURGE
Shld.
SURGE
Shld. Rx Tx + Rx +
L90 COMM.
G.703 CHANNEL 2
Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 2
SURGE
SURGE
Figure 326: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and B is equivalent to .
NOTE
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes. Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the G.703 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
3-22
L90 COMM.
Tx -
Tx -
7R
Shld.
L90 COMM.
Tx -
7R
Shld.
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 327: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING Table 34: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES S1 S5 and S6 FUNCTION OFF Octet Timing Disabled ON Octet Timing 8 kHz S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF Loop Timing Mode S5 = ON and S6 = OFF Internal Timing Mode S5 = OFF and S6 = ON Minimum Remote Loopback Mode S5 = ON and S6 = ON Dual Loopback Mode
c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1) If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When D60s are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF). d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6) Internal Timing Mode: The system clock generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the Internal Timing Mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For Back to Back Connections, set for Octet Timing (S1 = OFF) and Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF). Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to Octet Timing (S1 = ON) and set Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF).
GE Multilin
3-23
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6) MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE:
3 HARDWARE
In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMR
G7X
3
DMX G7R
DUAL LOOPBACK MODE: In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each Receiver/ Transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
3-24
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the RS422 2-Terminal interface configuration at 64K baud. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically isolated. SHIELD TERMINATION The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows: Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b; Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b. The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 5b W 5a W 4a W 6b W 7b W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
W7W
Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com
RS422 CHANNEL 1
RS422 CHANNEL 2
CLOCK
SURGE
RS422.CDR p/o 827831A6.CDR
Figure 328: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
64 KHz
831728A3.CDR
7T
RS422 CHANNEL 1
Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com
Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com
RS422 CHANNEL 1
CLOCK
CLOCK
SURGE
SURGE
Figure 329: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b) TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS The RS422 Interface may be used for 1 channel or 2 channel applications over SONET/SDH and/or Multiplexed systems. When used in 1 channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing Tx, Rx, and Send Timing connections. However, when used in 2 channel applications, certain criteria have to be followed due to the fact that there is 1 clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your Data Module has a feature called Terminal Timing. Terminal Timing is a common feature to most Synchronous Data Units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the Terminal Timing feature, 2 channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The Send Timing outputs from the Multiplexer - Data Module 1, will connect to the Clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the Send Timing outputs of Data Module 1 will also be paralleled to the Terminal Timing inputs of Data Module 2. By using this configuration the timing for both Data Modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the Send Timing leads on Data Module 1 as shown in the following figure. If the Terminal Timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
GE Multilin
7T
Tx -
Tx -
3-25
3 HARDWARE
Data Module 1 Pin No. Signal Name SD(A) - Send Data SD(B) - Send Data RD(A) - Received Data RD(B) - Received Data RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS) RT(A) - Receive Timing RT(B) - Receive Timing CS(A) - Clear To Send CS(B) - Clear To Send Local Loopback Remote Loopback Signal Ground ST(A) - Send Timing ST(B) - Send Timing Data Module 2 Pin No. Signal Name TT(A) - Terminal Timing TT(B) - Terminal Timing SD(A) - Sand Data SD(B) - Sand Data RD(A) - Received Data RD(B) - Received Data RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS) CS(A) - Clear To Send CS(B) - Clear To Send Local Loopback Remote Loopback Signal Ground ST(A) - Send Timing ST(B) - Send Timing 831022A2.CDR
7W
Tx1(+) Tx1(-)
RS422 CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+) Rx1(-) Shld.
CLOCK
+ Tx2(+) Tx2(-)
L90 COMM.
RS422 CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+) Rx2(-) Shld. com
SURGE
W 2a W 3b W 4b W 3a W 6a W 7a W 8b W 4a W 5b W 6b W 5a W 7b W 2b W 8a
Figure 330: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION Data Module 1 provides timing to the D60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data Module 1 also provides timing to Data Module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The Data Module pin numbers have been omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer. c) TRANSIT TIMING The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 331: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS
3-26
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data. NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code. To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock. 3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
Rx1 Tx1 + Rx1 + Shld.
RS422 CHANNEL 1
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHANNEL 2
W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a
+ com
CLOCK (CHANNEL1) SURGE

L907LMNP.CDR P/O 827831A6.CDR
Figure 332: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units. 3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b
Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 1
SURGE
Tx2 Rx2
FIBER CHANNEL 2
Figure 333: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
GE Multilin
W7E, F, G and Q
Shld.
W7L, M, N, P and 74
W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a
Tx1 -
3-27
3 HARDWARE 3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (76 and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers and/or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input/output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows: IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode: multi-mode Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km Fiber optic connector: type ST Wavelength: 830 40 nm Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required. The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
IEEE C37.94 Fiber Interface UR series relay up to 2 km Digital Multiplexer IEEE C37.94 compliant
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as shown below.
IEEE C37.94 Fiber Interface UR series relay up to 2 km IEEE C37.94 Converter RS422 Interface
Digital Multiplexer with EIA-422 Interface
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
Internal Timing Mode
te xt te te xt te xt te xt xt te xt xt te xt xt te xt
Loop Timed
ON OFF
xt te xt xt te xt xt te xt xt te xt xt te xt xt te xt
ON OFF
5
Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6
6
Internal ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
1
Loop Timed OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
3-28
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured. For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. The C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows: 1. Remove the C37.94 module (76 or 77): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the C37.94 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 334: C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
GE Multilin
3-29
3 HARDWARE
3-30
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (see Faceplate Interface section in this chapter). The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. offline) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time. The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every D60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the D60 section in Chapter 1 for details. 4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR product series. b) USING SETTINGS FILES The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings: In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays. While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay. You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings: Device Definition Product Setup System Setup FlexLogic Grouped Elements Control Elements Inputs/Outputs Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes. c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram.
GE Multilin
4-1
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters. e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following: Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu. Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target. New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device. g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES The firmware of a D60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware. Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
NOTE
4-2
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view Main window menu bar Main window tool bar Site List control bar window Settings List control bar window Device data view window(s), with common tool bar Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar Workspace area with data view tabs Status bar
Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
GE Multilin
4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface is implemented via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The faceplate interface is available in two configurations: horizontal or vertical. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following two figures show the horizontal and vertical arrangement of faceplate panels.
LED PANEL 1
LED PANEL 2
LED PANEL 3
DISPLAY
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND
IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP
RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3
GE Multilin
USER 4
4
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS 1-7
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
11
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
USER 5
ESCAPE
USER 6 USER 7
1
VALUE
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
10
USER LABEL
12
ENTER
+/-
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS 1-12
KEYPAD
827801A5.CDR
Figure 42: UR-SERIES HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
DISPLAY
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
KEYPAD
ENTER
VALUE
+/-
LED PANEL 3
LED PANEL 2
STATUS
LED PANEL 1
Figure 43: UR-SERIES VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS
827830A1.CDR
4-4
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.2 LED INDICATORS
a) LED PANEL 1 This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The USER keys are used by the Breaker Control feature. The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
STATUS
Figure 44: LED PANEL 1 STATUS INDICATORS: IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed. TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode. TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS: These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag waiting to be reset. VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: Indicates current was involved. FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved. OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved. PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved. PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved. PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved. NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.
GE Multilin
4-5
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-Programmable LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 45: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)
c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2 The default labels are intended to represent: GROUP 1...8: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group. BREAKER n OPEN: The breaker is open. BREAKER n CLOSED: The breaker is closed. BREAKER n TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected. SYNCHROCHECK NO n IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element. RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational. RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational. RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress. RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset. Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
NOTE
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-Programmable LEDs section of Chapter 5. The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both LED panels 2 and 3 as explained in the next section.
SETTINGS IN USE
BREAKER 1 OPEN CLOSED TROUBLE
SYNCHROCHECK
GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 GROUP 8
NO1 IN-SYNCH NO2 IN-SYNCH RECLOSE
BREAKER 2 OPEN CLOSED TROUBLE
ENABLED DISABLED IN PROGRESS LOCKED OUT
Figure 46: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)
4-6
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES d) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/ This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling. 1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1501-0014).
Push in and gently lift up the cover.

2. Pop out the LED Module and/or the Blank Module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic.
( LED MODULE )
( BLANK MODULE )
3. 4.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side. Put the clear Lexan Front Cover back into place.
e) CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE The following items are required to customize the UR display module: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Black and white or color printer (color preferred) Microsoft Word 97 or later software 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069), and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use. Print the template(s) to a local printer. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
GE Multilin
4-7
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.3 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display. 4.2.4 KEYPAD Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values. key may be
4
a) DESCRIPTION
4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL
The D60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker, which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker No. 1. For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS TION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker. b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-Pole), or in the one and three-pole (1Pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as 3-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER n BREAKER For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is "Enabled" for each breaker. The D60 has features required for single-pole operation. Inputs that trip individual breaker poles and cause a breaker reclose are passed directly to this element. SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER n BREAKER FUNC-
c) FACEPLATE PUSHBUTTON (USER KEY) CONTROL After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state. d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS For the following example setup, the symbol (Name) represents the user-programmed variable name. For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker No. 1 and breaker No. 2. The USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
4-8
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
ENTER COMMAND PASSWORD
COMMAND PASSWORD
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes. This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again. This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2) and (3) below:
Press USER 1 To Select Breaker BKR1-(Name) SELECTED USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON To Close BKR1-(Name)

(2)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to close breaker No. 1. If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to open breaker No. 1. If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1), (2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers. Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
USER 3 OFF/ON To Open BKR1-(Name)

(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker No. 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to that described for two breakers. 4.2.6 MENUS a) NAVIGATION Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below.
ACTUAL VALUES
SETTINGS
COMMANDS
TARGETS
No Active Targets
USER DISPLAYS (when in use)
User Display 1
GE Multilin
4-9
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE b) HIERARCHY
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
PASSWORD SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION ACTUAL VALUES STATUS Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers. Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains settings to configure the relay.
Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header. From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE once to display the first sub-header (Password Security). key
PASSWORD SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25%
Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will display the remaining setting messages for this sub-header. Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header. Press the MESSAGE play Properties. key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-
To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader, repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appears as shown.
4-10
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s MINIMUM: MAXIMUM: 0.5 10.0 For example, select the SETTINGS setting.
PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH
MESSAGE TIME
Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the again to view the next context sensitive help message.
key
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available. 0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display. VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value. As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered. Until is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 2.5 s NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members. ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command", "Setting", and "Factory Service". key displays the next selection while the
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE VALUE key displays the previous selection. ACCESS LEVEL: Setting NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press at any time for the context sensitive help messages. Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process.
GE Multilin
4-11
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters. There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages. For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press to enter text edit mode. to advance the cursor to the next position.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1. Press to store the text.
If you have any problem, press to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display. key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display. key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed
5. 6.
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the selection to "Programmed". Press the key. RELAY SETTINGS: Programmed NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
4-12
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 7.
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS To enter the initial Setting (or Command) Password, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE display. SETTINGS key until the ACCESS LEVEL: message appears on the display. key until the CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD: message appears on the
PASSWORD SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------
4. 5. 6. 7.
After the 'CHANGE...PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE change the selection to Yes. Press the key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'. key.
key or the VALUE
key to
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the
When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' is displayed, re-type in the same password and press CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED 8. When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
SECURITY
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD menu to the Factory for decoding.
GE Multilin
4-13
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4-14
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW
5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES CLEAR RELAY RECORDS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS USER MAP REAL TIME CLOCK FAULT REPORT OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FLEX STATE PARAMETERS USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS DIRECT I/O INSTALLATION
See page 5-7. See page 5-8. See page 5-10. See page 5-11. See page 5-17. See page 5-17. See page 5-18. See page 5-19. See page 5-21. See page 5-22. See page 5-25. See page 5-25. See page 5-27. See page 5-28. See page 5-29. See page 5-31. See page 5-36.
AC INPUTS POWER SYSTEM SIGNAL SOURCES LINE
See page 5-37. See page 5-38. See page 5-39. See page 5-41.
GE Multilin
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW BREAKERS FLEXCURVES
5 SETTINGS
See page 5-42. See page 5-45.
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXELEMENTS NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2
See page 5-72.
5
SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 6
SETTING GROUPS SELECTOR SWITCH TRIP OUTPUT SYNCHROCHECK AUTORECLOSE DIGITAL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS MONITORING ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES
See page 5-141. See page 5-142. See page 5-148. See page 5-151. See page 5-155. See page 5-166. See page 5-169. See page 5-171. See page 5-176.
SETTINGS INPUTS / OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS
5-2
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS RESETTING DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS
5.1 OVERVIEW
See page 5-193. See page 5-195. See page 5-196. See page 5-197. See page 5-198. See page 5-199. See page 5-199. See page 5-199. See page 5-199.
SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O
DCMA INPUTS RTD INPUTS
SETTINGS TESTING
TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE INITIATE: On FORCE CONTACT INPUTS FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Element which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input. Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent of the selected active setting group. The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
GE Multilin
5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities: pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
5 SETTINGS
For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or primary current to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary. For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay. For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V Delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be: 13800 --------------- 120 = 115 V 14400 For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be: 13800 120 --------------- --------- = 66.4 V 14400 3 Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
(EQ 5.2) (EQ 5.1)
FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory default is Disabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the Function becomes active and all options become available. NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element. SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored. PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup. PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup and Operate output states. RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range. BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control. TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to SelfReset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay. EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to Enabled, events are created for: (Element) PKP (pickup) (Element) DPO (dropout) (Element) OP (operate) The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0.
5-4
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND The D60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements. Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels. The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation. A mechanism called a Source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism. To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer Winding 1. The current into Winding 1 is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT connections). The same considerations apply to transformer Winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
CT1
Through Current
CT2
WDG 1
UR Platform
Power Transformer
WDG 2
CT3
CT4
827791A2.CDR
Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings. A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure. Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
GE Multilin
5-5
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as Wdg 1 Current. Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities. b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module. A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are Channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage. Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 < bank 1 > < bank 2 > CT/VT MODULE 2 < bank 3 > < bank 4 > CT/VT MODULE 3 < bank 5 > < bank 6 >
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of Sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM CT/VT Module CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) MAXIMUM NUMBER 3 6 3
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5. For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels. Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5. The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes. The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
5-6
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.2PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
PASSWORD SECURITY
MESSAGE
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting, Factory Service (for factory use only) Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision are: COMMAND: operating the breakers via faceplate keypad, changing the state of virtual inputs, clearing the event records, clearing the oscillography records, clearing fault reports, changing the date and time, clearing the breaker arcing amps, clearing the data logger, user-programmable pushbuttons changing any setting, test mode operation
SETTING:
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled. Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked: 1. 2. 3. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________ VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________ NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically revert to the "Restricted" level. If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD. The D60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
ALARMS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORISED The UNAUTHORISED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected.
The operand does not generate events or targets. If these are required, the operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs and/or targets enabled. If the SETTING and COMMAND passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
NOTE
When EnerVista UR Setup is used to access a particular level, the user will continue to have access to that level as long as there are open windows in EnerVista UR Setup. To re-establish the Password Security feature, all URPC windows must be closed for at least 30 minutes.
GE Multilin
5-7
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
MESSAGE
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: 300 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25 % SCREEN SAVER FEATURE: Disabled SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: 30 min CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.020 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Visible only if a VFD is installed Range: Disabled, Enabled Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1 Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness. SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the D60 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on. CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The D60 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off. VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The D60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off. This setting relates to the actual measured voltage at the VT secondary inputs. It can be converted to per-unit values (pu) by dividing by the PHASE VT SECONDARY setting value. For example, a PHASE VT SECONDARY setting of 66.4 V and a VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL setting of 1.0 V gives a cut-off value of 1.0 V / 66.4 V = 0.015 pu.
5-8
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections: 3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary 3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary For Wye connections: 3-phase power cut-off = 3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary per-phase power cut-off = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.3)
(EQ 5.4)
(EQ 5.5)
where VT primary = VT secondary VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary CT ratio. For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1" PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta.
We have: CT primary = 100 A, and VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V The power cut-off is therefore: power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL CT primary VT primary)/VT secondary = ( 3 0.02 pu 1.0 V 100 A 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V = 720.5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off. Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02 pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

MESSAGE
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: Off CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Off CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Off CLEAR ARC AMPS 1: Off CLEAR ARC AMPS 2: Off CLEAR ENERGY: Off RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Off CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: FlexLogic operand. Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since D60 responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect. Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required. For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied. 1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PRODUCT SETUP
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PRODUCT
2.
SETUP
Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s
5-10
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS NETWORK MODBUS PROTOCOL DNP PROTOCOL UCA/MMS PROTOCOL WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL TFTP PROTOCOL IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL SNTP PROTOCOL
See below. See page 512. See page 512. See page 512. See page 515. See page 515. See page 515. See page 516. See page 517.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU 9A is ordered. Range: None, Odd, Even Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 Range: None, Odd, Even
SERIAL PORTS
RS485 COM1 BAUD RATE: 19200

MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 PARITY: None RS485 COM1 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM2 PARITY: None RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
The D60 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type will depend on the CPU ordered: it may be either an Ethernet or an RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a personal computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software is used for downloading or uploading setting files, viewing measured parameters, and upgrading the relay firmware to the latest version. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP c) NETWORK

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
5 SETTINGS
NETWORK
IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0
MESSAGE
Range: Standard IP address format Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Press the MESSAGE key to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered. Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
SUBNET IP MASK: 0.0.0.0 GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 OSI NETWORK ADDRESS (NSAP) ETHERNET OPERATION MODE: Half-Duplex
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These messages appear only if the D60 is ordered with an Ethernet card. The IP addresses are used with DNP/Network, Modbus/TCP, MMS/UCA2, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The NSAP address is used with the MMS/UCA2 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple URs behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR, the router can map the URs to the same external IP address. The client software (URPC, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
5
NOTE
WARNING
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON). Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see the DNP Protocol description below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the D60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each D60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol. e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
DNP PROTOCOL
DNP PORT: NONE

MESSAGE
DNP ADDRESS: 255 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
MESSAGE
Range: Press the MESSAGE key to enter the DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
5-12
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER: 20000 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION: Disabled DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT: 5 s DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES: 10 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS: 1 USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS: Disabled NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST: 1 DNP CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP POWER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP ENERGY DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD: 1440 min DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE: 240 DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

MESSAGE
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The D60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The D60 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to a single DNP master (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the D60 maintains one set of DNP data change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the D60 at one time. The DNP PORT setting selects the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol; only a single port can be assigned. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
GE Multilin
5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the D60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS setting can force the D60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the D60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the D60 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the D60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message. The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the D60. See Appendix E for more information. The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that are included in the Analog Inputs points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that are configured. This setting is relevant only when the User Map is not used. The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the D60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the D60 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger). The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These settings group the D60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the D60 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP Object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the D60, the default deadbands will be in effect. The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the D60. Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required. The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels. The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default DNP Binary Inputs list on the D60 contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, virtual inputs and outputs, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom Binary Inputs points list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 Binary Input points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents Binary Input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents Binary Input points 32 to 47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings are set to Not Used, the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The D60 will form the Binary Inputs points list from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of Not Used. When using the User Maps for DNP data points (Analog Inputs and/or Binary Inputs) for relays with ethernet installed, check the DNP Points Lists D60 web page to ensure the desired points lists are created. This web page can be viewed using a web browser by entering the D60 IP address to access the D60 Main Menu, then by selecting the Device Information Menu > DNP Points Lists menu item.
NOTE
5-14
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS f) UCA/MMS PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s UCA LOGICAL DEVICE: UCADevice UCA/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER: 102 GOOSE FUNCTION: Enabled GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS: Off
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1. See UserSt Bit Pairs in the Remote Outputs section of this Chapter. Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing the name of the UCA logical device. Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The D60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by the Utility Communication Architecture (UCA). UCA/MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The D60 operates as a UCA/MMS server. The Remote Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-topeer GOOSE message scheme. The UCA LOGICAL DEVICE setting represents the MMS domain name (UCA logical device) where all UCA objects are located. The GOOSE FUNCTION setting allows for the blocking of GOOSE messages from the D60. This can be used during testing or to prevent the relay from sending GOOSE messages during normal operation. The GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS setting selects a FlexLogic operand to provide the state of the UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS data item. Refer to Appendix C: UCA/MMS Communications for additional details on the D60 UCA/MMS support. g) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT NUMBER: 80
The D60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the D60 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the D60 Main Menu. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the D60 into the Address box on the web browser. h) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER: 69

MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 NUMBER: 0 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The D60 operates as a TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the D60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
GE Multilin
5-15
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP i) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL Range: Enabled, Disabled
5 SETTINGS
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

MESSAGE
IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION: Disabled IEC TCP PORT NUMBER: 2404 IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0 IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD: 60 s NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST: 1 IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC OTHER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The D60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The D60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a single master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the D60 maintains one set of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, only one master should actively communicate with the D60 at one time. For situations where a second master is active in a hot standby configuration, the UR supports a second IEC 60870-5-104 connection providing the standby master sends only IEC 60870-5-104 Test Frame Activation messages for as long as the primary master is active. The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that are included in the M_ME_NC_1 (Measured value, short floating point) Analog points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that are configured. The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR, the default thresholds will be in effect. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCsetting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (Off/On).
TION
NOTE
5-16
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS j) SNTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SNTP PROTOCOL Range: Enabled, Disabled
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: 0.0.0.0 SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER: 123
Range: Standard IP address format
MESSAGE
The D60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the D60 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The D60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported. If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the D60 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the D60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad. To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the D60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the D60 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the D60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline. To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The D60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The D60 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error. The UR does not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality. 5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP
ADDRESS VALUE:
1: 0
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256: VALUE: 0
The Modbus User Map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions. These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP Analog Input Points section in Appendix E for details.
NOTE
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered. See also the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.
GE Multilin
5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.7 FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
FAULT REPORT
FAULT REPORT
FAULT REPORT SOURCE: SRC 1

MESSAGE
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
FAULT REPORT TRIG: Off
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data includes: Name of the relay, programmed by the user Date and time of trigger Name of trigger (specific operand) Active setting group Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (one-quarter cycle before the trigger) Fault current and voltage phasors (three-quarter cycle after the trigger) Target Messages that are set at the time of triggering Events (9 before trigger and 7 after trigger)
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number (when applicable) The Fault Locator does not report fault type or location if the source VTs are connected in the Delta configuration.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance detector should not be used to trigger a fault report. If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms. Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The operand selected as the fault report trigger automatically triggers an oscillography record which can also be triggered independently. EnerVista UR Setup is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the date and time of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number The FAULT REPORT SOURCE setting selects the Source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection. The FAULT REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic operand representing the protection element/elements requiring operational fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal. See also SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FAULT REPORTS menu.
LINE
menu for specifying line characteristics and the ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
5-18
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY NUMBER OF RECORDS: 15 TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite TRIGGER POSITION: 50% TRIGGER SOURCE: Off AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: 16 samples/cycle DIGITAL CHANNELS
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
Range: 2 to 63 channels
DIGITAL CHANNEL 1: Off
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Off ANALOG CHANNELS
Range: 1 to 16 channels
ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously. The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides example configurations with corresponding cycles/record. As mentioned above, the cycles/record values shown in the table below are dependent on a number of factors, including the number of modules and which relay features are enabled. The cyles/record values below are for illustration purposes only the actual values displayed may differ significantly.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 51: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

# RECORDS 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 32 # CT/VTS 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 SAMPLE RATE 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 64 64 # DIGITALS 0 16 16 16 16 64 64 64 64 # ANALOGS 0 0 0 4 4 16 16 16 16 CYCLES/ RECORD 2049.0 922.0 276.0 263.0 93.5 93.5 57.6 32.3 9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite. The TRIGGER POSITION is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle. The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/ display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows: <slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input> The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on Terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear. When the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting is altered, all oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING
5-20
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER RATE: 1 min

MESSAGE
Range: 1 sec; 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 60 min
DATA LOGGER CHNL Off DATA LOGGER CHNL Off
1: 2:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL 16: Off DATA LOGGER CONFIG: 0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may be downloaded to the EnerVista UR Setup software and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost. For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Changing any setting affecting Data Logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded. DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/ VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off without over-writing old data.
GE Multilin
5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
MESSAGE
LED TEST TRIP & ALARM LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED2
See below See page 524. See page 524.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST Range: Disabled, Enabled.
LED TEST
LED TEST FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
LED TEST CONTROL: Off
When enabled, the LED Test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The test consists of three stages. Stage 1: All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end. Stage 2: All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time. Stage 3: All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time. When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states (On or Off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing. The Reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress. A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED Test Initiated event is stored in the Event Recorder. The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, Stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and Stages 2 and 3 can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
5-22
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
READY TO TEST
Reset the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand
rising edge of the control input
Start the software image of the LEDs
Restore the LED states from the software image
Set the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand control input is on
STAGE 1 (all LEDs on)

dropping edge of the control input Wait 1 second
time-out (1 minute)
STAGE 2 (one LED on at a time)
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3 (one LED off at a time)
842011A1.CDR
Figure 52: LED TEST SEQUENCE APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1: Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied.
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-
Configure the LED test to recognize User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON
1 ON
The test will be initiated when the User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then automatically start Stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton. APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2: Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This is to be performed via User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. After applying the settings in Application Example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next, release the pushbutton to automatically start Stage 2. Once Stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When Stage 2 is completed, Stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
GE Multilin
5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP & ALARM LEDS Range: FlexLogic operand
5 SETTINGS
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP LED INPUT: Off ALARM LED INPUT: Off
MESSAGE
The Trip and Alarm LEDs are on LED Panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the Logic 1 state. d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48) Range: FlexLogic operand
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1
MESSAGE
LED 1 OPERAND: Off LED 1 TYPE: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the Logic 1 state. LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED Panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED Panel 3.
Refer to the LED Indicators section in Chapter 4 for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is Self-Reset (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts. Table 52: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS
SETTING LED 1 Operand LED 2 Operand LED 3 Operand LED 4 Operand LED 5 Operand LED 6 Operand LED 7 Operand LED 8 Operand LED 9 Operand LED 10 Operand LED 11 Operand LED 12 Operand PARAMETER SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 2 SETTING GROUP ACT 3 SETTING GROUP ACT 4 SETTING GROUP ACT 5 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Off Off BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 CLOSED BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Off SETTING LED 13 Operand LED 14 Operand LED 15 Operand LED 16 Operand LED 17 Operand LED 18 Operand LED 19 Operand LED 20 Operand LED 21 Operand LED 22 Operand LED 23 Operand LED 24 Operand PARAMETER Off BREAKER 2 OPEN BREAKER 2 CLOSED BREAKER 2 TROUBLE SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 2 SYNC OP Off Off AR ENABLED AR DISABLED AR RIP AR LO
Refer to the Control of Setting Groups example in the Control Elements section of this chapter for group activation.
5-24
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS

MESSAGE
DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION: Enabled DIRECT DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled REMOTE DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled PRI. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled SEC. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled BATTERY FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled SNTP FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled IRIG-B FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with CPU Type D. Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D. Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets. Most of the Minor Alarms can be disabled if desired. When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, display target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay Self-Tests section in Chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms. 5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7) Range: Disabled, Enabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled
The three standard pushbuttons located on the top left panel of the faceplate are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays, etc. Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This functionality has been retained if the Breaker Control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be used as user-programmable control pushbuttons. The location of the control pushbuttons in shown below.
GE Multilin
5-25
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
STATUS IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 USER 2 USER 1 RESET
THREE STANDARD CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4 USER 5 USER 6 USER 7
FOUR EXTRA OPTIONAL CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 53: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS The control pushbuttons are typically not used for critical operations. As such, they are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable the control pushbuttons for security reasons. Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand, CONTROL PUSHBTN 1(7) ON. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the Event Record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed; no event is logged when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed. The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the Breaker Control feature is not configured for manual control via the User 1 through User 3 pushbuttons as shown below. If configured for manual control, the Breaker Control feature typically uses the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other user applications.
SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Enabled=1 SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/ BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1 SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1
When applicable
AND
RUN OFF ON TIMER 0 100 msec FLEXLOGIC OPERAND CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON 842010A2.CDR
Figure 54: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
5-26
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
USER PUSHBUTTON 1(12)
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBUTTON 1 TARGETS: Disabled PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The D60 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (On, Off) into FlexLogic equations as well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protection blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
10
USER LABEL
12
Figure 55: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands, respectively. FlexLogic operands should be used to program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF. A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present status of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in nonvolatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss. Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON. PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the pushbutton is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to Self-reset, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic operand is de-asserted. The Off operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly. If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and Off on each push of the button. When operating in Latched mode, FlexLogic operand states are stored in non-volatile memory. Should power be lost, the correct pushbutton state is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
GE Multilin
5-27
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the On to the Off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be Off upon its release. All user text messaging durations for the pushbuttons are configured with DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. the PRODUCT SETUP PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting pushbutton in FlexLogic. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling the time window for the intended operation.
For example, consider a relay with the following settings: PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: AUTORECLOSER, PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: DISABLED - CALL 2199", and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: ENABLED. When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the On position, the following AUTOCLOSER DISABLED Call 2199 message is displayed: When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the Off position, the message will change to AUTORECLOSER ENABLED. User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command. 5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
NOTE
5
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
MESSAGE
PARAMETER Off PARAMETER Off
MESSAGE
1: 2:
Range: FlexLogic Operand
PARAMETER 256: Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers. The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accommodate the 256 state bits.
5-28
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
MESSAGE
INVOKE AND SCROLL: Off USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
USER DISPLAY 16
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content. Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways. KEYPAD: Use the Menu key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the Up and Down keys. The display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting. USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays. On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand acts exactly as the Down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the Down keypad key operate concurrently. When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect. b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS USER DISPLAY 1(16) Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
USER DISPLAY 1
DISP 1 TOP LINE: DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: DISP 1 ITEM 1 0 DISP 1 ITEM 2 0 DISP 1 ITEM 3 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-29
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available User Display by selecting the existing display and pressing the key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content this content may subsequently be edited. This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular User Display. Each User Display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The Tilde (~) character is used to mark the start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1(5)) can be entered in a User Display - the nth Tilde (~) refers to the nth item. A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience). The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the line to be edited. Press the key to enter text edit mode.
Use either Value key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed. The Press the key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information. key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any items not being used. Use the key at any selected system display (Setting, Actual Value, or Command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this conversion). Use the key to go to the User Displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a User Display, press the key and then select the Yes option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the User Displays menu. An example User Display setup and result is shown below: USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Current X ~ A
MESSAGE
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Current Y ~ A DISP 1 ITEM 1: 6016 DISP 1 ITEM 2: 6357 DISP 1 ITEM 3: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker. Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAYS
Current X Current Y
0.850 A 0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
5-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.16 DIRECT I/O
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O
DIRECT I/O
DIRECT OUTPPUT DEVICE ID: 1

MESSAGE
Range: 1 to 16
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 64 kbps DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER: Disabled CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH2 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH2
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See page 535. See page 535. See page 536. See page 536.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Direct I/Os are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR relays connected directly via Type-7 UR digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to UCA GOOSE, except that communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that support two channels, Direct Output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends Direct Output messages both ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, Direct Output messages are sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver. Direct Output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by the following FlexLogic operands: 1. 2.
DIRECT RING BREAK (Direct I/O Ring Break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that Direct Output messages sent
from a UR are not being received back by the UR.

DIRECT DEVICE 1(16) OFF (Direct Device Offline). This FlexLogic operand indicates that Direct Output messages
from at least one Direct Device are not being received. Direct I/O settings are similar to Remote I/O settings. The equivalent of the Remote Device name strings for Direct I/O, is the Direct Output Device ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies this UR in all Direct Output messages. All UR IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of the Direct I/O message. If the Direct I/O scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"), all Direct Output messages should be received back. If not, the Direct I/O Ring Break Self Test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand. Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of the local relays configured with the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7H, 7I, 7J, 7K, 72 and 73 fiber optic communication cards may be set to 128 kbps. For local relays configured with all other communication cards (i.e. 7E, 7F, 7G, 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7R, 7S, 7T, 7W, 74, 75, 76 and 77), the baud rate will be set to 64 kbps. All IEDs communicating over direct inputs/outputs must be set to
GE Multilin
5-31
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input/output messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each bridge. The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to D60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing over messages from Channel 1 to Channel 2. This places all UR IEDs into one Direct I/O network regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels. The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for Direct I/O configuration. Please refer to the Inputs/Outputs section later in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged. EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE I/O CAPABILITIES OF A UR RELAY Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
5
UR IED 1:
Figure 56: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes" DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps" DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes" DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
UR IED 2:
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber, G.703, or RS422). EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1
BLOCK
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 57: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
5-32
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX1
UR IED 2
TX1 RX2 TX2
UR IED 4
RX1
TX2
RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 58: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT I/OS In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 3 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
UR IED 2: Yes UR IED 4: Yes
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 4 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
Yes Yes
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of "bridges" between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum "communications distance" by a factor of two. In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings, failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the Direct I/O feature would be primarily used to address these concerns. EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 59: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
GE Multilin
5-33
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 TX1
UR IED 2
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 510: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
UR IED 2: Yes "Yes"
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
Yes
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps): IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained in the Inputs/Outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
TX2
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 RX2 TX2
UR IED 2
TX1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 511: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
UR IED 2: Yes "Yes"
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
Yes
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
5-34
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O CRC ALARM CH1(2) Range: Enabled, Disabled
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
CRC ALARM CH1
CRC ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 CRC ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The D60 checks integrity of the incoming Direct I/O messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC Alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted. The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly. The CRC Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of Direct I/O messages that failed the CRC DIRECT INPUTS CRC FAIL COUNT CH1(2) actual value. check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS Message Count and Length of the Monitoring Window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the Direct Outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to 10000, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of Direct Outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 60 1 = 600. Correlation of Failed CRC and Bit Error Rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A Direct I/O packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 104 implies 1 bit error for every 10,000 bits sent/received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 104.
GE Multilin
5-35
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2) Range: Enabled, Disabled
5 SETTINGS
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1

MESSAGE
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The D60 checks integrity of the Direct I/O communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted. The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly. The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration. The total number of unreturned Direct I/O messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1(2) actual value. 5.2.17 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION

MESSAGE
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
RELAY NAME: Relay-1
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state. The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the UCA2/MMS protocol.
5-36
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.3SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1(F5)
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS
CURRENT BANK F1
PHASE CT F1 PRIMARY:
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
PHASE CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 PRIMARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
Two banks of phase/ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter): Xa, where X = {F} and a = {1, 5}. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on CT connections. Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used). The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the following current banks: F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio; F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio The following rule applies: SRC 1 = F1 + F5
(EQ 5.6)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 and 800:1 ratio CTs will be adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary. The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
GE Multilin
5-37
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP b) VOLTAGE BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5 Range: Wye, Delta
5 SETTINGS
VOLTAGE BANK F5
PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION: Wye PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1 AUXILIARY VT F5 CONNECTION: Vag AUXILIARY VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V AUXILIARY VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
One bank of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter): Xa, where X = {F} and a = {5}. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONmade to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta. See the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 3 for details.
NECTION
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4. 5.3.2 On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120.POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM
POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY: 60 Hz
MESSAGE
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
PHASE ROTATION: ABC FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE: SRC 1 FREQUENCY TRACKING: Enabled
Range: ABC, ACB
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay. The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters. The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
5-38
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source: phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current. For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A V B V C ) 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions. The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay. Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between different UR relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE
should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(2) Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 1 NAME: SRC 1

MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: None SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: None SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: None SOURCE 1 AUX VT: None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 5 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 5 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5 Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed. Range: None, F1, F5 Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Two identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the associated source. F represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept. It is possible to select the sum of up to five (5) CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred. For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values. The approach used to configure the AC Sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each Source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together. User Selection of AC Parameters for Comparator Elements: CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for Source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the Source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
GE Multilin
5-39
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP AC Input Actual Values:
5 SETTINGS
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of Actual Values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured Source are displayed in the Sources section of Actual Values. Disturbance Detectors (Internal): The 50DD element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. 50DD is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each Source. The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme logic is as follows:
SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 1 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 2 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC 2 50DD OP OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC 1 50DD OP
5
SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 6 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old
827092A3.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR SRC 6 50DD OP
Figure 512: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PRODDISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector UCT SETUP accordingly.
5-40
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.4 LINE
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
LINE
LINE
POS SEQ IMPEDANCE MAGNITUDE: 3.00

MESSAGE
POS SEQ IMPEDANCE ANGLE: 75 ZERO SEQ IMPEDANCE MAGNITUDE: 9.00 ZERO SEQ IMPEDANCE ANGLE: 75 LINE LENGTH UNITS: km LINE LENGTH (km 100.0 ):
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: km, miles
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These settings specify the characteristics of the line. The line impedance value should be entered as secondary ohms. This data is used for fault location calculations. See the SETTINGS the Source and Trigger for fault calculations.
PRODUCT SETUP FAULT REPORT
menu for assigning
GE Multilin
5-41
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.3.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
BREAKERS
BREAKER 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled
BREAKER 1
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Disabled BREAKER 1 NAME: Bkr 1 BREAKER 1 MODE: 3-Pole BREAKER 1 OPEN: Off BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Off BREAKER 1 A/3-POLE: Off BREAKER 1 B: Off BREAKER 1 C: Off BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Off BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: 0.000 s MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: 0.000 s BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Off UCA XCBR1 PwrSupSt0: Off UCA XCBR1 PresSt: Off UCA XCBR1 TrpCoil: Off
MESSAGE
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BREAKER 2
As for Breaker 1 above
UCA XCBR SBO TIMER
BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: 30 s
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in Chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be Breaker No. 1. BREAKER 1(2) FUNCTION: Set to "Enable" to allow the operation of any breaker control feature.
5-42
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
BREAKER1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to "Enable" to allow faceplate push button operations. BREAKER 1(2) NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to 6 characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash messages related to Breaker No. 1. BREAKER 1(2) MODE: Selects "3-pole" mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or "1-pole" mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously. BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open Breaker No. 1. BREAKER 1(2) CLOSE: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close Breaker No. 1. BREAKER 1(2) A/3-POLE: Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input can be either a 52/a or 52/b contact, or a combination the 52/a and 52/b contacts, that must be programmed to create a logic 0 when the breaker is open. If BREAKER 1 MODE is selected as "3-Pole", this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as "1-Pole", the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and settings BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C select operands to track phases B and C, respectively. BREAKER 1(2) B: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole, this input is used to track phase B as above for phase A. BREAKER 1(2) C: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole, this input is used to track phase C as above for phase A. BREAKER 1(2) EXT ALARM: Selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm reporting contact. BREAKER 1(2) ALARM DELAY: Sets the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement, to allow for non-simultaneous operation of the poles. If single-pole tripping and reclosing is used, the breaker may trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum alarm delay setting must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin. MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: Sets the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker. BREAKER 1(2) OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that Breaker No. 1 is out-of-service. UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt0: Selects a FlexLogic operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt bit 0 data item. UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt: Selects a FlexLogic operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt data item. UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil: Selects a FlexLogic operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil data item. BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: The Select-Before-Operate timer specifies an interval from the receipt of the UCA Breaker Control Select signal until the automatic de-selection of the breaker, so that the breaker does not remain selected indefinitely. This setting applies only to UCA SBO operation.
GE Multilin
5-43
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Figure 513: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC
5-44
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.6 FLEXCURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A(D) Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 / 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D). Table 53: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 TIME MS RESET 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 TIME MS OPERATE 1.03 1.05 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 TIME MS OPERATE 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 TIME MS OPERATE 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 TIME MS OPERATE 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 TIME MS
NOTE
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
GE Multilin
5-45
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
5 SETTINGS
EnerVista UR Setup allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting. Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup. c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time. High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 514: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
NOTE
5-46
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) EXAMPLE
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 515: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 516: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES The standard Recloser curves available for the D60 are displayed in the following graphs.
GE Multilin
5-47
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
2 1 0.5
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.2 0.1 0.05
GE103 GE104 GE105
GE101
GE102
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2
5
50
2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842723A1.CDR
Figure 517: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
20 10 5
GE142
GE138
TIME (sec)
2 1
GE113 GE120
0.5
0.2 0.1 0.05 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
842725A1.CDR
Figure 518: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
5-48
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
10
TIME (sec)
GE201
GE151
2
GE134 GE140 GE137
0.5 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
842730A1.CDR
Figure 519: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
20
TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
GE200
2 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
842728A1.CDR
Figure 520: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
GE Multilin
5-49
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
50 20 10 5 2
GE162
GE164
TIME (sec)
1 0.5
GE133
0.2 0.1 0.05

GE161
GE165
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2
GE163
15
20
842729A1.CDR
Figure 521: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20 10 5 2
GE132
TIME (sec)
1 0.5 0.2
GE136 GE139
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118
GE117
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
842726A1.CDR
Figure 522: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
5-50
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
20 10 5
GE122
TIME (sec)
1 0.5
GE114
0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
GE121 GE111
GE107
GE115
GE112
842724A1.CDR
Figure 523: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10
TIME (sec)
2 1 0.5
GE119
GE135
0.2 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
842727A1.CDR
Figure 524: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
GE Multilin
5-51
5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 525: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW The states of all digital signals used in the UR are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in this section). A digital "1" is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators. If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations. Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
5-52
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic). FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback. A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle. Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below. Table 54: UR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE Contact Input STATE On Off Contact Output (type Form-A contact only) Voltage On Voltage Off Current On Current Off Direct Input Element (Analog) On Pickup EXAMPLE FORMAT Cont Ip On Cont Ip Off Cont Op 1 VOn Cont Op 1 VOff Cont Op 1 IOn Cont Op 1 IOff DIRECT INPUT 1 On PHASE TOC1 PKP CHARACTERISTICS [INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...] Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed). Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open). Voltage exists across the contact. Voltage does not exists across the contact. Current is flowing through the contact. Current is not flowing through the contact. The direct input is presently in the ON state. The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The output of the comparator is set to the block function. The input operand is at logic 1. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The number of pulses counted is above the set number. The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number. The number of pulses counted is below the set number. Logic 1 Logic 0 The remote input is presently in the ON state. The virtual input is presently in the ON state. The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").
Dropout Operate
PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 OP
Block Element (Digital) Pickup Dropout Operate
PH DIR1 BLK Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 1 OP
Element (Digital Counter)
Higher than Equal to Lower than On Off On On On
Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO On Off REMOTE INPUT 1 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Op 1 On
Fixed Remote Input Virtual Input Virtual Output
GE Multilin
5-53
5.4 FLEXLOGIC The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table. Table 55: D60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 7)
OPERAND TYPE CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS DIRECT DEVICES OPERAND SYNTAX CONTROL PUSHBTN n ON DIRECT DEVICE 1 On DIRECT DEVICE 16 On DIRECT DEVICE 1 Off DIRECT DEVICE 16 Off DIR IO CH1(2) CRC ALARM DIR IO CRC ALARM DIR IO CH1(2) UNRET ALM DIR IO UNRET ALM ELEMENT: Autoreclose (1P/3P) AR ENABLED AR DISABLED AR RIP AR 1-P RIP AR 3-P/1 RIP AR 3-P/2 RIP AR LO AR BKR1 BLK AR BKR2 BLK AR CLOSE BKR1 AR CLOSE BKR2 AR FORCE 3-P TRIP AR SHOT CNT > 0 AR ZONE 1 EXTENT AR INCOMPLETE SEQ AR RESET AUX OV1 PKP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 OP AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP DIR BLOCK TX INIT DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP DIR BLOCK TX2 STOP DIR BLOCK TX3 STOP DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP DIR BLOCK TRIP A DIR BLOCK TRIP B DIR BLOCK TRIP C DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P DIR BLOCK OP BKR ARC 1 OP BKR ARC 2 OP BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP BKR FAIL 2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Control Pushbutton n (n = 1 to 7) is being pressed. Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1
5 SETTINGS
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL MONITORING
The rate of Direct Input messages received on Channel 1(2) and failing the CRC exceeded the user-specified level. The rate of Direct Input messages failing the CRC exceeded the userspecified level on Channel 1 or 2. The rate of returned Direct I/O messages on Channel 1(2) exceeded the user-specified level (ring configurations only). The rate of returned Direct I/O messages exceeded the user-specified level on Channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only). Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform Autoreclosure is disabled Autoreclosure is in "Reclose in Progress" state A single-pole reclosure is in progress A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via DEAD TIME 1 A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via DEAD TIME 2 Autoreclosure is in lockout state Reclosure of Breaker 1 is blocked Reclosure of Breaker 2 is blocked Reclose Breaker 1 signal Reclose Breaker 2 signal Force any trip to a three-phase trip The first "CLOSE BKR X" signal has been issued The Zone 1 Distance function must be set to the extended overreach value The incomplete sequence timer timed out AR has been reset either manually or by the reset timer Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated Auxiliary Undervoltage element has picked up Auxiliary Undervoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary Undervoltage element has operated Directional blocking signal is initiated Directional blocking scheme de-asserts transmit bit no. 1 Directional blocking scheme de-asserts transmit bit no. 2 Directional blocking scheme de-asserts transmit bit no. 3 Directional blocking scheme de-asserts transmit bit no. 4 Directional blocking scheme has operated to trip phase A Directional blocking scheme has operated to trip phase B Directional blocking scheme has operated to trip phase C Directional blocking scheme has tripped all 3 phases Directional blocking scheme has operated Breaker Arcing 1 is operated Breaker Arcing 2 is operated Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes) Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes) Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes) Breaker Failure 1 re-trip 3-phase Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 is operated Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 is operated Breaker Failure 1 Timer 3 is operated Breaker Failure 1 trip is operated Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1
5
ELEMENT: Auxiliary OV ELEMENT: Auxiliary UV ELEMENT: Blocking Scheme
ELEMENT: Breaker Arcing ELEMENT Breaker Failure
5-54
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS Table 55: D60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 2 of 7)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Breaker Control OPERAND SYNTAX BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 ON CMD BREAKER 1 A CLSD BREAKER 1 B CLSD BREAKER 1 C CLSD BREAKER 1 CLOSED BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP BREAKER 1 TROUBLE BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS BREAKER 2 ELEMENT: Digital Counter Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO Counter 8 HI Counter 8 EQL Counter 8 LO Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 OP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 16 PKP Dig Element 16 OP Dig Element 16 DPO DUTT TX1 DUTT TX2 DUTT TX3 DUTT TX4 DUTT TRIP A DUTT TRIP B DUTT TRIP C DUTT TRIP 3P DUTT OP FxE 1 PKP FxE 1 OP FxE 1 DPO FxE 8 PKP FxE 8 OP FxE 8 DPO GND DIST Z1 PKP GND DIST Z1 OP GND DIST Z1 OP A GND DIST Z1 OP B GND DIST Z1 OP C GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN GND DIST Z1 DPO A GND DIST Z1 DPO B GND DIST Z1 DPO C GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN GND DIST Z2 to Z4 ELEMENT: Ground IOC GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND IOC1 OP GROUND IOC1 DPO GROUND IOC2 ELEMENT: Ground TOC GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 OP GROUND TOC1 DPO GROUND TOC2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Breaker 1 OFF command Breaker 1 ON command Breaker 1 phase A is closed Breaker 1 phase B is closed Breaker 1 phase C is closed Breaker 1 is closed Breaker 1 is open Breaker 1 has discrepancy Breaker 1 trouble alarm Breaker 1 manual close Breaker 1 trip phase A command Breaker 1 trip phase B command Breaker 1 trip phase C command At least one pole of Breaker 1 is open Only one pole of Breaker 1 is open Breaker 1 is out of service Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Digital Counter 1 output is more than comparison value Digital Counter 1 output is equal to comparison value Digital Counter 1 output is less than comparison value Digital Counter 8 output is more than comparison value Digital Counter 8 output is equal to comparison value Digital Counter 8 output is less than comparison value Digital Element 1 is picked up Digital Element 1 is operated Digital Element 1 is dropped out Digital Element 16 is picked up Digital Element 16 is operated Digital Element 16 is dropped out Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 1 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 2 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 3 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 4 Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase A Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase B Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase C Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip all three phases Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated FlexElement 1 has picked up FlexElement 1 has operated FlexElement 1 has dropped out FlexElement 8 has picked up FlexElement 8 has operated FlexElement 8 has dropped out Ground Distance Zone 1 has picked up Ground Distance Zone 1 has operated Ground Distance Zone 1 phase A has operated Ground Distance Zone 1 phase B has operated Ground Distance Zone 1 phase C has operated Ground Distance Zone 1 phase A has picked up Ground Distance Zone 1 phase B has picked up Ground Distance Zone 1 phase C has picked up Ground Distance Zone 1 neutral is supervising Ground Distance Zone 1 phase A has dropped out Ground Distance Zone 1 phase B has dropped out Ground Distance Zone 1 phase C has dropped out Ground Distance Zone 2 directional is supervising Same set of operands as shown for GND DIST Z1 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has operated Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
ELEMENT: Digital Element
ELEMENT: DUTT
ELEMENT: FlexElements
ELEMENT: Ground Distance
GE Multilin
5-55
5.4 FLEXLOGIC Table 55: D60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 3 of 7)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Hybrid POTT OPERAND SYNTAX HYBRID POTT TX1 HYBRID POTT TX2 HYBRID POTT TX3 HYBRID POTT TX4 HYBRID POTT TRIP A HYBRID POTT TRIP B HYBRID POTT TRIP C HYBRID POTT TRIP 3P HYBRID POTT OP LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF LATCH 16 ON LATCH 16 OFF LINE PICKUP OP LINE PICKUP PKP LINE PICKUP DPO LINE PICKUP I<A LINE PICKUP I<B LINE PICKUP I<C LINE PICKUP UV PKP LINE PICKUP LEO PKP LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP LOAD ENCHR PKP LOAD ENCHR OP LOAD ENCHR DPO NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP NEG SEQ IOC1 OP NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO NEG SEQ IOC2 ELEMENT: Negative Sequence OV ELEMENT: Negative Sequence TOC ELEMENT: Neutral IOC NEG SEQ OV PKP NEG SEQ OV DPO NEG SEQ OV OP NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP NEG SEQ TOC1 OP NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO NEG SEQ TOC2 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 OP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO NEUTRAL IOC2 ELEMENT: Neutral OV ELEMENT: Neutral TOC NEUTRAL OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 DPO NEUTRAL OV1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO NEUTRAL TOC2 ELEMENT: Neutral Directional NTRL DIR OC1 FWD NTRL DIR OC1 REV NTRL DIR OC2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5 SETTINGS
Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 1 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 2 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 3 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 4 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase A Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase B Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase C Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has tripped all 3 phases Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0) Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0) Line Pickup has operated Line Pickup has picked up Line Pickup has dropped out Line Pickup detected Phase A current below 5% of nominal Line Pickup detected Phase B current below 5% of nominal Line Pickup detected Phase C current below 5% of nominal Line Pickup Undervoltage has picked up Line Pickup Line End Open has picked up Line Pickup operated from overreaching Zone 2 when reclosing the line (Zone 1 extension functionality) Load Encroachment has picked up Load Encroachment has operated Load Encroachment has dropped out Negative Sequence Directional OC1 Forward has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC1 Reverse has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC2 Forward has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC2 Reverse has operated Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ IOC1 Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has picked up Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has dropped out Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has operated Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 has operated Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ TOC1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1 Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out Neutral Overvoltage element has operated Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1 Neutral Directional OC1 Forward has operated Neutral Directional OC1 Reverse has operated Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1
ELEMENT Non-Volatile Latches
ELEMENT: Line Pickup
ELEMENT: Load Encroachment ELEMENT: Negative Sequence Directional OC ELEMENT: Negative Sequence IOC
5-56
GE Multilin

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Open Pole Detector OPERAND SYNTAX OPEN POLE OP A OPEN POLE OP B OPEN POLE OP C OPEN POLE BKR A OP OPEN POLE BKR B OP OPEN POLE BKR C OP OPEN POLE BLK N OPEN POLE BLK AB OPEN POLE BLK BC OPEN POLE BLK CA OPEN POLE OP ELEMENT: Phase Directional PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK PH DIR2 ELEMENT: Phase Distance PH DIST Z1 PKP PH DIST Z1 OP PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA PH DIST Z1 DPO AB PH DIST Z1 DPO BC PH DIST Z1 DPO CA PH DIST Z2 to Z4 ELEMENT: Phase IOC PHASE IOC1 PKP PHASE IOC1 OP PHASE IOC1 DPO PHASE IOC1 PKP A PHASE IOC1 PKP B PHASE IOC1 PKP C PHASE IOC1 OP A PHASE IOC1 OP B PHASE IOC1 OP C PHASE IOC1 DPO A PHASE IOC1 DPO B PHASE IOC1 DPO C PHASE IOC2 ELEMENT: Phase OV PHASE OV1 PKP PHASE OV1 OP PHASE OV1 DPO PHASE OV1 PKP A PHASE OV1 PKP B PHASE OV1 PKP C PHASE OV1 OP A PHASE OV1 OP B PHASE OV1 OP C PHASE OV1 DPO A PHASE OV1 DPO B PHASE OV1 DPO C OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Open pole condition is detected in phase A Open pole condition is detected in phase B Open pole condition is detected in phase C Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected on phase A Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected on phase B Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is detected on phase C Blocking signal for neutral, ground, and negative-sequence overcurrent element is established Blocking signal for the AB phase distance elements is established Blocking signal for the BC phase distance elements is established Blocking signal for the CA phase distance elements is established Open pole detector is operated Phase A Directional 1 Block Phase B Directional 1 Block Phase C Directional 1 Block Phase Directional 1 Block Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1 Phase Distance Zone 1 has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB IOC is supervising Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC IOC is supervising Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA IOC is supervising Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has dropped out Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has dropped out Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PH DIST Z1 At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1 At least one phase of OV1 has picked up At least one phase of OV1 has operated At least one phase of OV1 has dropped out Phase A of OV1 has picked up Phase B of OV1 has picked up Phase C of OV1 has picked up Phase A of OV1 has operated Phase B of OV1 has operated Phase C of OV1 has operated Phase A of OV1 has dropped out Phase B of OV1 has dropped out Phase C of OV1 has dropped out
GE Multilin
5-57

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT Phase Select OPERAND SYNTAX PHASE SELECT AG PHASE SELECT BG PHASE SELECT CG PHASE SELECT SLG PHASE SELECT AB PHASE SELECT BC PHASE SELECT CA PHASE SELECT ABG PHASE SELECT BCG PHASE SELECT CAG PHASE SELECT 3P PHASE SELECT MULTI-P PHASE SELECT VOID PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 PKP A PHASE TOC1 PKP B PHASE TOC1 PKP C PHASE TOC1 OP A PHASE TOC1 OP B PHASE TOC1 OP C PHASE TOC1 DPO A PHASE TOC1 DPO B PHASE TOC1 DPO C PHASE TOC2 ELEMENT: Phase UV PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV1 DPO PHASE UV1 PKP A PHASE UV1 PKP B PHASE UV1 PKP C PHASE UV1 OP A PHASE UV1 OP B PHASE UV1 OP C PHASE UV1 DPO A PHASE UV1 DPO B PHASE UV1 DPO C PHASE UV2 ELEMENT: POTT POTT OP POTT TX1 POTT TX2 POTT TX3 POTT TX4 POTT TRIP A POTT TRIP B POTT TRIP C POTT TRIP 3P POWER SWING OUTER POWER SWING MIDDLE POWER SWING INNER POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING TMRX PKP POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING 50DD POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING UN/BLOCK PUTT OP PUTT TX1 PUTT TX2 PUTT TX3 PUTT TX4 PUTT TRIP A PUTT TRIP B PUTT TRIP C PUTT TRIP 3P OPERAND DESCRIPTION Phase A to Ground fault is detected. Phase B to Ground fault is detected. Phase C to Ground fault is detected. Single Line to Ground fault is detected. Phase A to B fault is detected. Phase B to C fault is detected. Phase C to A fault is detected. Phase A to B to Ground fault is detected. Phase B to C to Ground fault is detected. Phase C to A to Ground fault is detected. Three-phase symmetrical fault is detected. Multi-phase fault is detected Fault type cannot be detected At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1 At least one phase of UV1 has picked up At least one phase of UV1 has operated At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out Phase A of UV1 has picked up Phase B of UV1 has picked up Phase C of UV1 has picked up Phase A of UV1 has operated Phase B of UV1 has operated Phase C of UV1 has operated Phase A of UV1 has dropped out Phase B of UV1 has dropped out Phase C of UV1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
5 SETTINGS
ELEMENT: Phase TOC
Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 1 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 2 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 3 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 4 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase A Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase B Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase C Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip all three phases Positive Sequence impedance in outer characteristic. Positive Sequence impedance in middle characteristic. Positive Sequence impedance in inner characteristic. Power Swing Blocking element operated. Power Swing Timer x picked up. Out-of-step Tripping operated. The Power Swing element detected a disturbance other than power swing. An unstable power swing has been detected (incoming locus). An unstable power swing has been detected (outgoing locus). Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 1 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 2 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 3 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 4 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase A Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase B Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase C Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip all three phases
ELEMENT: Power Swing Detect
ELEMENT: PUTT
5-58
GE Multilin

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Selector Switch OPERAND SYNTAX SELECTOR 1 POS Y SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM SELECTOR 1 ALARM SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM SELECTOR 2 ELEMENT: Setting Group ELEMENT: Disturbance Detector ELEMENT: VTFF SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 SRCx 50DD OP OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Selector Switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands). First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1. Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1. Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1. Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control input but not acknowledged. Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but not acknowledged. Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged. Position of Selector Switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when the relay powers up and synchronizes to the 3-bit input. Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1 Setting Group 1 is active Setting Group 6 is active Source x Disturbance Detector is operated
SRCx VT FUSE FAIL OP SRCx VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRCx VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS SYNC 1 DEAD S OP SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 1 SYNC DPO SYNC 1 CLS OP SYNC 1 CLS DPO SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX SYNC 2 TRIP 3-POLE TRIP 1-POLE TRIP PHASE A TRIP PHASE B TRIP PHASE C TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE TRIP FORCE 3-POLE Off On
Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has operated Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has dropped out Source x has lost voltage signals (V2 above 25% or V1 below 70% of nominal) Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 close has operated Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1 Trip all three breaker poles A single-pole trip-and-reclose operation is initiated Trip breaker pole A, initiate phase A breaker fail and reclose Trip breaker pole B, initiate phase B breaker fail and reclose Trip breaker pole C, initiate phase C breaker fail and reclose Initiate a three-pole reclose Three-pole trip must be initiated Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as Disable by other features. Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
ELEMENT: Synchrocheck
ELEMENT (Trip Output)
FIXED OPERANDS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Inputs
Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2
On On Off Off IOn IOn IOff IOff VOn VOn VOff VOff
(will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Outputs, Current (from detector on Form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Outputs, Voltage (from detector on Form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS Direct Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Remote Inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On DIRECT INPUT 32 On REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On
GE Multilin
5-59

OPERAND TYPE INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual Outputs LED TEST REMOTE DEVICES OPERAND SYNTAX Virt Ip 1 On Virt Ip 32 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 64 On LED TEST IN PROGRESS REMOTE DEVICE 1 On REMOTE DEVICE 16 On REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off RESETTING RESET OP RESET OP (COMMS) RESET OP (OPERAND) RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) SELFDIAGNOSTICS ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY MINOR ERROR ANY SELF-TEST BATTERY FAIL DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK DSP ERROR EEPROM DATA ERROR EQUIPMENT MISMATCH FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN IRIG-B FAILURE LATCHING OUT ERROR LOW ON MEMORY NO DSP INTERRUPTS PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROGRAM MEMORY PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE REMOTE DEVICE OFF SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION UNIT NOT CALIBRATED UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED WATCHDOG ERROR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS PUSHBUTTON x ON PUSHBUTTON x OFF OPERAND DESCRIPTION Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 An LED test has been initiated and has not finished. Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1
5 SETTINGS
Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below) Communications source of the reset command RESETTING menu) source Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS of the reset command Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error) Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error) Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error) See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password-protected level of the relay. Pushbutton Number x is in the On position Pushbutton Number x is in the Off position
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS ALARM USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/ ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic Operands table above. The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FlexLogic Operators table. Table 56: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES NOT OR AND NOR NAND XOR NUMBER OF INPUTS 1 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF... input is 0 any input is 1 all inputs are 1 all inputs are 0 any input is 0 only one input is 1
5-60
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Table 57: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

TYPE Editor End One Shot SYNTAX INSERT DELETE END DESCRIPTION Insert a parameter in an equation list. Delete a parameter from an equation list. The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters. One shot that responds to a negative going edge. One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges. Logical Not 2 input OR gate 16 input OR gate 2 input AND gate 16 input AND gate 2 input NOR gate 16 input NOR gate 2 input NAND gate 16 input NAND gate 2 input Exclusive OR gate Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a one shot is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of 32 one shots. Operates on the previous parameter. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the Reset input. The parameter preceding the Reset input is the Set input. The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is TIMER #. The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter NOTES
POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. NEGATIVE ONE SHOT DUAL ONE SHOT
Logic Gate
NOT OR(2) OR(16) AND(2) AND(16) NOR(2) NOR(16) NAND(2) NAND(16) XOR(2) LATCH (S,R)
Timer
TIMER 1 TIMER 32 = Virt Op 1 = Virt Op 64
Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 1 settings. Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 32 settings. Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual Output 1. Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual Output 64.
Assign Virtual Output
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared. 5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered. FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; i.e. they reset on the re-application of control power. When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
CAUTION
GE Multilin
5-61
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS 5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation. In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output used a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND Timer 1 Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827025A2.vsd
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) Operate Output Relay H1
Figure 526: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME
1.
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2). Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output. For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1). Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND Timer 1 Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
Figure 527: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
5-62
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 2.
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND(2) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
Figure 528: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup Timer 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 State=ON CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms)
827028A2.VSD
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
Figure 529: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 4. Program the FlexLogic equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01 02 03 04 05
.....
97 98 99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 530: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET 5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows: 99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
GE Multilin
5-63
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower. 97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next. 96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact. The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP". Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3: [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 3 diagram as a check.
95
96 97 98 99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 2 OP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: NOT FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: AND (2) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 3
AND
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 531: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4. 99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4". 98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section. 97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3). 96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1". 94: The input to Timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R). 92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter OR(4). 91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2). 89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP. 88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On". 87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On". 86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On". 85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On".
5-64
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is: [85] [86] [87] [88] [89] [90] [91] [92] [93] [94] [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 4 diagram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 4 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 2 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Ip 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 1 PKP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: XOR FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (4) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: LATCH (S,R) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 1 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (3) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 2 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 4
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
Set LATCH XOR OR Reset
OR
T2
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
T1
827031A2.VSD
Figure 532: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service. In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below: DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2)
GE Multilin
5-65
5.4 FLEXLOGIC = Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4 END
5 SETTINGS
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct. 8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past. Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator. The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END
1:
Range: FlexLogic parameters
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: END
Range: FlexLogic parameters
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types. 5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32) Range: millisecond, second, minute
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0 TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: 0
MESSAGE
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations. TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit. TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0". TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
5-66
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
FLEXELEMENTS
FLEXELEMENT 1(8) Range: Disabled, Enabled
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: FxE1 FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN Off FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN Off FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: Signed FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: Level FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: Over FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS: 3.0% FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: milliseconds FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: 20 FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 BLOCK: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset FLEXELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
Range: 90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
5
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice. The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as per user's choice.
GE Multilin
5-67
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: AND Off = 0 SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: RUN Actual Value FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Actual Value
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT HYSTERESIS: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: FLEXELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FxE 1 OP
+ -
tPKP tRST
FxE 1 DPO FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE FlexElement 1 OpSig

842004A2.CDR
Figure 533: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal. The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases. The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level. The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.
5-68
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
Figure 534: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over; FLEXELEMENT COMP MODE = Signed;
5
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over; FLEXELEMENT COMP MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under; FLEXELEMENT COMP MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under; FLEXELEMENT COMP MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A1.CDR
Figure 535: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING
GE Multilin
5-69
5.4 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set to Over, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in pu values using the following definitions of the base units: Table 58: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
BREAKER ARCING AMPS (Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C) dcmA FREQUENCY PHASE ANGLE POWER FACTOR RTDs SOURCE CURRENT SOURCE ENERGY (Positive and Negative Watthours, Positive and Negative Varhours) SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE BASE = 2000 kA2 cycle BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. fBASE = 1 Hz BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts)
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickupdropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting specifies the reset delay of the element.
5-70
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
LATCH 1(16) Range: Disabled, Enabled
LATCH 1
LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
LATCH 1 TYPE: Reset Dominant LATCH 1 SET: Off LATCH 1 RESET: Off LATCH 1 TARGET: Self-reset LATCH 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below: LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant. LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1. LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
SETTING
LATCH N TYPE Reset Dominant
LATCH N SET ON OFF ON OFF
LATCH N RESET OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
LATCH N ON ON Previous State OFF OFF ON ON Previous State OFF
LATCH N OFF OFF Previous State ON ON OFF OFF Previous State ON
LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING LATCH 1 SET: Off=0 SETTING LATCH 1 SET: Off=0
SETTING LATCH 1 TYPE: RUN
Set Dominant
ON ON OFF OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SET LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF
RESET
842005A1.CDR
Figure 536: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 to 16) AND LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-71
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6. The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration, season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter. 5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
SETTING GROUP 1
LINE PICKUP DISTANCE POWER SWING DETECT LOAD ENCROACHMENT PHASE CURRENT NEUTRAL CURRENT GROUND CURRENT NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT BREAKER FAILURE VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
See page 5-73. See page 5-75. See page 5-89. See page 5-97. See page 5-99. See page 5-109. See page 5-116. See page 5-119. See page 5-125. See page 5-134.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Each of the six Setting Group menus is identical. SETTING GROUP 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if no other group is active (see the Control Elements section for additional details).
5-72
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.3 LINE PICKUP
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
LINE PICKUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
LINE PICKUP
LINE PICKUP FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
LINE PICKUP SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE IOC LINE PICKUP: 1.000 pu LINE PICKUP UV PKP: 0.700 pu LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: 0.150 s LINE END OPEN RESET DELAY: 0.090 s LINE PICKUP OV PKP DELAY: 0.040 s AR CO-ORD BYPASS: Enabled AR CO-ORD PICKUP DELAY: 0.045 s AR CO-ORD RESET DELAY: 0.005 s TERMINAL OPEN: Off AR ACCELERATE: Off LINE PICKUP BLOCK: Off LINE PICKUP TARGET: Self-reset LINE PICKUP EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Line Pickup feature uses a combination of undercurrent and undervoltage to identify a line that has been de-energized (line end open). Alternately, the user may assign a FlexLogic operand to the TERMINAL OPEN setting that specifies the terminal status. Three instantaneous overcurrent elements are used to identify a previously de-energized line that has been closed onto a fault. Faults other than close-in faults can be identified satisfactorily with the Distance elements. Co-ordination features are included to ensure satisfactory operation when high speed automatic reclosure (AR) is employed. The AR CO-ORD DELAY setting allows the overcurrent setting to be below the expected load current seen after reclose. Co-ordination is achieved by the positive sequence overvoltage element picking up and blocking the trip path, before the AR CO-ORD DELAY times out. The AR CO-ORD BYPASS setting is normally enabled. It is disabled if high speed autoreclosure is implemented. The positive sequence undervoltage pickup setting is based on phase to neutral quantities. If Delta VTs are used, then this per unit pickup is based on the (VT SECONDARY setting) / 3 .
GE Multilin
5-73
5 SETTINGS
The line pickup protection incorporates Zone 1 extension capability. When the line is being re-energized from the local terminal, pickup of an overreaching Zone 2 or excessive phase current within six power cycles after the autorecloser issues a close command results in the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP FlexLogic operand. Configure the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP operand to perform a trip action if the intent is apply Zone 1 extension. The Zone 1 extension philosophy used here normally operates from an under-reaching zone, and uses an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. The AR ACCELERATE setting is provided to achieve Zone 1 extension functionality if external autoreclosure is employed. Another Zone 1 extension approach is to permanently apply an overreaching zone, and reduce the reach when reclosing. This philosophy can be programmed via the Autoreclose scheme.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LINE PICKUP UV PKP SETTING LINE PICKUP OV PKP DELAY:
OR
SETTING LINE PICKUP FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING LINE PICKUP BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING LINE PICKUP SIGNAL SOURCE: VAG VBG VCG IA IB IC VAB VBC VCA
SETTING TERMINAL OPEN: Off=0
t PKP
t RST=0
AND
SETTING LINE PICKUP UV PKP: RUN VAG or VAB < setting VBG or VBC < setting VCG or VCA < setting
AND AND OR
SETTINGS LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: LINE END OPEN RESET DELAY: t PKP t RST FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LINE PICKUP LEO PKP (LEO=Line End Open) SETTINGS AR CO-ORD PICKUP DELAY: AR CO-ORD RESET DELAY:
AND
SETTING IA < 0.05 pu IB < 0.05 pu IC < 0.05 pu SETTING PHASE IOC LINE PICKUP: RUN IA > PICKUP IB > PICKUP IC > PICKUP
OR AND AND
t PKP
t RST
5
SETTING AR CO-ORD BYPASS: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z2 PKP PH DIST Z2 PKP SETTING AR ACCELERATE: Off=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR CLOSE BKR1 AR CLOSE BKR2 D60 and L90 only
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LINE PICKUP OP LINE PICKUP PKP LINE PICKUP DPO
AND OR
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP
0 6 cycles
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LINE PICKUP I< A LINE PICKUP I< B LINE PICKUP I< C
837000AC.CDR
Figure 537: LINE PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC
5-74
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.4 DISTANCE
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
DISTANCE
DISTANCE SOURCE: SRC 1

MESSAGE
MEMORY DURATION: 10 cycles FORCE SELF-POLAR: Off PHASE DISTANCE Z1 PHASE DISTANCE Z2 PHASE DISTANCE Z3 PHASE DISTANCE Z4 GROUND DISTANCE Z1 GROUND DISTANCE Z2 GROUND DISTANCE Z3 GROUND DISTANCE Z4
Range: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See page 576. See page 576. See page 576. See page 576. See page 583. See page 583. See page 583. See page 583.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Three common settings (DISTANCE SOURCE, MEMORY DURATION, and FORCE SELF-POLAR) and eight menus for four zones of phase and ground distance protection are available. The DISTANCE SOURCE identifies the Signal Source for all distance functions. The Mho distance functions use a dynamic characteristic: the positive-sequence voltage either memorized or actual is used as a polarizing signal. The memory voltage is also used by the built-in directional supervising functions applied for both the Mho and Quad characteristics. The MEMORY DURATION setting specifies the length of time a memorized positive-sequence voltage should be used in the distance calculations. After this interval expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If it is higher than 10% of the nominal, the actual voltage is used, if lower the memory voltage continues to be used. The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage stays above 80% of its nominal value for five power system cycles. For this reason it is important to ensure that the nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu. Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close-in reverse three-phase faults. For this purpose, the maximum fault clearing time (breaker fail time) in the substation should be considered. On the other hand, the MEMORY DURATION cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static, as frozen at the beginning of the fault. Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions. The distance zones can be forced to become self-polarized through the FORCE SELF-POLAR setting. Any user-selected condition (FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force self-polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become self-polarized regardless of other memory voltage logic conditions. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic as shown below.
GE Multilin
5-75
5 SETTINGS
SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: V_A, V_RMS_A V_B, V_RMS_B V_C, V_RMS_C V_1 IA IB IC SETTING FORCE SELF-POLAR: Off=0 V_1 < 1.15 pu V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 V_1 > 0.8 pu IA < 0.05 pu IB < 0.05 pu IC < 0.05 pu V_1 < 0.1 pu AND
UPDATE MEMORY RUN AND 0 S Q
SETTING MEMORY DURATION: 0 tRST AND Use V_1 mem

OR
5 cy
AND
OR
R AND
Use V_1
827842A5.CDR
Figure 538: MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC b) PHASE DISTANCE

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE PHASE DISTANCE Z1(Z4)
PHASE DISTANCE Z1
PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHS DIST Z1 DIRECTION: Forward PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: Mho PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: None PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: None PHS DIST Z1 REACH: 2.00 PHS DIST Z1 RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: 90 PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: 90 PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: 10.00 PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: 10.00 PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: 0.200 pu
Range: Forward, Reverse
MESSAGE
Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11 Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11 Range: 0.02 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-76
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: 0.000 pu PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: 0.000 s PHS DIST Z1 BLK: Off PHS DIST Z1 TARGET: Self-reset PHS DIST Z1 EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance, directional, and overcurrent supervising characteristics. The phase quad distance function is comprised of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional and current supervising characteristics. Four zones of phase distance protection are provided. Each zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except: 1. 2. The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for phase and ground elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE). The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for phase and ground elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE).
The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance elements. Even though all four zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [PKP] and dropout [DPO] FlexLogic signals) or time-delayed elements (operate [OP] FlexLogic signals), only Zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous under-reaching tripping mode. Additional details may be found in Chapter 8: Theory of Operation. Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE setting (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
WARNING
PHS DIST Z1 DIRECTION: All four zones are reversible. The forward direction by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting, whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180 from that angle. PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quad characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis. The two characteristics and their possible variations are shown in the following figures.
COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
REAC H
DIR COMP LIMIT DIR RCA RCA
837720A1.CDR
Figure 539: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
5-77
5 SETTINGS
COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
REACH
DIR COMP LIMIT DIR RCA LFT BLD RCA RCA RGT BLD RCA
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
Figure 540: QUAD DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
RCA = 80o COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR RCA = 80o DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o
REAC H
5
R R X X
REAC H
REACH
REAC H
R
837722A1.CDR
Figure 541: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES
5-78
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
RCA = 80o COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR RCA = 80o DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o RGT BLD RCA = 80o LFT BLD RCA = 80o
REAC H
REAC H
REACH
REAC H
5
837723A1.CDR
Figure 542: QUAD DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: The phase distance elements can be applied to look through a three-phase delta-wye or wye-delta power transformer. In addition, VTs and CTs could be located independently from one another at different windings of the transformer. If the potential source is located at the correct side of the transformer, this setting shall be set to None. This setting specifies the location of the voltage source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. The following figure illustrates the usage of this setting. In section (a), Zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), Zone 4 is looking through a transformer from the wye into the delta winding. Therefore, the Z4 setting shall be set to Yd1. The zone is restricted by the potential point (location of the VTs) as illustrated in Figure (e). PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. In section (a) of the following figure, Zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), the CTs are located at the same side as the read point. Therefore, the Z4 setting shall be set to None. See Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more details, and Chapter 9: Application of Settings for information on how to calculate distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers.
GE Multilin
5-79
5 SETTINGS
(a)
delta
wye, 330o lag
(b)
delta
wye, 330o lag
Z4 Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z4 Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1 Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c)
delta
wye, 330o lag
(e)
L1 L2
Z4 Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1
Zone 4 Zone 1 ZL1 ZT ZL2
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Figure 543: APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the zone reach. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. The reach impedance angle is entered as the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting. Zone 1 is characterized by transient overreach of less than 5% under Source Impedance Ratios of up to 30. When setting an under-reaching Zone 1 for direct tripping and under-reaching pilot schemes (DUTT, PUTT) other factors should be also considered as per rules of distance relaying. PHS DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous technologies) of the phase distance characteristic. The setting is an angle of reach impedance as shown in Mho Distance Characteristic and Quad Distance Characteristic figures. This setting is independent from PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA, the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function. PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it produces the lens-type characteristic of the MHO function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the reactance boundary of the quad function. If the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to both the mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction with the mho shape selection, the setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction with the quad characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the reactance boundary into a tent-shape. PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: This setting selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional supervising function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function as the dynamic mho characteristic itself is a directional one. In conjunction with the quad shape selection, this setting defines the only directional function built into the phase distance element. The directional function uses the memory voltage for polarization. This setting typically equals the distance characteristic angle PHS DIST Z1 RCA. PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: Selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function. PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quad characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quad characteristic and should be set giving consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive coverage.
5-80
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quad characteristic (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). This setting applies only to the quad characteristic. PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quad characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quad characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current. PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quad characteristic (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). This setting applies only to the quad characteristic. PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line-to-line current (fault loop current used for the distance calculations). For convenience, 3 is accommodated by the pickup (i.e., before being used, the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by 3 ). If the minimum fault current level is sufficient, the current supervision pickup should be set above maximum full load current preventing maloperation under VT fuse fail conditions. This requirement may be difficult to meet for remote faults at the end of Zones 2 through 4. If this is the case, the current supervision pickup would be set below the full load current, but this may result in maloperation during fuse fail conditions. Zone 1 is sealed-in with the current supervision.
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point where the zone shall not overreach. For plain (non-compensated) lines, set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the phase VT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. See Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more details, and Chapter 9: Application of Settings for information on how to calculate this setting for applications on series compensated lines. PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting allows the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement stepped distance protection. The distance element timers for Zones 2 through 4 apply a short dropout delay to cope with faults located close to the zone boundary when small oscillations in the voltages and/or currents could inadvertently reset the timer. Zone 1 does not need any drop out delay since it is sealed-in by the presence of current. PHS DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block a given distance element. VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP AB AND 20 ms OR PH DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 PH DIST Z2 OP AB
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP BC AND 20 ms OR PH DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 PH DIST Z2 OP BC
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP CA AND 20 ms OR PH DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 OR PH DIST Z2 OP CA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 OP 837020A6.CDR
Figure 544: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 TO ZONE 4 OP SCHEME
GE Multilin
5-81
5 SETTINGS
AND OR
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP * NOTE: * D60 Only. Other UR models apply regular current seal-in for Z1. PHS DIST Z1 DELAY:
AND OR 0 0 0 AND OR OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 OP
t PKP t PKP t PKP

AND AND AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA
837017A6.CDR
Figure 545: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME

SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: PHS DIST Z1 DIRECTION:
5
SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disable=0 Enable=1 SETTING PHS DIST Z1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: IA-IB IB-IC IC-IA VT CONNECTION WYE VAG-VBG VBG-VCG VCG-VAG V_1 I_1 MEMORY V_1 > 0.80pu OR I_1 > 0.025pu DELTA VAB VBC VCA
PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: PHS DIST Z1 REACH: PHS DIST Z1 RCA: PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: RUN A-B ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RUN D60 ONLY B-C ELEMENT OPEN POLE BLK AB AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 DPO AB FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BLK BC AND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 DPO BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BLK CA 1 CYCLE 1 CYCLE SETTING PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: RUN IA - IB > 3 PICKUP RUN IB - IC > 3 PICKUP RUN IC - IA > 3 PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OR AND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 DPO CA PH DIST Z1 PKP
AND
QUAD ONLY
RUN C-A ELEMENT
837002AE.CDR
Figure 546: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 TO ZONE 4 SCHEME LOGIC
5-82
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) GROUND DISTANCE

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE
GROUND DISTANCE Z1(Z4)
GROUND DISTANCE Z1
GND DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disabled GND DIST Z1 DIRECTION: Forward GND DIST Z1 SHAPE: Mho GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG: 2.70 GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG: 0 GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 MAG: 0.00 GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 ANG: 0 GND DIST Z1 REACH: 2.00 GND DIST Z1 RCA: 85 GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: 90 GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA: 85 GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: 90 GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: 10.00 GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: 85 GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: 10.00 GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: 85 GND DIST Z1 SUPV: 0.200 pu GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: 0.000 pu GND DIST Z1 DELAY:0.000 s GND DIST Z1 BLK: Off GND DIST Z1 TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Forward, Reverse
MESSAGE
Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Self-Rest, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-83
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS GND DIST Z1 EVENTS: Disabled

5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
The ground Mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance, directional, current, and phase selection supervising characteristics. The ground quadrilateral distance function is composed of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional, overcurrent, and phase selection supervising characteristics. The reactance supervision uses zero-sequence current as a polarizing quantity making the characteristic adaptable to the pre-fault power flow. The directional supervision uses memory voltage as polarizing quantity and both zero- and negativesequence currents as operating quantities. The phase selection supervision restrains the ground elements during double-line-to-ground faults as they by principles of distance relaying may be inaccurate in such conditions. Ground distance Zones 2 through 4 apply additional zerosequence directional supervision. See Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for additional details. Four zones of ground distance protection are provided. Each zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except: 1. 2. The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all four zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE menu). The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all four zones as entered under the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE menu).
The common distance settings noted at the start of the Distance section must be properly chosen for correct operation of the ground distance elements.
Although all four zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [PKP] and dropout [DPO] FlexLogic signals) or time-delayed elements (operate [OP] FlexLogic signals), only Zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous underreaching tripping mode.
BANK
WARNING
Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
VOLTAGE
GND DIST Z1 DIRECTION: All four zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the GND DIST Z1 RCA setting and the reverse direction is shifted by 180 from that angle. GND DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the ground distance characteristic between the mho and quad characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis. GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG: This setting specifies the ratio between the zero-sequence and positive-sequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. This setting is available on a perzone basis, enabling precise settings for tapped, non-homogeneous, and series compensated lines. GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the zero-sequence and positivesequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. The entered value is the zero-sequence impedance angle minus the positive-sequence impedance angle. This setting is available on a perzone basis, enabling precise values for tapped, non-homologous, and series-compensated lines. GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 MAG: The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zerosequence mutual coupling between parallel lines. If this compensation is required, the ground current from the parallel line (3I_0) measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the ground input CT of the CT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. This setting specifies the ratio between the magnitudes of the mutual zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line. It is imperative to set this setting to zero if the compensation is not to be performed. GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the mutual zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
GND DIST Z1 RCA
GND DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the reach of the zone. The angle of the reach impedance is entered as the setting. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. GND DIST Z1 RCA: The characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous technologies) of the ground distance characteristic is specified by this setting. It is set as an angle of reach impedance as shown in the Mho
5-84
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
and Quad Distance Characteristic figures. This setting is independent from the GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA setting (the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function). The relay internally performs zero-sequence compensation for the protected circuit based on the values entered for GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG and GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG, and if configured to do so, zero-sequence compensation for mutual coupling based on the values entered for GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 MAG and GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 ANG (see Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for details). The GND DIST Z1 REACH and GND DIST Z1 RCA should, therefore, be entered in terms of positive sequence quantities.
NOTE
GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it enables a lens-shaped characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the quad function reactance boundary. If the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction with the mho shape selection, this setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction with the quad characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the reactance boundary into a tent-shape. GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA: Selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional supervising function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function, as the dynamic mho characteristic itself is a directional one. In conjunction with the quad shape selection, this setting defines the only directional function built into the ground distance element. The directional function uses memory voltage for polarization. GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: This setting selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function. GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quad characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quad characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive coverage. GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quad characteristic (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). This setting applies only to the quad characteristic. GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quad characteristic along the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quad characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current. GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quad characteristic (see the Quad Distance Characteristic figure). This setting applies only to the quad characteristic. GND DIST Z1 SUPV: The ground distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the neutral (3I_0) current. The current supervision pickup should be set above the maximum unbalance current under maximum load conditions preventing maloperation due to VT fuse failure. Zone 1 is sealed in with the current supervision.
GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point for which the zone shall not overreach. For plain (non-compensated) lines, this setting shall be set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the VT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. See Chapter 8 for more details, and Chapter 9 for information on how to calculate this setting for applications on series compensated lines. GND DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting enables the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement a stepped distance backup protection. The distance element timer applies a short drop out delay to cope with faults located close to the boundary of the zone when small oscillations in the voltages and/or currents could inadvertently reset the timer. GND DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block the given distance element. VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
GE Multilin
5-85
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS GND DIST Z1 DIRECTION: GND DIST Z1 SHAPE: GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG: GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG: GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 MAG: GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 ANG: GND DIST Z1 REACH: GND DIST Z1 RCA: GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: SETTINGS GND DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disable=0 Enable=1 SETTING GND DIST Z1 BLK: GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA: GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: RUN A ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP A B ELEMENT D60 ONLY FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP B AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 DPO A GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 DPO B AND GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 DPO C OR GND DIST Z1 PKP
AND
Off=0 SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: IA IB IC VT CONNECTION WYE VAG-VBG VBG-VCG VCG-VAG I_2 I_0 V_1 I_1 IN V_1 > 0.80pu OR I_1 > 0.025pu MEMORY DELTA VAB VBC VCA
QUAD ONLY
RUN
RUN C ELEMENT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP C 1 CYCLE 1 CYCLE
SETTING GND DIST Z1 SUPV: RUN IN PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN 837007AB.CDR
Figure 547: GROUND DISTANCE Z1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-86
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 DIRECTION: GND DIST Z2 SHAPE: GND DIST Z2 Z0/Z2 MAG: GND DIST Z2 Z0/Z2 ANG: GND DIST Z2 Z0M/Z1 MAG: GND DIST Z2 Z0M/Z1 ANG: GND DIST Z2 REACH: GND DIST Z2 RCA: GND DIST Z2 COMP LIMIT: SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION: Disable=0 Enable=1 SETTING GND DIST Z2 BLK: Off=0 SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: IA IB IC VT CONNECTION WYE VAG-VBG VBG-VCG VCG-VAG I_2 I_0 V_1 I_1 IN V_1 > 0.80pu OR I_1 > 0.025pu SETTING GND DIST Z2 SUPV: RUN IN PICKUP 1 CYCLE 1 CYCLE MEMORY DELTA VAB VBC VCA RUN C ELEMENT RUN B ELEMENT D60 ONLY FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP B AND GND DIST Z2 DIR RCA: GND DIST Z2 DIR COMP LIMIT: GND DIST Z2 VOLT LEVEL: GND DIST Z2 QUAD RGT BLD: GND DIST Z2 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: GND DIST Z2 QUAD LFT BLD: GND DIST Z2 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: RUN A ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP A AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z2 PKP A GND DIST Z2 DPO A GND DIST Z2 PKP B GND DIST Z2 DPO B AND GND DIST Z2 PKP C GND DIST Z2 DPO C OR GND DIST Z2 PKP
AND
QUAD ONLY
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GND DIST Z2 SUPN IN GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN OPEN POLE OP* NOTE: *D60 only OR 837011AC.CDR
Figure 548: GROUND DISTANCE Z2 TO Z4 SCHEME LOGIC

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GND DIST Z1 OP A AND OR 0 GND DIST Z1 OP B GND DIST Z1 OP C
GND DIST Z1 DELAY: t PKP t PKP 0 t PKP 0
GND DIST Z1 PKP A GND DIST Z1 PKP B GND DIST Z1 PKP C GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
AND OR OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z1 OP
AND OPEN POLE OP * AND OR NOTE: * D60 Only. Other UR models apply regular current seal-in for Z1. 837018A5.CDR
Figure 549: GROUND DISTANCE Z1 OP SCHEME
GE Multilin
5-87
5 SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 PKP A AND 20 ms OR GND DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 GND DIST Z2 OP A
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 PKP B AND 20 ms OR GND DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 GND DIST Z2 OP B
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 PKP C AND 20 ms OR GND DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 OR GND DIST Z2 OP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 OP 837019A6.CDR
Figure 550: GROUND DISTANCE Z2 TO Z4 OP SCHEME GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION: A dual (zero- and negative-sequence) memory-polarized directional supervision applied to the ground distance protection elements has been shown to give good directional integrity. However, a reverse double-line-to-ground fault can lead to a maloperation of the ground element in a sound phase if the zone reach setting is increased to cover high resistance faults. Ground distance Zones 2 through 4 use an additional ground directional supervision to enhance directional integrity. The elements directional characteristic angle is used as a maximum torque angle together with a 90 limit angle. The supervision is biased toward operation in order to avoid compromising the sensitivity of ground distance elements at low signal levels. Otherwise, the reverse fault condition that generates concern will have high polarizing levels so that a correct reverse fault decision can be reliably made. The supervision for Zones 2 and 3 is removed during open pole conditions.
V_0 > 5 Volts SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: V_0 I_0 RUN ZERO SEQ DIRECTIONAL
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR t PKP AND t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
OPEN POLE OP
CO-ORDINATING TIME Pickup 4.5 cycles, Reset 1.0 cycle
837009A6.CDR
Figure 551: GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION SCHEME LOGIC Z2, Z3, Z4
5-88
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.5 POWER SWING DETECT
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
POWER SWING DETECT Range: Disabled, Enabled
POWER SWING DETECT

MESSAGE
POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled POWER SWING SOURCE: SRC 1 POWER SWING SHAPE: Mho Shape POWER SWING MODE: Two Step POWER SWING SUPV: 0.600 pu POWER SWING FWD REACH: 50.00 POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: 60.00 POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: 70.00 POWER SWING FWD RCA: 75 POWER SWING REV REACH: 50.00 POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: 60.00 POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: 70.00 POWER SWING REV RCA: 75 POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: 120 POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: 90 POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: 60 POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD: 100.00
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape
MESSAGE
Range: Two Step, Three Step
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-89
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: 0.030 s POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: 0.050 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: 0.017 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: 0.009 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: 0.017 s POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.400 s POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Delayed POWER SWING BLK: Off POWER SWING TARGET: Self-Reset POWER SWING EVENTS: Disabled
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Early, Delayed
MESSAGE
Range: Flexlogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The Power Swing Detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or three user-selectable operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking and/or tripping indication is given through FlexLogic operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance detector. This function does not trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances faults in particular that may occur during power swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the POWER SWING 50DD operand. The Power Swing Detect element asserts two outputs intended for blocking selected protection elements on power swings:
POWER SWING BLOCK is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power swing, and POWER SWING UN/BLOCK is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is detected during the power swing. The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand may be used for blocking selected protection elements if the intent is to respond to
faults during power swing conditions. Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power swing conditions, some elements may be blocked permanently (using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand), and others may be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand). The operating characteristic and logic figures should be viewed along with the following discussion to develop an understanding of the operation of the element. The Power Swing Detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode: Three-step operation: The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of the positivesequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus enters the outer characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING OUTER FlexLogic operand) but stays outside the middle characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING MIDDLE FlexLogic operand) for an interval longer than POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1, the power swing blocking signal (POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking signal resets when the locus leaves the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 time. Two-step operation: If the 2-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical, but it is the outer and inner characteristics that are used to time the power swing locus.
The Out-of-Step Tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step Power Swing Detection modes:
5-90
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Three-step operation: The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the impedance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence. After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out, Latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the middle characteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2, Latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner characteristic and stays there for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3, Latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic; the element is now ready to trip. If the "Early" trip mode is selected, the POWER SWING TRIP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval set by the POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY. If the "Delayed" trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance locus leaves the inner characteristic, then times out the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 and sets Latch 4; the element is now ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
Two-step operation: The 2-step mode of operation is similar to the 3-step mode with two exceptions. First, the initial stage monitors the time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the stage involving the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking (POWER SWING BLOCK) and tripping (POWER SWING TRIP) FlexLogic operands with other protection functions and output contacts in order to make this element fully operational.
The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quad) characteristics as illustrated below. When set to Mho, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, their settings should be set high enough to effectively disable the blinders.
X
5
FWD RE ACH
OU
TE
R
E M ID DL
IN
NE
FW DR CA
REV REAC
E NN
LIM
IT
AN
E GL
MI
DD
LE
I LIM
TA
NG
LE
Figure 552: POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
RE VR CA
OUTER LIMIT ANGLE
827843A2.CDR
GE Multilin
5-91
5 SETTINGS
842734A1.CDR
Figure 553: EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS
5
INNER LFT BL D D MIDDLE RGT ACH MID QUAD FWD RE FWD REACH ACH OUT QUAD FWD RE MIDDLE LFT BL OUTER LFT BL D INNER RGT BL D
BLD D
OUTER RGT BL
FWD RCA
REV REACH
CH MID
QUAD REV REA
QUAD REV RE AC
H OUT
842735A1.CDR
Figure 554: POWER SWING DETECT QUAD OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS The FlexLogic output operands for the Power Swing Detect element are described below: The POWER SWING OUTER, POWER SWING MIDDLE, POWER SWING INNER, POWER SWING TMR2 PKP, POWER SWING TMR3 PKP, and POWER SWING TMR4 PKP FlexLogic operands are auxiliary operands that could be used to facilitate testing and special applications. The POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block selected protection elements such as distance functions.
5-92
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block those protection elements that are intended to be blocked under power swings, but subsequently unblocked should a fault occur after the power swing blocking condition has been established. The POWER SWING 50DD FlexLogic operand indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the element has picked up. This operand will trigger on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both three-phase and single-pole-open conditions. The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the locus enters the inner characteristic). The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the locus leaving the outer characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre-defined number of unstable power swings. The POWER SWING TRIP FlexLogic operand is a trip command.
The settings for the Power Swing Detect element are described below: POWER SWING FUNCTION: This setting enables/disables the entire Power Swing Detection element. The setting applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. POWER SWING SOURCE: The source setting identifies the Signal Source for both blocking and tripping functions. POWER SWING SHAPE: This setting selects the shapes (either Mho or Quad) of the outer, middle and, inner characteristics of the power swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The Mho characteristics use the left and right blinders. POWER SWING MODE: This setting selects between the 2-step and 3-step operating modes and applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The 3-step mode applies if there is enough space between the maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and inner) characteristics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between the outer and middle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient should be determined by analysis of the fastest power swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers. The 2-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This leaves more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance characteristics and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory. POWER SWING SUPV: A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The supervision responds to the positive sequence current. POWER SWING FWD REACH: This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quad characteristic. For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the sum of the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING FWD RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteristics, angles of all the blinders, and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quad characteristics. POWER SWING REV REACH: This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quad characteristic. For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the positive-sequence impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING REV RCA setting for Mho, and the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting for Quad. POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.
GE Multilin
5-93
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING REV RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteristics. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention depicted in the Power Swing Detect Characteristic diagram should be observed: values greater than 90 result in an apple shaped characteristic; values less than 90 result in a lens shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected in consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, the outer limit angle should be coordinated with a 20 security margin. Detailed studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is relevant only for the 3-step mode. A typical value would be close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner characteristic is used by the out-of-step tripping function: beyond the inner characteristic out-of-step trip action is definite (the actual trip may be delayed as per the TRIP MODE setting). Therefore, this angle must be selected in consideration to the power swing angle beyond which the system becomes unstable and cannot recover. The inner characteristic is also used by the power swing blocking function in the 2-step mode. In this case, set this angle large enough so that the characteristics of the distance elements are safely enclosed by the inner characteristic. This setting applies to mho shapes only.
POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER RGT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the right blinder. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set these value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic. POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER LFT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the left blinder. Enter a positive value; the relay automatically uses a negative value. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set this value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: All the coordinating timers are related to each other and should be set to detect the fastest expected power swing and produce out-of-step tripping in a secure manner. The timers should be set in consideration to the power swing detect characteristics, mode of power swing detect operation and mode of out-ofstep tripping. This timer defines the interval that the impedance locus must spend between the outer and inner characteristics (2-step operating mode), or between the outer and middle characteristics (3-step operating mode) before the power swing blocking signal is established. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two selected characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. This setting is relevant for both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping. POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: This setting defines the dropout delay for the power swing blocking signal. Detection of a condition requiring a Block output sets Latch 1 after PICKUP DELAY 1 time. When the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic, timer POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 is started. When the timer times-out the latch is reset. This setting should be selected to give extra security for the power swing blocking action. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in the 3-step mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: Controls the out-of-step tripping function only. It defines the interval the impedance locus must spend within the inner characteristic before the last step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed and the element is armed to trip. The actual moment of tripping is controlled by the TRIP MODE setting. This time delay is provided for extra security before the out-of-step trip action is executed. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in Delayed trip mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend outside the inner characteristic but within the outer characteristic before the element is armed for the delayed trip. The delayed trip occurs when the impedance leaves the outer characteristic. This time delay is provided for extra security and should be set considering the fastest expected power swing.
5-94
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: The out-of-step trip FlexLogic operand (POWER SWING TRIP) is sealed-in for the specified period of time. The sealing-in is crucial in the delayed trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short pulse occurring when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed. POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Selection of the Early trip mode results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. The Early trip mode will stress the circuit breakers as the currents at that moment are high (the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are approximately 180 apart). Selection of the Delayed trip mode results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic. Delayed trip mode will relax the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are low. The selection should be made considering the capability of the breakers in the system. POWER SWING BLK: This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand used for blocking the out-of-step function only. The power swing blocking function is operational all the time as long as the element is enabled. The blocking signal resets the output POWER SWING TRIP operand but does not stop the out-of-step tripping sequence.
SETTINGS POWER SWING SHAPE: POWER SWING FWD REACH: POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: POWER SWING FWD RCA: SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING POWER SWING SOURCE: V_1 I_1 POWER SWING REV REACH: POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD: POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD: POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD:
POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING MIDDLE REACH MID: LFT BLD: POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING INNER REACH OUT: RGT BLD: POWER SWING REV RCA: RUN OUTER IMPEDANCE REGION RUN MIDDLE IMPEDANCE REGION RUN INNER IMPEDANCE REGION SETTING POWER SWING SUPV: RUN I_1 > PICKUP 827840A3.CDR AND AND AND POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING OUTER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING MIDDLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING INNER
Figure 555: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (1 of 3)

SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 0 SETTING POWER SWING SOURCE: I_0 I_1 I_2 RUN | |I_0| - |I_0'|| > K_0 | |I_1| - |I_1'|| > K_1 | |I_2| - |I_2'|| > K_2 OR AND 0 4 cycles TIMER 10 cycles FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD TIMER
I_0, I_1, I_2 - present values I_0', I_1', I_2' - half-a-cycle old values K_0, K_2 - three times the average change over last power cycle K_1 - four times the average change over last power cycle
842008A1.CDR
GE Multilin
5-95
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING MIDDLE
POWER SWING INNER
POWER SWING OUTER
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND AND AND
SETTING POWER SWING MODE: 3-step
SETTINGS POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP: POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET: tPKP tRST
S Q1 L1 R
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POWER SWING BLOCK FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD OR OR
S Q5
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
2-step
L5
R
SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP: tPKP 0

S Q2 L2 R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR2 PKP
3-step
2-step SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR3 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0

S Q3 L3 R
AND
tPKP
POWER SWING INCOMING SETTING POWER SWING TRIP MODE: SETTING Early POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: 0 tRST AND Delayed AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TRIP
SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP: AND tPKP 0 S Q4 L4 R
SETTING NOTE: L1 AND L4 LATCHES ARE SET DOMINANT L2, L3 AND L5 LATCHES ARE RESET DOMINANT POWER SWING BLK: Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR4 PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING OUTGOING 827841A4.CDR
5-96
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.6 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION: Disabled LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE: SRC 1 LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT: 0.250 pu LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH: 1.00 LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE: 30 LOAD ENCROACHMENT PKP DELAY: 0.000 s LOAD ENCROACHMENT RST DELAY: 0.000 s LOAD ENCRMNT BLK: Off LOAD ENCROACHMENT TARGET: Self-reset LOAD ENCROACHMENT EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.02 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Flexlogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The Load Encroachment element responds to the positive-sequence voltage and current and applies a characteristic shown in the figure below.
REACH
REACH
ANGLE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT OPERATE
ANGLE
R
LOAD ENCROACHMENT OPERATE
827846A1.CDR
Figure 558: LOAD ENCROACHMENT CHARACTERISTIC The element operates if the positive-sequence voltage is above a settable level and asserts its output signal that can be used to block selected protection elements such as distance or phase overcurrent. The following figure shows an effect of the Load Encroachment characteristics used to block the Quad distance element.
GE Multilin
5-97
5 SETTINGS
837731A1.CDR
Figure 559: LOAD ENCROACHMENT APPLIED TO DISTANCE ELEMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT: This setting specifies the minimum positive-sequence voltage required for operation of the element. If the voltage is below this threshold a blocking signal will not be asserted by the element. When selecting this setting one must remember that the D60 measures the phase-to-ground sequence voltages regardless of the VT connection.
PHASE VT SECONDARY
The nominal VT secondary voltage as specified under PATH: SYSTEM SETUP is the p.u. base for this setting.
AC INPUTS
VOLTAGE BANK X5
LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH: This setting specifies the resistive reach of the element as shown in the Load Encroachment Characteristic diagram. This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the positive-sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor. LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE: This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load Encroachment Characteristic diagram and applies to the positive sequence impedance.
SETTING LOAD ENCROACHMENT FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING LOAD ENCRMNT BLK: Off=0 SETTING LOAD ENCROACHMENT SOURCE: Pos Seq Voltage (V_1) Pos Seq Current (I_1)
827847A2.CDR
SETTINGS LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH: LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE: AND SETTING LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT: V_1 > Pickup Load Encroachment Characteristic RUN
SETTINGS LOAD ENCROACHMENT PKP DELAY: LOAD ENCROACHMENT RST DELAY: t PKP t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LOAD ENCHR PKP LOAD ENCHR DPO LOAD ENCHR OP
Figure 560: LOAD ENCROACHMENT SCHEME LOGIC
5-98
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.7 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT
PHASE CURRENT
PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC2 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2
See page 5104. See page 5104. See page 5106. See page 5106. See page 5107. See page 5107.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
b) INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTICS The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the TOC (time overcurrent) Current Elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The Definite Time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required. Table 59: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE IEEE Extremely Inv. IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse GE TYPE IAC IAC Extremely Inv. IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse OTHER I2t FlexCurves A, B, C, and D Recloser Curves Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup. Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
GE Multilin
5-99
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS IEEE CURVES:
5 SETTINGS
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae: A tr --------------------------------- + B --------------------------------2 I T = TDM --------------- p 1 , T RESET = TDM I 1 --------------- I pickup I pickup where:
(EQ 5.7)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed), tr = characteristic constant
Table 510: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inverse A 28.2 19.61 0.0515 B 0.1217 0.491 0.1140 P 2.0000 2.0000 0.02000 TR 29.1 21.6 4.85
Table 511: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER (TDM) CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 11.341 22.682 45.363 90.727 136.090 181.454 226.817 8.090 16.179 32.358 64.716 97.074 129.432 161.790 3.220 6.439 12.878 25.756 38.634 51.512 64.390 2.0 4.761 9.522 19.043 38.087 57.130 76.174 95.217 3.514 7.028 14.055 28.111 42.166 56.221 70.277 1.902 3.803 7.606 15.213 22.819 30.426 38.032 3.0 1.823 3.647 7.293 14.587 21.880 29.174 36.467 1.471 2.942 5.885 11.769 17.654 23.538 29.423 1.216 2.432 4.864 9.729 14.593 19.458 24.322 4.0 1.001 2.002 4.003 8.007 12.010 16.014 20.017 0.899 1.798 3.597 7.193 10.790 14.387 17.983 0.973 1.946 3.892 7.783 11.675 15.567 19.458 5.0 0.648 1.297 2.593 5.187 7.780 10.374 12.967 0.654 1.308 2.616 5.232 7.849 10.465 13.081 0.844 1.688 3.377 6.753 10.130 13.507 16.883 6.0 0.464 0.927 1.855 3.710 5.564 7.419 9.274 0.526 1.051 2.103 4.205 6.308 8.410 10.513 0.763 1.526 3.051 6.102 9.153 12.204 15.255 7.0 0.355 0.709 1.418 2.837 4.255 5.674 7.092 0.450 0.900 1.799 3.598 5.397 7.196 8.995 0.706 1.412 2.823 5.647 8.470 11.294 14.117 8.0 0.285 0.569 1.139 2.277 3.416 4.555 5.693 0.401 0.802 1.605 3.209 4.814 6.418 8.023 0.663 1.327 2.653 5.307 7.960 10.614 13.267 9.0 0.237 0.474 0.948 1.897 2.845 3.794 4.742 0.368 0.736 1.472 2.945 4.417 5.889 7.361 0.630 1.260 2.521 5.041 7.562 10.083 12.604 10.0 0.203 0.407 0.813 1.626 2.439 3.252 4.065 0.345 0.689 1.378 2.756 4.134 5.513 6.891 0.603 1.207 2.414 4.827 7.241 9.654 12.068
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
IEEE VERY INVERSE
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
5-100
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 T = TDM ( I I pickup ) E 1 , T RESET = TDM 1 ( I I pickup ) (EQ 5.8)
where:
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E = constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
Table 512: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse K 0.140 13.500 80.000 0.050 E 0.020 1.000 2.000 0.040 TR 9.7 43.2 58.2 0.500
Table 513: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER (TDM) IEC CURVE A 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 IEC CURVE B 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 IEC CURVE C 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 3.200 6.400 12.800 25.600 38.400 51.200 64.000 0.153 0.306 0.612 1.223 1.835 2.446 3.058 1.333 2.667 5.333 10.667 16.000 21.333 26.667 0.089 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.067 1.423 1.778 0.500 1.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 0.056 0.111 0.223 0.445 0.668 0.890 1.113 0.267 0.533 1.067 2.133 3.200 4.267 5.333 0.044 0.088 0.175 0.351 0.526 0.702 0.877 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.333 2.000 2.667 3.333 0.038 0.075 0.150 0.301 0.451 0.602 0.752 0.114 0.229 0.457 0.914 1.371 1.829 2.286 0.034 0.067 0.135 0.269 0.404 0.538 0.673 0.083 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.000 1.333 1.667 0.031 0.062 0.124 0.247 0.371 0.494 0.618 0.063 0.127 0.254 0.508 0.762 1.016 1.270 0.029 0.058 0.115 0.231 0.346 0.461 0.576 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 1.000 0.027 0.054 0.109 0.218 0.327 0.435 0.544 0.040 0.081 0.162 0.323 0.485 0.646 0.808 0.026 0.052 0.104 0.207 0.311 0.415 0.518 1.350 2.700 5.400 10.800 16.200 21.600 27.000 0.675 1.350 2.700 5.400 8.100 10.800 13.500 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.700 4.050 5.400 6.750 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.800 2.700 3.600 4.500 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.025 2.700 3.375 0.135 0.270 0.540 1.080 1.620 2.160 2.700 0.113 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.350 1.800 2.250 0.096 0.193 0.386 0.771 1.157 1.543 1.929 0.084 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.013 1.350 1.688 0.075 0.150 0.300 0.600 0.900 1.200 1.500 0.860 1.719 3.439 6.878 10.317 13.755 17.194 0.501 1.003 2.006 4.012 6.017 8.023 10.029 0.315 0.630 1.260 2.521 3.781 5.042 6.302 0.249 0.498 0.996 1.992 2.988 3.984 4.980 0.214 0.428 0.856 1.712 2.568 3.424 4.280 0.192 0.384 0.767 1.535 2.302 3.070 3.837 0.176 0.353 0.706 1.411 2.117 2.822 3.528 0.165 0.330 0.659 1.319 1.978 2.637 3.297 0.156 0.312 0.623 1.247 1.870 2.493 3.116 0.149 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.782 2.376 2.971 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC SHORT TIME
GE Multilin
5-101
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS IAC CURVES: The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae: D E B tr - T = TDM A + ----------------------------- + ------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------- , T RESET = TDM ------------------------------2 3 ( I I pkp ) C ( ( I I pkp ) C ) 2 ( ( I I pkp ) C ) 1 ( I I pkp ) where:
5 SETTINGS
(EQ 5.9)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E = constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
Table 514: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE IAC Extreme Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse A 0.0040 0.0900 0.2078 0.0428 B 0.6379 0.7955 0.8630 0.0609 C 0.6200 0.1000 0.8000 0.6200 D 1.7872 1.2885 0.4180 0.0010 E 0.2461 7.9586 0.1947 0.0221 TR 6.008 4.678 0.990 0.222
Table 515: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER (TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 1.699 3.398 6.796 13.591 20.387 27.183 33.979 1.451 2.901 5.802 11.605 17.407 23.209 29.012 0.578 1.155 2.310 4.621 6.931 9.242 11.552 0.072 0.143 0.286 0.573 0.859 1.145 1.431 2.0 0.749 1.498 2.997 5.993 8.990 11.987 14.983 0.656 1.312 2.624 5.248 7.872 10.497 13.121 0.375 0.749 1.499 2.997 4.496 5.995 7.494 0.047 0.095 0.190 0.379 0.569 0.759 0.948 3.0 0.303 0.606 1.212 2.423 3.635 4.846 6.058 0.269 0.537 1.075 2.150 3.225 4.299 5.374 0.266 0.532 1.064 2.128 3.192 4.256 5.320 0.035 0.070 0.140 0.279 0.419 0.559 0.699 4.0 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.422 2.133 2.844 3.555 0.172 0.343 0.687 1.374 2.061 2.747 3.434 0.221 0.443 0.885 1.770 2.656 3.541 4.426 0.031 0.061 0.123 0.245 0.368 0.490 0.613 5.0 0.123 0.246 0.491 0.983 1.474 1.966 2.457 0.133 0.266 0.533 1.065 1.598 2.131 2.663 0.196 0.392 0.784 1.569 2.353 3.138 3.922 0.028 0.057 0.114 0.228 0.341 0.455 0.569 6.0 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.744 1.115 1.487 1.859 0.113 0.227 0.453 0.906 1.359 1.813 2.266 0.180 0.360 0.719 1.439 2.158 2.878 3.597 0.027 0.054 0.108 0.217 0.325 0.434 0.542 7.0 0.074 0.149 0.298 0.595 0.893 1.191 1.488 0.101 0.202 0.405 0.810 1.215 1.620 2.025 0.168 0.337 0.674 1.348 2.022 2.695 3.369 0.026 0.052 0.105 0.210 0.314 0.419 0.524 8.0 0.062 0.124 0.248 0.495 0.743 0.991 1.239 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.745 1.117 1.490 1.862 0.160 0.320 0.640 1.280 1.921 2.561 3.201 0.026 0.051 0.102 0.204 0.307 0.409 0.511 9.0 0.053 0.106 0.212 0.424 0.636 0.848 1.060 0.087 0.174 0.349 0.698 1.046 1.395 1.744 0.154 0.307 0.614 1.229 1.843 2.457 3.072 0.025 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.301 0.401 0.501 10.0 0.046 0.093 0.185 0.370 0.556 0.741 0.926 0.083 0.165 0.331 0.662 0.992 1.323 1.654 0.148 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.781 2.375 2.969 0.025 0.049 0.099 0.197 0.296 0.394 0.493
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE 0.5
1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 IAC INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
IAC VERY INVERSE
IAC SHORT INVERSE
5-102
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS I2t CURVES: The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae: 100 100 ---------------------------------------------------I I T = TDM --------------- 2 , T RESET = TDM --------------- 2 I pickup I pickup where:
(EQ 5.10)
T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting; TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 516: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER (TDM) 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 0.44 4.44 44.44 444.44 4444.4 26666.7 2.0 0.25 2.50 25.00 250.00 2500.0 15000.0 3.0 0.11 1.11 11.11 111.11 1111.1 6666.7 4.0 0.06 0.63 6.25 62.50 625.00 3750.0 5.0 0.04 0.40 4.00 40.00 400.00 2400.0 6.0 0.03 0.28 2.78 27.78 277.78 1666.7 7.0 0.02 0.20 2.04 20.41 204.08 1224.5 8.0 0.02 0.16 1.56 15.63 156.25 937.50 9.0 0.01 0.12 1.23 12.35 123.46 740.74 10.0 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00
FLEXCURVES: The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the FlexCurves are derived from the formulae: I T = TDM FlexCurve Time at --------------- I pickup I when --------------- 1.00 I pickup I when --------------- 0.98 I pickup
(EQ 5.11)
I T RESET = TDM FlexCurve Time at --------------- I pickup where:
(EQ 5.12)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE: The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup T RESET = TDM in seconds where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
(EQ 5.13) (EQ 5.14)
RECLOSER CURVES: The D60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve section in this chapter for additional details.
GE Multilin
5-103
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1(2)
5 SETTINGS
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE TOC1 INPUT: Phasor PHASE TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv PHASE TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT: Disabled PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Off PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Off PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Off PHASE TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Curves Characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately. The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
5-104
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Multiplier for Pickup Current
1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage

818784A4.CDR
Figure 561: PHASE TOC VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

SETTING PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-A : Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-B: Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-C: Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 SOURCE: IA IB IC Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
RUN
5
SETTING PHASE TOC1 INPUT: PHASE TOC1 PICKUP: PHASE TOC1 CURVE: PHASE TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: PHASE TOC1 RESET:
AND
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP
OR OR
IA
PICKUP t
VAB VBC VCA
VAC VBA VCB
Set Calculate Multiplier Set Calculate Multiplier Set Calculate Multiplier
MULTIPLY INPUTS Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase A Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase B Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase C
AND
RUN
RUN
IB
PICKUP t
RUN
AND
RUN
IC
PICKUP t
SETTING PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT: Enabled
PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 DPO

827072A4.CDR
AND
Figure 562: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-105
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC 1(2)
5 SETTINGS
PHASE IOC1
PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Off PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Off PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Off PHASE IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
SETTING PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 SOURCE: IA IB IC SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-A: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-B: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-C: Off = 0
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING PHASE IOC1 PICKUP: RUN IA AND RUN IB AND RUN tPKP IC PICKUP tRST PICKUP tPKP tRST PICKUP SETTINGS PHASE IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE IOC1 A PKP PHASE IOC1 A DPO PHASE IOC1 B PKP PHASE IOC1 B DPO PHASE IOC1 C PKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO PHASE IOC1 A OP PHASE IOC1 B OP PHASE IOC1 C OP OR OR AND PHASE IOC1 PKP PHASE IOC1 OP PHASE IOC1 DPO
AND
827033A6.VSD
Figure 563: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-106
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS e) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT
PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2)
PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Off PHASE DIR 1 ECA: 30 PHASE DIR POL V1 THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: No PHASE DIR 1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE DIR 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the BLOCK inputs of these elements.
S UT TP OU 0
90
VAG (Unfaulted)
Fault angle set at 60 Lag VPol
VAG(Faulted)
IA
ECA set at 30 VBC
VBC VCG VBG +90
Phasors for Phase A Polarization: VPol = VBC (1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage IA = operating current ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30
827800A2.CDR
Figure 564: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90 or "quadrature" connection. If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite ECA settings.
GE Multilin
5-107
5 SETTINGS
To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed. The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal (phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA). The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
PHASE A B C OPERATING SIGNAL Angle of IA Angle of IB Angle of IC POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol ABC PHASE SEQUENCE Angle of VBC (1ECA) Angle of VCA (1ECA) Angle of VAB (1ECA) ACB PHASE SEQUENCE Angle of VCB (1ECA) Angle of VAC 1ECA) Angle of VBA (1ECA)
MODE OF OPERATION: When the function is "Disabled", or the operating current is below 5% CT Nominal, the element output is "0". When the function is "Enabled", the operating current is above 5% CT Nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above the set threshold, the element output is dependent on the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals: The element output is logic 0 when the operating current is within polarizing voltage 90. For all other angles, the element output is logic 1. Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or trip on overcurrent as follows: when BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes, the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires. When set to No, the directional element allows tripping of Phase OC elements under directional control when voltage memory expires.
In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the "polarizing voltage threshold". SETTINGS: PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals. The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polarizing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the Element Characteristic Angle (ECA). PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the Element Characteristic Angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of UR elements, a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction. PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is "0.700 pu". PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control. The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element needs some time in the order of 8 msec to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10 msec must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a longer delay in the order of 20 msec may be needed.
NOTE
5-108
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE: IA Seq=ABC VBC Seq=ACB VCB SETTING PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: -Use V when V Min -Use V memory when V < Min V MINIMUM OR MEMORY TIMER 1 cycle 1 sec AND I 0.05 pu AND
AND
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 ECA: RUN 1 0 Vpol I OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIR1 BLK
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIR1 BLK A
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP: No Yes
USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE
USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A
PH DIR1 BLK B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A

Figure 565: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC
PH DIR1 BLK C 827078A6.CDR
5.5.8 NEUTRAL CURRENT a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC2 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC2 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-109
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1(2)
5 SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT: Phasor NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The Neutral Time Overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTINGS NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT: NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE: NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: NEUTRAL TOC 1 RESET: IN PICKUP RUN
t I
SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 SOURCE: IN SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
827034A3.VSD
Figure 566: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-110
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)

NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion (6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity of the element as follows: I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 ) where K = 1 16
(EQ 5.15)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from: system unbalances under heavy load conditions transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection: I op = 0.9375 I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 I injected ).
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:
SETTINGS SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:
Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY : NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY : tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
AND
RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Off=0 SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
I_0
827035A4.CDR
Figure 567: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-111
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N)

5 SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1(2)
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1

MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: Voltage NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Calculated V0 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: Calculated 3I0 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: 0.00 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: 75 Lag NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Off NEUTRAL DIR OC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL DIR OC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
MESSAGE
Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX
MESSAGE
Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are two Neutral Directional Overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit). The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calculated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are two separate pickup settings for the forward- and reverselooking functions, respectively. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small portion (6.25%) of the positivesequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity. I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 ) where K = 1 16
(EQ 5.16)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions. Transformation errors of Current Transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults. Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
5-112
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection: Iop = 0.9375 Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 Iinjected). The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low. The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage ("Calculated V0" or "Measured VX"), ground current (IG), or both for polarizing. The following tables define the Neutral Directional Overcurrent element. Table 517: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION
DIRECTIONAL UNIT POLARIZING MODE Voltage Current DIRECTION Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Dual Reverse IG IG V_0 + Z_offset I_0 or I_0 COMPARED PHASORS V_0 + Z_offset I_0 V_0 + Z_offset I_0 IG IG V_0 + Z_offset I_0 or I_0 I_0 1ECA I_0 1ECA I_0 1ECA I_0 I_0 I_0 1ECA Iop = 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu Iop = 3 (|I_0|) if |I1| 0.8 pu OVERCURRENT UNIT
Table 518: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT POLARIZING MODE Voltage DIRECTION Forward Reverse COMPARED PHASORS V_0 + Z_offset IG/3 V_0 + Z_offset IG/3 IG 1ECA IG 1ECA OVERCURRENT UNIT Iop = |IG|
where:
1 V_0 = -- ( VAG + VBG + VCG ) = zero sequence voltage , 3 1 1 I_0 = -- IN = -- ( IA + IB + IC ) = zero sequence current , 3 3 ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current
When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element. The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a Phase A to ground fault, with: ECA = 90 (Element Characteristic Angle = centerline of operating characteristic) FWD LA = 80 (Forward Limit Angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) REV LA = 80 (Reverse Limit Angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation. The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore, should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forwardlooking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination. The above bias should be taken into account when using the Neutral Directional Overcurrent element to directionalize other protection elements.
GE Multilin
5-113
5 SETTINGS
REV LA line
3V_0 line VAG

(reference)
FWD LA line
REV Operating Region
FWD Operating Region
LA ECA
LA 3I_0 line
ECA line ECA line
3I_0 line VCG LA
LA
VBG
REV LA line
3V_0 line
FWD LA line
827805A1.CDR
Figure 568: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit. If Voltage polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage Vx, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to "Vn" and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs). The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (Vx), accordingly, must be higher than 0.02 pu nominal voltage to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. If Current polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The Ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be higher than 0.05 pu to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. In DISPLAY PROPERTIES addition, the zero-sequence current (I_0) must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar situation arises for a Wye/Delta/Wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered. If "Dual" polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual" polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX"). NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to Calculated 3I0 the element uses the phase currents and applies the pos-
5-114
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
itive-sequence restraint; if set to Measured IG the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT bank configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. If this setting is Measured IG, then the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING setting must be Voltage, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and polarizing signal simultaneously. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. See the Chapter 9 for information on how to calculate this setting. In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. See Chapter 8 for additional details. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the "Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a "positive-sequence restraint" technique for the "Calculated 3I0" mode of operation. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction.
GE Multilin
5-115
5 SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a "positive-sequence restraint" technique for the "Calculated 3I0" mode of operation.
SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: Measured VX Calculated V_0 Zero Seq Crt (I_0) Ground Crt (IG) NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP OR IG PICKUP
AND
AND AND
SETTINGS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
}
IG 0.05 pu AND
FWD
OR AND 1.25 cy 1.5 cy
}
OR OR
FWD REV
-3V_0 3I_0 REV
Voltage Polarization SETTING RUN FWD Current Polarization REV OR
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: Voltage Current Dual NOTE: 1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu
SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP OR IG PICKUP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
827077AA.CDR
Figure 569: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC 5.5.9 GROUND CURRENT a) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)
5-116
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT

GROUND TOC1(2)
GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GROUND TOC1 INPUT: Phasor GROUND TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu GROUND TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Off GROUND TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset GROUND TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available; Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately. These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
SETTINGS GROUND TOC1 INPUT: GROUND TOC1 PICKUP: GROUND TOC1 CURVE: GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: GROUND TOC 1 RESET: RUN IG PICKUP t I SETTING GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0
NOTE
SETTING GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTING GROUND TOC1 SOURCE: IG
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 DPO GROUND TOC1 OP
827036A3.VSD
Figure 570: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC b) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND IOC1(2)
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled
GE Multilin
5-117
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Off GROUND IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset GROUND IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Ground IOC element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND IOIC DPO GROUND IOC1 OP
SETTING GROUND IOC1 SOURCE: IG SETTING GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
SETTING GROUND IOC1 PICKUP: RUN IG PICKUP
SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST
827037A4.VSD
Figure 571: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
5-118
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.10 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC2 NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC2 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-119
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 SETTINGS
NEG SEQ TOC1(2)
NEG SEQ TOC1
NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00 NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK: Off NEG SEQ TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
Range: see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The negative sequence time overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the system. The input for calculating negative sequence current is the fundamental phasor value. Two methods of resetting operation are available; Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Characteristics sub-section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 INPUT: NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP:
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION: NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE: NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET:

NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
AND
RUN
NEG SEQ < PICKUP
Off=0 SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 SOURCE:
Neg Seq
827057A4.CDR
Figure 572: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-120
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
NEG SEQ OC1(2)
NEG SEQ IOC1
NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s NEG SEQ IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK: Off NEG SEQ IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time function. The element responds to the negative-sequence current fundamental frequency phasor magnitude (calculated from the phase currents) and applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small portion (12.5%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity: I op = I_2 K I_1 where K = 1 8
(EQ 5.17)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence currents resulting from: system unbalances under heavy load conditions transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during three-phase faults fault inception and switch-off transients during three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single phase injection: I op = 0.2917 I injected ; three phase injection, opposite rotation: I op = I injected ).
SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION:
SETTING SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP:

NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK:
NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: NEG SEQ IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP PICKUP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO NEG SEQ IOC1 OP
AND
RUN I_2 - K I_1
Off=0 SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 SOURCE:
I_2
827058A5.CDR
Figure 573: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-121
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 SETTINGS
NEG SEQ DIR OC1(2)
NEG SEQ DIR OC1
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEG SEQ DIR OC1 SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: 0.00 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: Neg Sequence NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: 75 Lag NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: 0.05 pu NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: 0.05 pu NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK: Off NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ DIR OC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Neg Sequence, Zero Sequence
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 90 Lag in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are two Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications through its output operands NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD and NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit). The overcurrent unit of the element essentially responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of either the negative-sequence or zero-sequence current as per user selection. The zero-sequence current should not be mistaken with the neutral current (factor 3 difference). A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance: a small portion (12.5% for negative-sequence and 6.25% for zero-sequence) of the positivesequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative- or zero-sequence current magnitude, respectively, when forming the element operating quantity. I op = I_2 K I_1 , where K = 1 8 or I op = 3I_0 K I_1 , where K = 1 16
(EQ 5.18)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative- and zerosequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions. Transformation errors of Current Transformers (CTs). Fault inception and switch-off transients.
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pick-up accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay: single-phase injection: Iop = 0.2917 Iinjected (negative-sequence mode); Iop = 0.3125 Iinjected (zero-sequence mode)
5-122
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS three-phase pure zero- or negative-sequence injection, respectively: Iop = Iinjected.
the directional unit uses the negative-sequence current and voltage for fault direction discrimination
The following table defines the Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent element.
OVERCURRENT UNIT MODE Negative-Sequence Zero-Sequence OPERATING CURRENT DIRECTION Forward Reverse Forward Reverse DIRECTIONAL UNIT COMPARED PHASORS V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 I_2 1ECA (I_2 1ECA) I_2 1ECA (I_2 1ECA)
Iop = |I_2| K I_1| Iop = |3I_0| K |I_1|
The negative-sequence voltage must be higher than the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES VOLTAGE CUT-OFF value to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.
LEVEL
The figure below shows the phase angle comparator characteristics for a Phase A to ground fault, with settings of: ECA FWD LA REV LA = 75 (Element Characteristic Angle = centerline of operating characteristic) = 80 (Forward Limit Angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) = 80 (Reverse Limit Angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation.
5
V_2 line REV LA FWD LA VAG (reference)
REV Operating Region
LA ECA line LA ECA I_2 line
I_2 line
LA FWD Operating Region
ECA line
LA VCG VBG
V_2 line
REV LA
FWD LA
827806A2.CDR
Figure 574: NEG SEQ DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore, should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forwardlooking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination. The above bias should be taken into account when using the Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent element to directionalize DISother protection elements. The negative-sequence directional pickup must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP PLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value.
GE Multilin
5-123
5 SETTINGS
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines (see the Application of Settings chapter for information on how to calculate this setting). In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. See the Theory of Operation chapter for additional details. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: This setting selects the operating mode for the overcurrent unit of the element. The choices are Neg Sequence and Zero Sequence. In some applications it is advantageous to use a directional negative-sequence overcurrent function instead of a directional zero-sequence overcurrent function as inter-circuit mutual effects are minimized. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting select the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction. The element characteristic angle in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the forward direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the reverse direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique.
SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: AND AND SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 SOURCE: Neg Seq Voltage (V_2) Neg Seq Seq Crt (I_2) Zero Seq Seq Crt (I_0) SETTINGS NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: AND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: RUN REV. V_2 pol Voltage Polarization FWD FWD AND 1.25 cy 1.5 cy AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD RUN 3I_0 - K I_1 RUN I_2 - K I_1 PICKUP PICKUP
OR AND
REV
SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: Neg Sequence Zero Sequence AND AND
SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: RUN I_2 - K I_1 RUN 3I_0 - K I_1 PICKUP PICKUP AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV OR 827091A4.CDR
Figure 575: NEG SEQ DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-124
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.11 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
BREAKER FAILURE
BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)
BREAKER FAILURE 1
BF1 FUNCTION: Disabled BF1 MODE: 3-Pole BF1 SOURCE: SRC 1 BF1 USE AMP SUPV: Yes BF1 USE SEAL-IN: Yes BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: Off BF1 BLOCK: Off BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 USE TIMER 1: Yes BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 USE TIMER 2: Yes BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 USE TIMER 3: Yes BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P: Off BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P: Off BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: Off BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-125
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: 1.050 pu BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: 0.000 s BF1 TARGET Self-Reset BF1 EVENTS Disabled BF1 PH A INITIATE: Off BF1 PH B INITIATE: Off BF1 PH C INITIATE: Off BF1 BKR POS1 B Off BF1 BKR POS1 C Off BF1 BKR POS2 B Off BF1 BKR POS2 C Off
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes. Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes. Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes. Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes. Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes. Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes. Range: FlexLogic operand Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
There are 2 identical Breaker Failure menus available, numbered 1 and 2. In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time, so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required. Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name "3BF") and one for three pole plus single-pole operation (identified by the name "1BF"). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output. INITIATION STAGE: A FlexLogic operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the scheme, except for the D60 relay were this is already programmed as a Trip Output (the protection trip signal does not include other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected zone). The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic timer, set longer than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme. Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure element not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for transformer faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used. Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of
5-126
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it. When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually described as Re-Trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker. DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION: The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three paths. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay, after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed paths are associated with Breaker Failure Timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility. Timer 1 logic (Early Path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indicated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit. Timer 2 logic (Main Path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact. The Timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, Hi-set and Lo-set, that allow the supervision level to change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after resistor insertion. The Hi-set detector is enabled after timeout of Timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the Lo-set detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between Hi-set and Lo-set is the expected breaker opening time. Both current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent detectors are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detectors. Timer 3 logic (Slow Path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the breaker is in/out of service, disabling this path when the breaker is out of service for maintenance. There is no current level check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate. OUTPUT: The outputs from the schemes are: FlexLogic operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme FlexLogic operand used to re-trip the protected breaker FlexLogic operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an adjustable period. Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:

ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE 0 AMP 0 CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE Rampdown PROTECTION OPERATION (ASSUMED 1.5 cycles) BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME (ASSUMED 3 cycles) MARGIN (Assumed 2 Cycles) BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME (Assumed 3 Cycles) CORRECT INTERRUPTION FAILED INTERRUPTION
INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (1/8 cycle) BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle) BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT OCCURS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
cycles 11 827083A6.CDR
Figure 576: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE
GE Multilin
5-127
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTINGS: BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
5 SETTINGS
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision pickup level. BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the supervision pickup level. BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that will initiate 3-pole tripping of the breaker. BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) - Hiset and Loset current supervision will guarantee correct operation. BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping schemes. BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the Early Path is operational. BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin. BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the Main Path is operational. BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equipment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In D60 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker Failure Main Path Sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most applications. Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational. BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as Timer 2, plus an increased safety margin. Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms. BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact. BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic operand that represents the breaker In-Service/Out-of-Service switch set to the Out-of-Service position. BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted. BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted. Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes. BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted (approximately 90% of the resistor current).
5-128
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted (approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes. BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion. BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure element sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a Transfer Trip signal on longer than the "reclaim" time. BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic operand to initiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly. This setting is only valid for 1-pole breaker failure schemes. BF1 BKR POS1 B / BF1 BKR POS 1 C: These settings select the FlexLogic operand to represents the protected breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied FormA contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure schemes. BF1 BKR POS2 B: Selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure schemes. BF1 BKR POS2 C: This setting selects the FlexLogic operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure schemes. Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a 3-pole trip command should be given via output operand "BF1 TRIP OP".
GE Multilin
5-129
5 SETTINGS
In D60 Only From Trip Output

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE C TRIP PHASE B TRIP 3-POLE TRIP PHASE A SETTING BF1 FUNCTION: Enable=1 Disable=0 SETTING BF1 BLOCK : Off=0
AND
SETTING BF1 PH A INITIATE: Off=0

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA

OR OR AND
SETTING BF1 3-POLE INITIATE : Off=0 SETTING BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
Initiated Ph A TO SHEET 2 OF 2
YES=1 NO=0 SETTING BF1 USE AMP SUPV: YES=1 NO=0

AND OR
AND SEAL-IN PATH
OR OR
SETTING BF1 PH B INITIATE : Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR OR AND SEAL-IN PATH AND
TO SHEET 2 OF 2 (Initiated)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
OR
Initiated Ph B TO SHEET 2 OF 2
SETTING BF1 PH C INITIATE : Off=0 SETTING BF1 SOURCE : IA IB IC
OR OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC

AND
SETTING BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP :

RUN RUN RUN
SEAL-IN PATH
IA IB IC
PICKUP PICKUP PICKUP

OR
Initiated Ph C TO SHEET 2 OF 2
}
Figure 577: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)
TO SHEET 2 OF 2 (827070.CDR)
827069A5.CDR
5-130
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 (Initiated) SETTING BF1 USE TIMER 1: YES=1 NO=0 SETTING BF1 BKR POS1 Off=0 FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 Initiated Ph A SETTING BF1 USE TIMER 2: NO=0 YES=1 SETTING BF1 BKR POS1 Off=0 FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 Initiated Ph B SETTING BF1 BKR POS1 Off=0 FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 Initiated Ph C C: B:
AND AND
SETTING BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY:

0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
A/3P:
AND
OR
SETTING BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: 0

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
AND
OR
AND
5
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP:
RUN RUN RUN
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 (827069.CDR) IA IB IC SETTING BF1 USE TIMER 3: YES=1 NO=0 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 Off=0 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 Off=0 SETTING BF1 BKR POS2 Off=0 SETTING
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
IA IB IC
PICKUP PICKUP PICKUP
SETTING BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: 0

OR
SETTING BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
0 A/3P: SETTING BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY:

AND 0
SETTING BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP :

RUN RUN RUN
IA IB IC
PICKUP PICKUP PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
B:
C:
Off=0
827070A4.CDR
Figure 578: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-131
5 SETTINGS
Figure 579: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-132
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Figure 580: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-133
5 SETTINGS 5.5.12 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 NEUTRAL OV1 NEG SEQ OV AUXILIARY UV1 AUXILIARY OV1
See page 5135. See page 5135. See page 5136. See page 5137. See page 5138. See page 5139. See page 5140.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay. Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements. Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source. The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below. D T = --------------------------------V 1 ------------------ V pickup where: T = Operating Time D = Undervoltage Delay Setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously) V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay Vpickup = Pickup Level At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
NOTE
20.0 18.0 16.0 Time (seconds) 14.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0.0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
D=5.0
2.0 1.0
70
80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
Figure 581: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
5-134
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(2)
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE UV1 MODE: Phase to Ground PHASE UV1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE UV1 CURVE: Definite Time PHASE UV1 DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Off PHASE UV1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE UV1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage (phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for Wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING PHASE UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE UV1 SOURCE: Source VT = Delta VAB VBC VCA Source VT = Wye SETTING PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase
SETTING PHASE UV1 PICKUP: PHASE UV1 CURVE: PHASE UV1 DELAY: AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP t V RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP t V RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP t V FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE UV1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE UV1 A PKP PHASE UV1 A DPO PHASE UV1 A OP SETTING AND PHASE UV1 B PKP PHASE UV1 B DPO PHASE UV1 B OP AND PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV1 C DPO PHASE UV1 C OP
AND
VAG VBG VCG
VAB VBC VCA
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: VAG or VAB < Minimum VBG or VBC < Minimum VCG or VCA < Minimum
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE UV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND PHASE UV1 DPO

827039AB.CDR
Figure 582: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-135
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)

5 SETTINGS
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE OV1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Off PHASE OV1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite Time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from Delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (Wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.
SETTING PHASE OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE OV1 PICKUP: PHASE OV1 CURVE: PHASE OV1 DELAY: AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP t V RUN VBG or VBC < PICKUP t V RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP t FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS V PHASE OV1 A PKP PHASE OV1 A DPO PHASE OV1 A OP PHASE OV1 B PKP PHASE OV1 B DPO PHASE OV1 B OP PHASE OV1 C PKP PHASE OV1 C DPO PHASE OV1 C OP
SETTING PHASE OV1 SOURCE: Source VT = Delta VAB VBC VCA Source VT = Wye
SETTING PHASE OV1 MODE:

Phase to Ground
Phase to Phase VAB VBC VCA
VAG VBG VCG
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE OV1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE OV1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND PHASE OV1 DPO
827066A5.CDR
Figure 583: PHASE OV SCHEME LOGIC
5-136
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)

NEUTRAL OV1
NEUTRAL OV1
NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: DELAY: 1.00 s NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: DELAY: 1.00 s NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from SYSTEM the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level. VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to be Wye connected.
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION:

NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
SETTING NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: AND RUN SETTING NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY : NEUTRAL OV1 RESET DELAY : 3V_0 < Pickup tPKP tRST
Off=0 SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL OV1 OP NEUTRAL OV1 DPO NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)

827848A1.CDR
Figure 584: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-137
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS e) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEG SEQ OV
5 SETTINGS
NEG SEQ OV
NEG SEQ OV FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: 0.300 pu NEG SEQ OV PICKUP DELAY: 0.50 s NEG SEQ OV RESET DELAY: 0.50 s NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: Off NEG SEQ OV TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ OV EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The negative sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.
SETTING NEG SEQ OV FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL SOURCE:
Source VT=Wye Source VT=Delta
SETTING NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: AND RUN SETTINGS NEG SEQ OV PICKUP DELAY: NEG SEQ OV RESET DELAY: t PKP V_2 or 3 * V_2 > PKP = t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEG SEQ OV PKP NEG SEQ OV DPO NEG SEQ OV OP
V_2
3 * V_2
827839A2.CDR
Figure 585: NEG SEQ OV SCHEME LOGIC
5-138
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS f) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)

AUXILIARY UV1
AUXILIARY UV1
AUX UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 AUX UV1 PICKUP: 0.700 pu AUX UV1 CURVE: Definite Time AUX UV1 DELAY: 1.00 s AUX UV1 MINIMUM: VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu AUX UV1 BLOCK: Off AUX UV1 TARGET: Self-reset AUX UV1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY channel entered under SETTINGS is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level. The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element can be programmed to use either Definite Time Delay or Inverse Time Delay characteristics. The operating characteristics and equations for both Definite and Inverse Time Delay are as for the Phase Undervoltage element. The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1 FUNCTION:
SETTING AUX UV1 PICKUP: AUX UV1 CURVE: AUX UV1 DELAY: AND SETTING AUX UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: Vx < Minimum V
827849A2.CDR

AUX UV1 BLOCK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP
Off=0 SETTING
AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
RUN t
Vx < Pickup
AUX VOLT Vx
Figure 586: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-139
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS g) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)

5 SETTINGS
AUXILIARY OV1
AUXILIARY OV1
AUX OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 AUX OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 1.00 s AUX OV1 RESET DELAY: 1.00 s AUX OV1 BLOCK: Off AUX OV1 TARGET: Self-reset AUX OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. A typical application for this element is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta VT connection. The nominal secondary VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS X5 SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1 FUNCTION:

AUX OV1 BLOCK:
SETTING AUX OV1 PICKUP: AND RUN SETTING AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY : AUX OV1 RESET DELAY : Vx < Pickup tPKP tRST
Off=0 SETTING
AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AUX OV1 OP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)

827836A2.CDR
Figure 587: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
5-140
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter for further information. 5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTINGS GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Off SETTING GROUP EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELEsettings menu. The faceplate Settings in Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized LED) is in service.
MENTS
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to "On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the breaker being open. Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time the highest-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups. There is no activate on setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is active. The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications (e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the On state of a particular settings group.
Figure 588: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP
GE Multilin
5-141
5 SETTINGS 5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SELECTOR SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: 7 SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Off SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Restore SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Self-reset SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Synch/Restore
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic. The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The 3-bit control input allows setting the selector to the position defined by a 3-bit word. The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current 3-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; e.g. the 3-bit control input being out of range. SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (Position 1). When using a direct 3-bit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of
5-142
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
UP MODE
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEPis Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to the first (Position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out (Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode). When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input. SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input. SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a 3-bit control input of the selector. The 3-bit control word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 A1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 POSITION rest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the 3-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected position is applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the 3-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Acknowledge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input. The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the 3-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lockout mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the 3-bit control input is inactive; once the 3-bit control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive. SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the 3-bit control input. The pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the 3-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and 3-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
GE Multilin
5-143
5 SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay. When set to Restore, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). When set to Synchronize selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position dictated by the 3-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (i.e., the 3-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). The operation of Synch/Restore mode is similar to the Synchronize mode. The only difference is that after an unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The Synch/Restore mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant (two relay) protection schemes.
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:

EVENT NAME SELECTOR 1 POS Z SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM DESCRIPTION Selector 1 changed its position to Z. The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the time out. The selector position pre-selected via the 3-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time out.
5-144
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The following figures illustrate the operation of the Selector Switch. In these diagrams, T represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3-bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton changed to 7 with a 3-bit input
STEP-UP T T
3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 T T
POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2
STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM

842737A1.CDR
Figure 589: TIME-OUT MODE
GE Multilin
5-145
5 SETTINGS
pre-existing position 2
changed to 4 with a pushbutton
changed to 1 with a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a pushbutton
STEP-UP ACK 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 3BIT ACK POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6
POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM

842736A1.CDR
Figure 590: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE
5-146
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control Setting Groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting groups are to be controlled from both User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 and from an external device via Contact Inputs 1 through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded 3-bit word to the external device and SCADA via output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the 3-bit control input. Make the following changes to Setting Group Control in the SETTINGS
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Enabled SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS
menu:
2" 3"
GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:
SELECTOR 1 POS 4" Off Off
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
Make the following changes to Selector Switch element in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH menu to assign control to User Programmable Pushbutton 1 and Contact Inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4 SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1 SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: CONT IP 2 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: CONT IP 3 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize
ON
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the Selector Switch element by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0" SELECTOR 1 BIT 1" SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"

PRODUCT
Finally, assign configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu: SETUP
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:

SETTINGS SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: SETTINGS SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Off SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
3-bit control in
acknowledge step up
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: RUN
ACTUAL VALUE SELECTOR 1 POSITION
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 1 2 3 4
on
SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR 1 POS 5 5 SELECTOR 1 POS 6 SELECTOR 1 POS 7 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off
7 6
3-bit acknowledge
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM

3-bit position out
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM OR SELECTOR 1 ALARM SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A1.CDR
Figure 591: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-147
5 SETTINGS 5.6.4 TRIP OUTPUT
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
TRIP OUTPUT
TRIP OUTPUT
TRIP MODE: Disabled

MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, 3 Pole Only, 3 Pole & 1 Pole
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1: Off TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-2: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-6: Off TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1: Off TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-2: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-6: Off TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1: Off TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-2: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-6: Off TRIP FORCE 3-POLE: Off TRIP PILOT PRIORITY: 0.000 s BKR A OPEN: Off BKR B OPEN: Off BKR C OPEN: Off TRIP EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element is primarily used to collect trip requests from protection elements and other inputs to generate output operands to initiate trip operations. Three pole trips will only initiate reclosure if programmed to do so, whereas single pole trips will always automatically initiate reclosure. The TRIP 3-POLE and TRIP 1-POLE output operands can also be used as inputs to a FlexLogic OR gate to operate the faceplate TRIP indicator LED. THREE POLE OPERATION: In applications where single pole tripping is not required this element provides a convenient method of collecting inputs to initiate tripping of circuit breakers, the reclose element and breaker failure elements.
5-148
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS SINGLE POLE OPERATION: This element must be used in single pole operation applications.
NOTE
In these applications this element is used to: determine if a single pole operation should be performed collect inputs to initiate three pole tripping, the recloser and breaker failure elements collect inputs to initiate single pole tripping, the recloser and breaker failure elements assign a higher priority to pilot aided scheme outputs than to exclusively local inputs.
This element works in association with other D60 elements (see Chapter 8 for a complete description of single pole operations) that must be programmed and in-service for successful operation. The necessary elements are: Recloser, Breaker Control, Open Pole Detector, and Phase Selector. The recloser must also be in the Reset state before a single pole trip can be issued. Outputs from this element are also directly connected as initiate signals to the breaker failure elements. At least one internal protection element or digital input representing detection of a fault must be available as an input to this element. In pilot-aided scheme applications (DUTT, PUTT, POTT, Hybrid POTT, and Directional Blocking) a timer can be used to delay the output decision until data from a remote terminal is received from communications facilities, to prevent a three pole operation where a single pole operation is permitted. TRIP MODE: This setting is used to select the required mode of operation. If selected to 3 Pole Only outputs for all three phases are always set simultaneously. If selected to 3 Pole & 1 Pole outputs for all three phases are set simultaneously unless the phase selector or a pilot aided scheme determines the fault is single-phase-to-ground. If the fault is identified as being AG, BG or CG only the operands for the faulted phase will be asserted. TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1(6): This setting is used to select an operand representing a fault condition that is not desired to initiate a single pole operation, e.g. phase undervoltage. Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than six inputs are required. TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1(6): Selects an operand representing a fault condition that is desired to initiate a single pole tripand-reclose if the fault is single phase to ground, e.g. distance Zone 1. Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than six inputs are required. The inputs do not have to be phase-specific as the phase selector determines the fault type. The AR FORCE 3-P TRIP operand is asserted by the autorecloser 1.5 cycles after single-pole reclosing is initiated. This operand calls for three-pole trip if any protection element configured under TRIP 1-POLE INPUT is still picked-up. The Open Pole Detector provides blocking inputs to distance elements, and therefore the latter will reset immediately after the TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted. For other protection elements used in single-pole tripping, the user must ensure they will reset immediately after tripping, otherwise the fact that they are still picked up will be detected as an evolving fault and the relay will trip three-poles. For example, if high-set Phase IOC is used (TRIP 1-POLE INPUT X: PHASE IOC1 OP), then OPEN POLE OP A shall be used for blocking Phase A of the IOC element. In this way, after tripping Phase A, the Phase A IOC is forced to reset. Phases B and C are still operational and can detect an evolving fault as soon as 8 ms after tripping Phase A. Neutral and negative-sequence IOCs shall be blocked from the OPEN POLE BLK N operand unless the pickup setting is high enough to prevent pickup during single-pole reclosing. TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1(6): Selects an operand representing a fault condition that is desired to initiate three pole reclosing, e.g. Phase Distance Zone 1. Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than six inputs are required. TRIP FORCE 3-POLE: Selects an operand that will force an input selected for single pole operation to produce a three pole operation. The AR DISABLED FlexLogic operand is the recommended value for this setting. Power system configurations or conditions which require such operations may be considered as well. TRIP PILOT PRIORITY: This setting is used to set an interval equal to the inter-relay channel communications time, plus an appropriate margin, during which outputs are not asserted. This delay permits fault identification information from a remote terminal to be used instead of local data only.
GE Multilin
5-149
5 SETTINGS
SETTING TRIP MODE: Disabled 3 Pole Only 3 Pole and 1 Pole SETTING TRIP FORCE 3-POLE: Off
From Open Pole
OR 3P FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP FORCE 3-POLE
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP

From Recloser
TIMER 2 cycles 0 OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR FORCE 3P TRIP

From Line Pickup Element
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LINE PICKUP OP

From Pilot Aided Schemes
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP 3P PUTT TRIP 3P POTT TRIP 3P HYBRID POTT TRIP 3P DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P SETTINGS TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1: Off OR AND
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-6: Off SETTINGS TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1: Off AND AND
TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-6: Off

From Phase Selector
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P PHASE SELECT VOID

From Phase Selector
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE SELECT AG FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE SELECT BG FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE SELECT CG
From Pilot Aided Schemes
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP A PUTT TRIP A POTT TRIP A HYBRID POTT TRIP A DIR BLOCK TRIP A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP B PUTT TRIP B POTT TRIP B HYBRID POTT TRIP B DIR BLOCK TRIP B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP C PUTT TRIP C POTT TRIP C HYBRID POTT TRIP C DIR BLOCK TRIP C SETTING BKR FA OPEN: Off
From Open Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BKR FA OP SETTING BKR FB OPEN: Off FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BKR FB OP SETTING BKR FC OPEN: Off FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BKR FC OP SETTINGS TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1: Off
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-6: Off
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
SETTING TRIP PILOT PRIORITY: AND
OR
AND
OR
S R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND L TRIP PHASE A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND L TRIP PHASE B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND L S L AND R FLEXLOGIC OPERAND XOR AND TRIP 1-POLE TRIP PHASE C
AND
OR
S R
AND
OR
S R
OR
ONLY 1 OF 3 CAN BE ASSERTED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP 3-POLE
OR
OR
AND
0 20 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE 837025A9.CDR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
Figure 592: TRIP OUTPUT SCHEME LOGIC
5-150
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.5 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SYNCHROCHECK
SYNCHROCHECK 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled
SYNCHROCHECK 1
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Off SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: SRC 1 SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: SRC 2 SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: 10000 V SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: 30 SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: 1.00 Hz SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: LV1 and DV2 SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu SYNCHK1 TARGET: Self-reset SYNCHK1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
Range: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2. The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system. Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference and the frequency difference F (slip frequency). It can be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 at a frequency equal to the frequency difference F. This time can be calculated by: 1 T = ------------------------------360 ----------------- F 2 where: = phase angle difference in degrees; F = frequency difference in Hz.
(EQ 5.19)
GE Multilin
5-151
5 SETTINGS
As an example; for the default values ( = 30, F = 0.1 Hz), the time while the angle between the two voltages will be less than the set value is: 1 1 T = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------ = 1.66 sec. 360 360 ----------------- F ------------------ 0.1 Hz 2 2 30
(EQ 5.20)
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (Dead Source function). SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below). SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the V1 (see NOTES below). SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in kV between the two sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in Hz between the two sources. A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and angle, remain satisfied). SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six options are available: None: LV1 and DV2: DV1 and LV2: DV1 or DV2: DV1 Xor DV2: DV1 and DV2: Dead Source function is disabled Live V1 and Dead V2 Dead V1 and Live V2 Dead V1 or Dead V2 Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live) Dead V1 and Dead V2
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 pu. Below this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized. SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Below this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized. SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized. SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized.
5-152
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION: 1.
The selected Sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same Source) may include both a three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO. V1 OR V2 (SOURCE Y) Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VT Phase VT and Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT V2 OR V1 (SOURCE Z) Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VT Phase VT Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT AUTO-SELECTED COMBINATION SOURCE Y 1 2 3 4 5 Phase Phase Phase Phase Auxiliary SOURCE Z Phase Phase Phase Auxiliary Auxiliary VAB VAB VAB V auxiliary (as set for Source z) V auxiliary (as set for selected sources) AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE
The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two Sources will be used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other Source. If the comparison is required on a specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this "Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions. If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the Sources to be used for synchrocheck. Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE
2.
The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given Source with priorities as established by the configuration of input channels to the Source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if programmed as part of that Source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.
GE Multilin
5-153
5 SETTINGS
SETTING SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Enable=1 Disable=0 SETTING SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Off=0

AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX
SETTING SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: None LV1 and DV2 DV1 and LV2 DV1 or DV2 DV1 Xor DV2 DV1 and DV2
AND AND AND AND AND OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 DEAD S OP SYNC1 DEAD S DPO
SETTING SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: V1 Max

XOR
SETTING SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: V2 Max FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

OR
OR
SYNC1 CLS OP SYNC1 CLS DPO
SETTING SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: V1 Min
AND
SETTING
5
SETTING SYNCHK1 V1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 CALCULATE
Magnitude V1 Angle 1
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: V2 Min
AND
SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF:
Calculate I V1-V2 I=
V ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1: V
Max
AND
Frequency F1
SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF:
Calculate I 1- 2 I= ACTUAL VALUE

SYNC1:
Max SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS:
IN SYNCH 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 SYNC OP SYNC1 SYNC DPO
SETTING SYNCHK1 V2 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 2
CALCULATE
Magnitude V2 Angle 2
Frequency F2
Calculate I F1-F2 I=
F ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1: F
Max
827076AA.CDR
Figure 593: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC
5-154
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.6 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE Range: Disabled, Enabled
AUTORECLOSE
AR FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
AR MODE: 1 & 3 Pole AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: 2 AR BLOCK BKR1: Off AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1: 0.10 s AR BKR MAN CLOSE: Off AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS: 10.00 s AR 1P INIT: Off AR 3P INIT: Off AR 3P TD INIT: Off AR MULTI-P FAULT: Off BKR ONE POLE OPEN: Off BKR 3 POLE OPEN: Off AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: 0.50 s AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: 1.20 s AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: Off AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: 0.50 s AR RESET: Off AR RESET TIME: 60.00 s AR BKR CLOSED: Off AR BLOCK: Off
Range: 1 & 3 Pole, 1 Pole, 3 Pole-A, 3 Pole-B
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: FlexLogic operand Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-155
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS AR PAUSE: Off AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: 5.00 s AR BLOCK BKR2: Off AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: 0.10 s AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: No AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: No AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: Continue AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: Continue AR 1-P DEAD TIME: 1.00 s AR BKR SEQUENCE: 1-2 AR TRANSFER TIME: 4.00 s AR EVENT: Disabled
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 1&2, 12, 21
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
The autoreclose scheme is intended for use on transmission lines with circuit breakers operated in both the single pole and three pole modes, in one or two breaker arrangements. The autoreclose scheme provides four programs with different operating cycles, depending on the fault type. Each of the four programs can be set to trigger up to two reclosing attempts. The second attempt always performs three pole reclosing and has an independent dead time delay. When used in two breaker applications, the reclosing sequence is selectable. The reclose signal can be sent to one selected breaker only, to both breakers simultaneously or to both breakers in sequence (one breaker first and then, after a delay to check that the reclose was successful, to the second breaker). When reclosing in sequence, the first breaker should reclose with either the 1-Pole or 3-Pole dead time according to the fault type and reclose mode; the second breaker should follow the successful reclosure of the first breaker. When reclosing simultaneously, for the first shot both breakers should reclose with either the 1-Pole or 3-Pole dead time, according to the fault type and the reclose mode. The signal used to initiate the autoreclose scheme is the trip output from protection. This signal can be single pole tripping for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multiphase faults. The autoreclose scheme has five operating states, defined below.
STATE Enabled Disabled Reset Reclose In Progress Lockout CHARACTERISTICS Scheme is permitted to operate Scheme is not permitted to operate Scheme is permitted to operate and shot count is reset to 0 Scheme has been initiated but the reclose cycle is not finished (successful or not) Scheme is not permitted to operate until reset received
AR PROGRAMS: The autorecloser provides four programs that can cause one or two reclose attempts (shots). The second reclose will always be three pole. If the maximum number of shots selected is "1" (only one reclose attempt) and the fault is persistent, after the first reclose the scheme will go to Lockout upon another Initiate signal.
5-156
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
For the 3-pole reclose programs (modes 3 and 4), an AR FORCE 3-P FlexLogic operand is set. This operand can be used in connection with the tripping logic to cause a three-pole trip for single-phase faults. Table 519: AUTORECLOSE PROGRAMS
MODE AR MODE FIRST SHOT SINGLE-PHASE FAULT 1 2 3 4 1 & 3 POLE 1 POLE 3 POLE-A 3 POLE-B 1 POLE 1 POLE 3 POLE 3 POLE MULTI-PHASE FAULT 3 POLE LO LO 3 POLE SECOND SHOT SINGLE-PHASE FAULT 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout MULTI-PHASE FAULT 3 POLE or Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout Lockout 3 POLE or Lockout
Mode 1, 1 & 3 Pole: When in this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer for the first shot if the autoreclose is single-phase initiated, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer if the autoreclose is three-phase initiated, and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer if the autoreclose is three-phase time delay initiated. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer is started. Mode 2, 1 Pole: When in this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is three-phase or a three-pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single-pole initiation, the scheme goes to lockout without reclosing. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-pole and starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2. Mode 3, 3 Pole-A: When in this mode the autorecloser is initiated only for single phase faults, although the trip is three pole. The autorecloser uses the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is multi phase the scheme will go to Lockout without reclosing. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase and starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2. Mode 4, 3 Pole-B: When in this mode the autorecloser is initiated for any type of fault and starts the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first shot. If the initiating signal is AR 3P TD INIT the scheme starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 for the first shot. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase and starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
BASIC RECLOSING OPERATION: Reclosing operation is determined primarily by the AR MODE and AR BKR SEQUENCE settings. The reclosing sequences are started by the initiate inputs. A reclose initiate signal will send the scheme into the Reclose In Progress (RIP) state, asserting the "AR RIP" operand. The scheme is latched into the RIP state and resets only when an "AR CLS BKR 1" (autoreclose breaker 1) or "AR CLS BKR 2" (autoreclose breaker 2) operand is generated or the scheme goes to the Lockout state. The dead time for the initial reclose operation will be determined by either the AR 1-P DEAD TIME, AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1, or AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 setting, depending on the fault type and the mode selected. After the dead time interval the scheme will assert the "AR CLOSE BKR 1" or "AR CLOSE BKR 2" operands, as determined by the sequence selected. These operands are latched until the breaker closes or the scheme goes to Reset or Lockout. There are three initiate programs: single pole initiate, three pole initiate and three pole, time delay initiate. Any of these reclose initiate signals will start the reclose cycle and set the "Reclose in progress" (AR RIP) operand. The reclose in progress operand is sealed-in until the Lockout or Reset signal appears. The three-pole initiate and three-pole time delay initiate signals are latched until the "Close Bkr1 or Bkr2" or Lockout or Reset signal appears. AR PAUSE: The pause input offers the possibility of freezing the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This may be done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. The pause signal blocks all three dead timers. When the pause signal disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed by initiating the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2. This feature can be also used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable until the transformer is removed from the line. In this case, the reclose scheme is paused until the transformer is disconnected. The AR PAUSE input will force a three-pole trip through the 3-P DEADTIME 2 path.
GE Multilin
5-157
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS EVOLVING FAULTS:
5 SETTINGS
1.25 cycles after the single pole dead time has been initiated, the AR FORCE 3P TRIP operand is set and it will be reset only when the scheme is reset or goes to Lockout. This will ensure that when a fault on one phase evolves to include another phase during the single pole dead time of the auto-recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose. RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER: Permanent Fault: Consider Mode 1, which calls for 1-Pole or 3-Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3-Pole Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure, and assume a permanent fault on the line. Also assume the scheme is in the Reset state. For the first single-phase fault the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer will be started, while for the first multi-phase fault the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer will be started. If the AR 3P TD INIT signal is high, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 will be started for the first shot. If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to 1, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the Lockout state. If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to 2, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. After the second reclose the shot counter is set to 2. Upon reclosing, the fault is again detected by protection, the breaker is tripped three-pole, and reclose is initiated again. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the lockout state. Transient Fault: When a reclose output signal is sent to close the breaker the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breaker is closed) the reset timer will time out returning the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to "0" making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR TWO BREAKERS: Permanent Fault: The general method of operation is the same as that outlined for the one breaker applications except for the following description, which assumes AR BKR SEQUENCE is 1-2 (reclose Breaker 1 before Breaker 2) The signal output from the dead time timers passes through the breaker selection logic to initiate reclosing of Breaker 1. The Close Breaker 1 signal will initiate the Transfer Timer. After the reclose of the first breaker the fault is again detected by the protection, the breaker is tripped three pole and the autoreclose scheme is initiated. The Initiate signal will stop the transfer timer. After the 3-P dead time times out the Close Breaker 1 signal will close first breaker again and will start the transfer timer. Since the fault is permanent the protection will trip again initiating the autoreclose scheme that will be sent to Lockout by the SHOT COUNT = MAX signal. Transient Fault: When the first reclose output signal is sent to close Breaker 1, the reset timer is started. The close Breaker 1 signal initiates the transfer timer that times out and sends the close signal to the second breaker. If the reclosure sequence is successful (both breakers closed and there is no initiating signal) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to 0. The scheme will be ready for a new reclose cycle.
AR BKR1(2) RECLS FAIL: If the selected sequence is 12 or 21 and after the first or second reclose attempt the breaker fails to close, there are two options. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to Lockout, the scheme will go to lockout state. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to Continue, the reclose process will continue with Breaker 2. At the same time the shot counter will be decreased (since the closing process was not completed). SCHEME RESET AFTER RECLOSURE: When a reclose output signal is sent to close either breaker 1 or 2 the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breakers are closed) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to the reset state, with the shot counter set to 0, making it ready for a new reclose cycle. In two breaker schemes, if one breaker is in the Out of Service state and the other is closed at the end of the reset time, the scheme will also reset. If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the Out of Service state, is open the scheme will be sent to Lockout. The reset timer is stopped if the reclosure sequence is not successful: an initiating signal present or the scheme is in Lockout state. The reset timer is also stopped if the breaker is manually closed or the scheme is otherwise reset from lockout.
5-158
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS LOCKOUT:
When a reclose sequence is started by an initiate signal the scheme moves into the Reclose In Progress state and starts the Incomplete Sequence Timer. The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires, the scheme goes to "Lockout". There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state, as shown below: Receipt of "Block" input while in the Reclose in Progress state The reclosing program logic: when a 3P Initiate is present and the autoreclose mode is either 1 Pole or 3Pole-A (3 pole autoreclose for single pole faults only) Initiation of the scheme when the count is at the maximum allowed If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the Out of Service state, is open the scheme will be sent to Lockout. The scheme will be also sent to Lockout if one breaker fails to reclose and the setting AR BKR FAIL OPTION is set to "Lockout".
Once the Lockout state is set it will be latched until one or more of the following occurs: The scheme is intentionally reset from Lockout, employing the Reset setting of the Autorecloser;
CLOSE
The Breaker(s) is(are) manually closed from panel switch, SCADA or other remote control through the AR BRK MAN setting;
10 second after breaker control detects that breaker(s) were closed.
BREAKER OPEN BEFORE FAULT: A logic circuit is provided that inhibits the Close Breaker 1(2) output if a reclose initiate (RIP) indicator is not present within 30 ms of the Breaker any phase open input. This feature is intended to prevent reclosing if one of the breakers was open in advance of a reclose initiate input to the recloser. This logic circuit resets when the breaker is closed. TRANSFER RECLOSE WHEN BREAKER IS BLOCKED: 1. When the reclosing sequence 1-2 is selected and Breaker 1 is blocked (AR BKR1 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal can be transferred direct to the Breaker 2 if AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 is set to Yes. If set to No, the scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer. When the reclosing sequence 2-1 is selected and Breaker 2 is blocked (AR BKR2 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal can be transferred direct to the Breaker 1 if AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 is set to Yes. If set to No the scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
2.
FORCE 3-POLE TRIPPING: The reclosing scheme contains logic that is used to signal trip logic that three-pole tripping is required for certain conditions. This signal is activated by any of the following: Autoreclose scheme is paused after it was initiated. Autoreclose scheme is in the Lockout state. Autoreclose mode is programmed for three-pole operation The shot counter is not at 0, i.e. the scheme is not in the reset state. This ensures a second trip will be three-pole when reclosing onto a permanent single phase fault. 1.25 cycles after the single-pole reclose is initiated by the AR 1P INIT signal.
ZONE 1 EXTENT: The Zone 1 extension philosophy here is to apply an overreaching zone permanently as long as the relay is ready to reclose, and reduce the reach when reclosing. Another Zone 1 extension approach is to operate normally from an underreaching zone, and use an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. This philosophy could be programmed via the Line Pickup scheme. The Extended Zone 1" is 0 when the AR is in LO or Disabled and 1 when the AR is in Reset. 1. 2. When "Extended Zone 1" is 0, the distance functions shall be set to normal underreach Zone 1 setting. When "Extended Zone 1" is 1, the distance functions may be set to Extended Zone 1 Reach, which is an overreaching setting.
GE Multilin
5-159
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 3.
5 SETTINGS
During a reclose cycle, "Extended Zone 1" goes to 0 as soon as the first CLOSE BREAKER signal is issued (AR SHOT
COUNT > 0) and remains 0 until the recloser goes back to Reset.
USE OF SETTINGS: AR MODE: This setting selects the AR operating mode, which functions in conjunction with signals received at the initiation inputs as described previously. AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclosure goes to Lockout when the fault is permanent. AR BLOCK BKR1: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 1. This condition can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic. AR CLOSE TIME BKR1:This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 1 from the moment the Close command is sent to the moment the contacts are closed. AR BKR MAN CLOSE: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that represents manual close command to a breaker associated with the autoreclose scheme AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS: The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after an associated circuit breaker is manually commanded to close, preventing reclosing onto an existing fault such as grounds on the line. This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after manual closing. If the autoreclose scheme is not initiated after a manual close and this time expires the autoreclose scheme is set to the Reset state. AR 1P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate single Pole autoreclosure. AR 3P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate three Pole autoreclosure, first timer (AR 3P DEAD TIME 1) that can be used for a high-speed autoreclosure. AR 3P TD INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that is intended to initiate three Pole autoreclosure, second timer (AR 3P DEAD TIME 2) that can be used for a time-delay autoreclosure. AR MULTI-P FAULT: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that indicates a multi-phase fault. The operand value should be zero for single-phase to ground faults. BKR ONE POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened correctly following a single phase to ground fault and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the single pole dead time (for 1-2 reclose sequence for example, Breaker 1 should trip single pole and Breaker 2 should trip 3 pole). The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker(s) status. BKR 3 POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened three pole and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the three pole dead time. The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker(s) status. AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: This is the dead time following the first three pole trip. This intentional delay can be used for a high-speed three-pole autoreclose. However, it should be set longer than the estimated de-ionizing time following the three-pole trip. AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: This is the dead time following the second three-pole trip or initiated by the AR 3P TD INIT input. This intentional delay is typically used for a time delayed three-pole autoreclose (as opposed to high speed three-pole autoreclose). AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. Typically this is the operand set when the communication channel is out of service AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: This timer is used to set the length of the dead time 1 extension for possible nonsimultaneous tripping of the two ends of the line. AR RESET: This setting selects the operand that forces the autoreclose scheme from any state to Reset. Typically this is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote. AR RESET TIME: A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is based on the breaker time which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.
5-160
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
AR BKR CLOSED: This setting selects an operand that indicates that the breaker(s) are closed at the end of the reset time and the scheme can reset. AR BLOCK: This setting selects the operand that blocks the Autoreclose scheme (it can be a sum of conditions such as: Time Delayed Tripping, Breaker Failure, Bus Differential Protection, etc.). If the block signal is present before autoreclose scheme initiation the AR DISABLED FlexLogic operand will be set. If the block signal occurs when the scheme is in the RIP state the scheme will be sent to Lockout. AR PAUSE: The pause input offers the ability to freeze the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This may be done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. When the "pause" signal disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed. This feature can also be used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable until the it is disconnected from the line. In this situation, the reclose scheme is "paused" until the transformer is disconnected. AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It is started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active until the CLOSE BKR1 or CLOSE BKR2 signal is sent. If all conditions allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to Lockout. The minimum permissible setting is established by the 3-P Dead Time 2 timer setting. Settings beyond this will determine the wait time for the breaker to open so that the reclose cycle can continue and/or for the AR PAUSE signal to reset and allow the reclose cycle to continue and/or for the AR BKR1(2) BLK signal to disappear and allow the AR CLOSE BKR1(2) signal to be sent. AR BLOCK BKR2: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 2. This condition can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic. AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 2 from the moment the Close command is sent to the moment the contacts are closed. AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2 and Breaker 1 is blocked. When set to Yes the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 2 without waiting the transfer time. When set to No the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR1 BLK signal and the scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer. AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1 and Breaker 2 is blocked. When set to Yes the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 1 without waiting the transfer time. When set to No, the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR2 BLK signal and the scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer. AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 12 and Breaker 1 has failed to close. When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 2 which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to Lockout). When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 2. AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 21 and Breaker 2 has failed to close. When set to Continue the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 1 which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to Lockout). When set to Lockout the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 1. AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Set this intentional delay longer than the estimated de-ionizing time after the first single-pole trip. AR BREAKER SEQUENCE: This setting selects the breakers reclose sequence: Select 1 for reclose breaker 1 only, 2 for reclose breaker 2 only, 1&2 for reclose both breakers simultaneously, 1-2 for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 1 first, and 2-1 for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 2 first. AR TRANSFER TIME: The transfer time is used only for breaker closing sequence 1-2 or 2-1, when the two breakers are reclosed sequentially. The transfer timer is initiated by a close signal to the first breaker. The transfer timer transfers the reclose signal from the breaker selected to close first to the second breaker. The time delay setting is based on the maximum time interval between the autoreclose signal and the protection trip contact closure assuming a permanent fault (unsuccessful reclose). Therefore, the minimum setting is equal to the maximum breaker closing time plus the maximum line protection operating time plus a suitable margin. This setting will prevent the autoreclose scheme from transferring the close signal to the second breaker unless a successful reclose of the first breaker occurs.
GE Multilin
5-161
SETTING
NOTE
AR FUNCTION:
D60 Relay Only From Trip Output
From sheet 3
From Sheet 2
From Sheet 3
5-162
AND AR ENABLED OR
AR INITIATE
Enable=1
Disable=0
D60, L90 Relay Only
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR DISABLED
LINE PICKUP OP
SETTING
AR BLOCK:
(To page 2, Reset AR TRANSFER TIMER)
S Latch
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR RIP
S Latch R
0
SETTING SETTING AND

(Evolving fault)
R
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS : 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LO SETTING OR OR AND 0 SETTING AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: OR 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR 3-P/1 RIP SETTING Off = 0 AR 1-P DEAD TIME: AR EXTEND DEAD TIME 1: SETTING AND AR 1-P RIP
1.25 cycle
To: AR FORCE 3P TRIP
Off = 0
BKR MANUAL CLOSE:
OR
(From sheet 3)
SETTING
AR 1P INIT:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
TRIP 1-POLE
SETTING
AND
OR
AR 3P INIT:
Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE

R
AND
Latch
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: OR AND 0
SETTING OR
AR 3P TD INIT:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING OR CLOSE (to page 2)
BKR ONE POLE OPEN:
Off = 0
OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR 3-P/2 RIP SETTING AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: OR
SETTING
BKR 3 POLE OPEN:
Off = 0
OR
S Latch R
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
For correct operation of the autoreclose scheme, the Breaker Control feature must be enabled and configured properly. When the breaker reclose sequence is 1-2 or 2-1 the breaker that will reclose second in sequence (Breaker 2 for sequence 1-2 and Breaker 1 for sequence 2-1) must be configured to trip threepole for any type of fault.
Figure 594: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 3)

OR
OR AND 0

OR
RESET CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR SHOT COUNT>0
SETTING
AND
BKR FAIL TO RECLS (from sheet 2)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR INCOMPLETE SEQ 827089AH.CDR AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR PAUSE
Off = 0
SHOT COUNT = MAX
SETTING
AR M0DE: AND OR SETTING AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIMER: OR AND AND 0 5ms OR OR 0 OR
1 Pole
AR LO
3 Pole - A 3 Pole -B
1 & 3 Pole
D60 Relay Only From Phase Selector
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
SETTING
AND RESET (to sheet 2) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR

Evolving fault AR DISABLED
AR MULTI-P FAULT:
Off = 0
SETTING
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AR RESET: OR AND
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
5 SETTINGS
BKR CLOSED
10s
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
30ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
5 SETTINGS
BREAKER 1 OPEN
AND OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR BKR 1 BLK
AND
0
BKR 1 MNL OPEN
TO SHEET 3
SETTING
AR BLOCK BKR 1:
OR
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
SETTING
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
No = 0
AND
AND S
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING R
Latch
AR CLOSE BKR 1
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:
AND LO AND OR AND AND LO OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 CLOSED From bkr control ACTUAL VALUES SETTING AR MAX NO OF SHOTS: OR OR OR Increm Shot Counter Sh=2 AR SHOT COUNT: 0 (1,2) OR
Continue=0
SETTING AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1:
To sheet 3
AND 2ms
SETTING
AR BKR SEQUENCE:
1&2
1-2
2-1
AND OR
AND
Decrem Shot Counter Reset Count
Sh=1 Sh=0 Sh=Max
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR SHOT CNT>0 SHOT COUNT=MAX CLOSE BKR 1 OR BKR 2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RIP OR AR TRANSFER TIME:
OR AND S Latch OR R
AND 0ms AND OR
SETTING OR BKR FAIL TO RECLS (To LO) TO SHEET 1
FROM SHEET 1
AR INITIATE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO
RESET
CLOSE
SETTING AND

LO

AND
AND AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR BKR 2 BLK
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1:
No = 0
S Latch R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 2
SETTING
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:
LO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 CLOSED From bkr control OR
SETTING AR CLOSE TIME BKR 2:
Continue=0
AND 2ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
SETTING
AR BLOCK BKR 2:
OR
BKR CLOSED (from page 3)

OR SETTING AR RESET TIME: OR AND
Off=0 30ms
827090AA.CDR
AND AND 0 OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR RESET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
AND OR
AND
0
SETTING
AR BKR CLOSED:
Off=0
RESET TO SHEET 3
BKR 2 MNL OPEN
(From Sheet 1)
5-163
5 SETTINGS
From sheet 2 From Breaker Control Scheme
From sheet 2
5
From Breaker Control Scheme
BKR 1 MNL OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 OOS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 OOS BKR 2 MNL OPEN 1 2 1&2 1-2 2-1 OR OR
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 MNL CLS OR BKR MANUAL CLOSE (To sheet 1) AND
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 MNL CLS AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 CLOSED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AND
AND
AND OR OR
BKR CLOSED (To sheet 1 and 2)
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 OPEN
AND
AND OR OR BKR 3 POLE OPEN (To sheet 1)
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN (To sheet 1)
AND
OR
AND
827833A9.CDR
5-164
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
1ST SHOT T PROT T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET T R I P 2ND SHOT R E S E T 1-P DEAD TIME 1.25 cycle T CLOSE BKR1 T CLOSE BKR1 RESET TIME T TRIP BKR T PROT 3-P/2 DEAD TIME T PROT RESET TRANSFER TIME T CLOSE BKR2 842703A4.CDR
5 SETTINGS
F A U L T
AR 1P INIT
PREFAULT
AR RIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
CLOSE
AR CLOSE BKR1
AR RESET TIME
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
Figure 597: EXAMPLE RECLOSING SEQUENCE
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AR 3P INIT
AR 3P/2 RIP
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AR CLOSE BKR2
AR TRANSFER TIME
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIME
5-165
5 SETTINGS 5.6.7 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(16) Range: Disabled, Enabled
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Dig Element 1 DIG ELEM Off DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM Off 1 INPUT: 1 PICKUP 0.000 s 1 RESET 0.000 s 1 BLOCK:
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the Digital Element. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0". DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to 0.
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 INPUT: Off = 0 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 NAME: RUN INPUT = 1
SETTINGS DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 PICKUP DELAY: DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIG ELEM 01 DPO DIG ELEM 01 PKP DIG ELEM 01 OP
827042A1.VSD
Figure 598: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS: Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts. The Voltage Monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A). As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the FlexLogic operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic operand "Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted.
5-166
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the breaker position.
DC+ UR Relay - Form-A H1a
I = Current Monitor
I H1b V
V = Voltage Monitor
H1c 52a
Trip Coil
827073A1.vsd
DC
Figure 599: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1 Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g. Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. Cont Ip 1" and will be set ON when the breaker is closed. Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be: DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Bkr Trip Cct Out DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Cont Op 1 VOff DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: 1 PICKUP 0.200 s 1 RESET 0.100 s
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Cont Ip 1 Off DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT EVENTS: Enabled 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-167
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
5 SETTINGS
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the figure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off. In this case, the settings will be: DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Bkr Trip Cct Out DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Cont Op 1 VOff DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM Off 1 PICKUP 0.200 s 1 RESET 0.100 s 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT EVENTS: Enabled 1
MESSAGE
DC+ UR Relay - Form-A H1a

I = Current Monitor
Table 520: VALUES OF RESISTOR R

POWER SUPPLY (V DC) 24 30 48 RESISTANCE (OHMS) 1000 5000 10000 25000 25000 50000 POWER (WATTS) 2 2 2 5 5 5
I H1b V
V = Voltage Monitor
H1c 52a
R
By-pass Resistor
110 125 250
Trip Coil
827074A1.vsd
DC
Figure 5100: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2
5-168
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
COUNTER 1(8) Range: Disabled, Enabled
COUNTER 1
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 NAME: Counter 1 COUNTER 1 UNITS: COUNTER 1 PRESET: 0 COUNTER 1 COMPARE: 0 COUNTER 1 UP: Off COUNTER 1 DOWN: Off COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Off CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Off COUNTER 1 RESET: Off COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Off COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Off
MESSAGE
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: FlexLogic operand Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter. COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label will appear in the corresponding Actual Values status. COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running. COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set value. COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to 2,147,483,648. COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to +2,147,483,647. COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.
GE Multilin
5-169
5 SETTINGS
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will be set to the preset value in the following situations: 1. 2. 3. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
PRESET
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either 0 or the preset value depending on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand. COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0. COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTING
COUNTER 1 UP: Off = 0
AND
SETTINGS COUNTER 1 NAME: COUNTER 1 UNITS: COUNTER 1 PRESET: RUN
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Count more than Comp. Count equal to Comp. Count less than Comp.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Off = 0 CALCULATE VALUE
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS COUNTER 1 HI COUNTER 1 EQL COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE SET TO ZERO
SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
AND AND OR
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 FROZEN: STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNTER 1 RESET: Off = 0
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Off = 0
Figure 5101: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC
5-170
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.9 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS
MONITORING ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 ARCING CURRENT BREAKER 2 ARCING CURRENT VT FUSE FAILURE 1 VT FUSE FAILURE 2 OPEN POLE
See below. See below. See page 5173. See page 5173. See page 5174.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS BREAKER 1(2) ARCING CURRENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
BREAKER 1 ARCING CURRENT

MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP FUNCTION: Disabled BKR 1 ARC AMP SOURCE: SRC 1 BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT: Off BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY: 0.000 s BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: 1000 kA2-cyc BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK: Off BKR 1 ARC AMP TARGET: Self-reset BKR 1 ARC AMP EVENTS: Disabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
5
Range: FlexLogic operand Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are 2 identical Breaker Arcing Current features available for Breakers 1 and 2. This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand to 1. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value. The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period. BKR 1(2) ARC AMP INIT: Selects the same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to trip the breaker.
GE Multilin
5-171
5 SETTINGS
BKR 1(2) ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current. BKR 1(2) ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.
Breaker Contacts Part
Initiate
Arc Extinguished
Total Area = Breaker Arcing Current (kAcycle)
Programmable Start Delay
100 ms Stop Integration
Start Integration
Figure 5102: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT
SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1

OR AND
SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP DELAY:

0
100 ms
0
SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP INIT: Off=0 SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP SOURCE: IA IB IC COMMAND CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS: NO=0 YES=1
RUN AND
Add to Accumulator
SETTING BREAKER 1 ARCING AMP LIMIT: KA * Cycle Limit

2
Integrate Integrate Integrate
IA 2 -Cycle IB 2 -Cycle IC -Cycle

2
Select Highest Value
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR1 ARC OP
Set All To Zero
ACTUAL VALUE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A BKR 1 ARCING AMP B BKR 1 ARCING AMP C
827071A2.CDR
Figure 5103: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC
5-172
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) VT FUSE FAILURE

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS
VT FUSE FAILURE 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
VT FUSE FAILURE FUNCTION: Disabled
Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme. The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current. There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur: Class A: Loss of one or two phases. Class B: Loss of all three phases. Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of Class A failures is a significant level of negative sequence voltage, whereas an indication of Class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears. An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels. The VT FUSE FAILURE FUNCTION setting enables/disables the fuse failure feature for each source.
AND OR SETTING VT FUSE FAILURE FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SOURCE 1 V_2 RUN V_1 RUN I_1 RUN V_1 < 0.7 p.u. RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC1 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP D60 only AND OR AND I_1 < 0.05 p.u. AND 2 CYCLES 20 CYCLES AND I_1 > 0.075 p.u. V_1 < 0.05 p.u. AND COMPARATORS RUN V_2 > 0.25 p.u. OR OR AND AND
Reset-dominant SET LATCH RESET FAULT
FUSE FAIL
SET
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LATCH SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
RESET Reset-dominant FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS

827093AG.CDR
Figure 5104: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-173
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS d) OPEN POLE DETECTOR

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS OPEN POLE Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 SETTINGS
OPEN POLE
OPEN POLE FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
OPEN POLE BLOCK: Off OPEN POLE VOLTAGE SUPV: Disabled OPEN POLE CURRENT PKP: 0.050 pu OPEN POLE TARGET: Self-Reset OPEN POLE EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The open pole detector is intended to identify an open pole of the line circuit breaker. The scheme monitors the breakers auxiliary contacts, current in the circuit and optionally voltage on the line. The scheme generates output operands used to block the phase selector and some specific protection elements, thus preventing maloperation during the dead time of a single pole autoreclose cycle or any other open pole conditions. The scheme declares an open pole at the moment a single-pole trip is issued. In two breaker and breaker and a half applications, an open pole condition is declared when:
both breakers have an open pole on the same phase or the current on the line drops below a threshold or the current and voltage on the line drop below a threshold.
DISTANCE
SOURCE
DISTANCE The Open Pole feature uses signals defined by the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) setting. Voltage supervision can be used only with wye VTs on the line side of the breaker(s).
The OPEN POLE CURRENT PICKUP setting establishes the current threshold below which an open pole is declared. For convenience, the position of the breaker poles defined in the Breaker Control feature and available as FlexLogic operand BREAKER 1/2 A CLSD through BREAKER 1/2 C CLSD and BREAKER 1/2 OOS are used by the Open Pole feature. For correct operation of the Open Pole Detector, the Breaker Control, Trip Output, and Single Pole Autoreclose features must be enabled and configured properly. When used in configuration with only one breaker, the BREAKER 2 FUNCTION should be Enabled and the BREAKER 2 OUT OF SV setting should be On (see the Breaker Control section earlier in this Chapter for additional details).
5-174
GE Multilin
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
OPEN POLE BKR C OP 837024AA.CDR
From Breaker Control Logic
BREAKER 2 B CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 C CLSD OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
To Trip Output Scheme
GE Multilin
AND SETTING OPEN POLE CURRENT PKP: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP PHASE A IA < PKP IB < PKP IC < PKP AND AND OR AND 0 0 0.5 cycle 20 ms FLEXLOGIC OPERAND XOR OPEN POLE BLK N FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP PHASE B 0 OR AND AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND VAG > 0.7 pu TRIP PHASE C 0 OR AND OR AND VBG > 0.7 pu VCG > 0.7 pu 0.5 cycle AND 0 20 ms RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP C 0.5 cycle AND 0 20 ms AND
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
OPEN POLE FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
OPEN POLE BLOCK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
From Trip Output
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP B
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE SUPV:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
DISTANCE SOURCE:
IA
IB
IC VAG
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BLK AB FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR OPEN POLE BLK BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR OPEN POLE BLK CA FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR OPEN POLE OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VBG
VCG
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
Figure 5105: OPEN POLE DETECTOR LOGIC

OR OR OR
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE BKR A OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BKR B OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 A CLSD
5-175
5 SETTINGS 5.6.10 PILOT SCHEMES
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES
PILOT SCHEMES
DUTT SCHEME PUTT SCHEME POTT SCHEME HYBRID POTT SCHEME BLOCKING SCHEME
See below. See page 5178. See page 5180. See page 5183. See page 5187.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This menu allows the selection and the setting up (see the following sub-menus) of a protection signaling scheme. See also, the section on Protection Signaling Schemes in the Chapter 9: Application of Settings. b) DIRECT UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (DUTT)
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES DUTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled
DUTT SCHEME
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
DUTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled DUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.010 s DUTT NO OF COMM BITS: 1 DUTT RX1: Off DUTT RX2: Off DUTT RX3: Off DUTT RX4: Off DUTT SCHEME TARGET: Self-Reset DUTT SCHEME EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal(s) to the remote end(s), where on receipt, the DUTT pilot scheme operates without additional protection supervision. For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 1 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured, and set per rules of distance relaying. In single-pole tripping applications, the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector together with information received from the remote terminal(s). The latter may be coded into one, two or four bits over the communications channel. The scheme generates output operands (DUTT TX1 through DUTT TX4) that are used to transmit the direct under-reaching signals to the remote end(s). Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface.
5-176
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
To make the scheme a fully operational stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction with the Trip Output, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail, and single-pole autoreclose actions. DUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic operand (DUTT OP) is produced according to the DUTT scheme logic. A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels such as a power line carrier. The DUTT SEAL-IN DELAY is a minimum guaranteed duration of the DUTT OP pulse. As this operand activates the Trip Table of the DUTT scheme, the trip operands DUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time. DUTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits available on the communications channel. With only one bit available, the scheme sends the direct under-reaching transfer trip command on bit no.1 (DUTT TX1 operand) and responds to the direct trip command received on bit no. 1 (DUTT RX1 setting). The scheme uses only local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector to assert the output operands DUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P (see Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for details on the use of communication channels). DUTT RX1 through DUTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic operands that represent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. The DUTT scheme requires a secure and dependable signaling system. For this reason, a series/parallel combination of receive signal "contacts" is often used. This is accomplished by using a multi-bit communications system to transmit redundant copies of the TX signal (often via different paths) and building appropriate security logic (such as series (AND gate) or 2-out-of-3 voting logic) with FlexLogic. The DUTT RX1(4) settings should be associated with the final (secure) TX signals. In single-bit applications, DUTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, DUTT RX1 and DUTT RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications, DUTT RX1, DUTT RX2, DUTT RX3, and DUTT RX4 must be used. In multi-terminal applications, the RX signals from two or more remote terminals should be connected through OR gates in the FlexLogic and the resulting signals should be configured as the DUTT RX inputs.
SETTING DUTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP SETTINGS DUTT NO OF COMM BITS: DUTT RX1: Off = 0 DUTT RX2: Off = 0 DUTT RX3: Off = 0 DUTT RX4: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP Phase Selector RX TRIP TABLE OR DUTT NO OF COMM BITS: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TRIP A DUTT TRIP B DUTT TRIP C DUTT TRIP 3P 837012AA.CDR AND SETTINGS DUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR Phase Selector TRANSMIT TABLE AND DUTT NO OF COMM BITS: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DUTT TX1 DUTT TX2 DUTT TX3 DUTT TX4
t RST
DUTT OP
Figure 5106: DUTT SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-177
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS c) PERMISSIVE UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT)

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES PUTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 SETTINGS
PUTT SCHEME
PUTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s PUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.010 s PUTT NO OF COMM BITS: 1 PUTT RX1: Off PUTT RX2: Off PUTT RX3: Off PUTT RX4: Off PUTT SCHEME TARGET: Self-Reset PUTT SCHEME EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal(s) to the remote terminal(s) where it is supervised by an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element. For proper operation, the Zone 1 and 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured, and set per rules of distance relaying. In single-pole tripping applications, the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector together with information received from the remote terminal(s). The scheme generates output operands (PUTT TX1 through PUTT TX4) that are used to transmit the signal to the remote end(s). Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/ outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface. To make the scheme a fully operational stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail and single-pole autoreclose actions. PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals. This delay should be set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the zone 1 pickup. The selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme. PUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic operand (PUTT OP) is produced according to the PUTT scheme logic. A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels such as a power line carrier. The PUTT SEAL-IN DELAY is a minimum guaranteed duration of the PUTT OP pulse. As this operand activates the trip table of the PUTT scheme, the trip operands PUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time. PUTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for the scheme. The transmit codes and trip table of the PUTT scheme are identical as those for the direct under-reaching transfer trip scheme. Please refer to Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more information. PUTT RX1 through PUTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic operands that represent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In single-bit applications, PUTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, PUTT RX1 and PUTT RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications, PUTT RX1, PUTT RX2, PUTT RX3, and PUTT RX4 must be used. In multi-terminal applications, the RX signals from
5-178
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
two or more remote terminals should be connected through OR gates in the FlexLogic and the resulting signals should be configured as the PUTT RX inputs.
SETTING PUTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTINGS PUTT NO OF COMM BITS: PUTT RX1: Off = 0 PUTT RX2: Off = 0 PUTT RX3: Off = 0 PUTT RX4: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z2 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP OR PUTT NO OF COMM BITS: RUN RX Phase Selector TRIP TABLE FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PUTT TRIP A PUTT TRIP B PUTT TRIP C PUTT TRIP 3P OR AND SETTINGS PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY: SETTINGS 0 AND PUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
tPKP
t RST
PUTT OP
5
PUTT NO OF COMM BITS: OR AND RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PUTT TX1 Phase Selector TRANSMIT TABLE PUTT TX2 PUTT TX3 PUTT TX4 837013AA.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP
Figure 5107: PUTT SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-179
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS d) PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT)

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES POTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled
5 SETTINGS
POTT SCHEME
POTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: Disabled POTT ECHO COND: Off POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: 0.020 s TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: 0.090 s ECHO DURATION: 0.100 s ECHO LOCKOUT: 0.250 s LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: 0.050 s POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.010 s GND DIR O/C FWD: Off POTT NO OF COMM BITS: 1 POTT RX1: Off POTT RX2: Off POTT RX3: Off POTT RX4: Off POTT SCHEME TARGET: Self-Reset POTT SCHEME EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled, Custom
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This scheme is intended for two-terminal line applications only. The scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both terminals of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This provides increased coverage for high-resistance faults. For proper operation, the Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-end-open/weakinfeed conditions. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accordingly.
5-180
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
In single-pole tripping applications, the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector together with information received from the remote terminal. The scheme generates output operands (POTT TX1 through POTT TX4) that are used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface. To make the scheme fully operational as a stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail, and singlepole autoreclose actions. POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: If this setting is set to Enabled, the scheme sends a permissive echo signal to the remote end(s) using a pre-programmed logic (see the following logic diagram). If set to Custom, the echo signal is sent if a condition selected via the POTT ECHO COND setting is satisfied. The echo is sent only once and then the logic locks out for the time specified by the ECHO LOCKOUT. The duration of the echo pulse is settable as ECHO DURATION. Operation of the overreaching protection elements (Distance Zone 2 or GND DIR O/C FWD setting) inhibits the echo.
SIVE ECHO
POTT ECHO COND: This setting specifies a user-selected echo condition and applies only if the HYB POTT PERMISis set to Custom.
POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals. The delay should be set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the Zone 2 pickup. The selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme. TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT scheme for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function (if used) to current reversal conditions. The transient blocking mechanism applies to the ground overcurrent path only as the reach settings for the Zone 2 distance functions is not expected to be long for two-terminal applications, and the security of the distance functions is not endangered by the current reversal conditions. Upon receiving the POTT RX signal, the transient blocking mechanism allows the RX signal to be passed and aligned with the GND DIR O/C FWD indication only for a period of time set by TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY. After that the ground directional overcurrent path will be virtually disabled for a period of time specified as TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY. The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should be long enough to give the selected ground directional overcurrent function time to operate, but not longer than the fastest possible operation time of the protection system that can create current reversal conditions within the reach of the selected ground directional overcurrent function. This setting should take into account the POTT RX PICKUP DELAY. The POTT RX signal is shaped for aligning with the ground directional indication as follows: the original RX signal is delayed by the POTT RX PICKUP DELAY, then terminated at TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY after the pickup of the original POTT TX signal, and eventually locked-out for TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY.
TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT scheme for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function (if used) to current reversal conditions (see the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY). This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions including not only current reversals but also spurious negative- and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker operations. The breaker failure time of the surrounding protection systems within the reach of the ground directional function used by the POTT scheme may be considered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized during delayed breaker operations. ECHO DURATION: This setting defines the guaranteed and exact duration of the echo pulse. The duration does not depend on the duration and shape of the received RX signal. This setting enables the relay to avoid a permanent lockup of the transmit/receive loop. ECHO LOCKOUT: This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse. LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines the pickup value for validation of the line end open conditions as detected by the Line Pickup logic through the LINE PICKUP LEO PKP FlexLogic operand. The validated line end open condition is a requirement for the POTT scheme to return a received echo signal (if the echo feature is enabled). This value should take into account the principle of operation and settings of the Line Pickup element. POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic operand (POTT OP) is produced according to the POTT scheme logic. A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels. The POTT SEAL-IN DELAY
GE Multilin
5-181
5 SETTINGS
defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the POTT OP pulse. As this operand activates the trip table of the POTT scheme, the trip operands POTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time. GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting defines the FlexLogic operand (if any) of a protection element that is used in addition to the Zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for keying the communication channel and initiating operation of the scheme. Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C FWD. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O/C FWD allowing the user to combine responses of various protection elements, or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional Overcurrent or Neutral Directional Overcurrent. Both of these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD). POTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for the scheme. The transmit codes and Trip Tables of the POTT scheme are the same as those for the permissive underreaching transfer trip scheme. Please refer to the description of the PUTT scheme for more information. POTT RX1 through POTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic operands that represent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In single-bit applications, POTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, POTT RX1 and POTT RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications, POTT RX1, POTT RX2, POTT RX3, and POTT RX4 must be used.
SETTING POTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AND OR SETTINGS POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: AND OR 0 AND
PH DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z2 PKP SETTING GND DIR O/C FWD: Off = 0 SETTINGS POTT NO OF COMM BITS: POTT RX1: Off = 0 POTT RX2: Off = 0 POTT RX3: Off = 0 POTT RX4: Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
t RST
POTT NO OF COMM BITS: RUN
POTT OP
SETTINGS POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: AND AND 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AND AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP Phase Selector RX
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS TRIP TABLE POTT TRIP A POTT TRIP B POTT TRIP C POTT TRIP 3P
t PKP
SETTINGS TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY:
OR
t PKP
POTT NO OF COMM BITS:
t RST
OR 0
RUN
SETTING POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO:
100 msec TRANSMIT TABLE
Off FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LINE PICKUP LEO PKP SETTING POTT ECHO COND: Off = 0
Disabled
SETTINGS LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: SETTINGS ECHO DURATION: 0 AND ECHO LOCKOUT: Echo duration and lockout logic ECHO TABLE RX Phase Selector AND RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POTT TX1 POTT TX2 POTT TX3 POTT TX4
Enabled
t PKP
Custom
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP 837014AD.CDR
Figure 5108: POTT SCHEME LOGIC
5-182
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS e) HYBRID PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES HYBRID POTT SCHEME
HYBRID POTT SCHEME
HYB POTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: Disabled HYB POTT ECHO COND: Off HYB POTT WEAK INFEED: Enabled HYB POTT W/I COND: Off HYB POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: 0.020 s TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: 0.090 s ECHO DURATION: 0.100 s ECHO LOCKOUT: 0.250 s HYB POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.010 s GND DIR O/C FWD: Off GND DIR O/C REV: Off HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS: 1 HYB POTT RX1: Off HYB POTT RX2: Off HYB POTT RX3: Off HYB POTT RX4: Off HYB POTT SCHEME TARGET: Self-Reset HYB POTT EVENT: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled, Custom
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Generally, this scheme uses an overreaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at all terminals of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the D60 can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate operation. This increases the coverage for high-resistance faults.
GE Multilin
5-183
5 SETTINGS
The scheme is intended for three-terminal applications and for weak-infeed conditions. As a long reach of the overreaching distance element may be required for three-terminal applications, transient blocking logic is provided for both distance and ground directional overcurrent elements. In order to cope with weak-infeed conditions an echo feature is made available. By default the scheme uses the reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Additionally, reverselooking ground directional overcurrent functions can be used in conjunction with the Zone 4. For proper operation, the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-end-open/ weak-infeed and undervoltage conditions. If used by the scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured, and set accordingly. In single-pole tripping applications, the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector together with information received from the remote terminal. The scheme generates output operands (HYBRID POTT TX1 through HYBRID POTT TX4) that are used to transmit the signal to the remote terminal(s). Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface. To make the scheme fully operational as a stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail and singlepole autoreclose actions. HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: If set to Enabled, the scheme sends a permissive echo signal to the remote end(s) using a pre-programmed logic (refer to the logic diagram below). If set to Custom, the echo signal is sent if a condition selected via the HYB POTT ECHO COND setting is satisfied. The echo is sent only once and then the logic locks out for the time specified by the ECHO LOCKOUT setting. The duration of the echo pulse is settable as ECHO DURATION. Operation of the overreaching protection elements (distance zone 2 or GND DIR O/C FWD setting) inhibits the echo.
MISSIVE ECHO
HYB POTT ECHO COND: This setting specifies a user-selected echo condition and applies only if the HYB POTT PERis set to Custom.
HYB POTT WEAK INFEED: If this setting is set to Enabled, the scheme activates both the keying and operating paths using a pre-programmed weak infeed logic (refer to the logic diagram below). If this setting is set to Custom, the weak infeed condition is to be specified by the user via the HYB POTT W/I COND setting. HYB POTT W/I COND: This setting specifies user-selected weak infeed condition and applies only if the HYB POTT WEAK INFEED is set to Custom. HYB POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious received signals. The delay should be set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the Zone 2 pickup. The selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme. TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Hybrid POTT scheme for coping with the exposure of both the over-reaching Zone 2 and ground directional overcurrent function to current reversal conditions. The transient blocking logic applies to both operate (trip) and send (transmit) paths. Identifying the fault as a reverse fault prevents the scheme from both operating and keying the channel. If the reverse fault condition prevails for TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY, the blocking operation will be extended by the transient blocking timer for TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY. This allows riding through current reversal conditions. However, if distance Zone 1 picks up during the transient blocking condition, the blocking action is removed. This is to cope with evolving faults when an external fault is followed by an internal fault. Without the Zone 1 feedback, the trip would be delayed unnecessarily. The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should not be longer than the fastest possible trip time for faults on an adjacent line so that extended blocking action could be established. This should take into account the pickup time of the reverselooking elements of the scheme. The delay defined by this setting should not be too short in order to avoid locking up a spurious reverse fault indication that can occur during internal fault conditions.
5-184
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Hybrid POTT scheme for coping with the exposure of the overreaching protection functions to current reversal conditions (see also the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY). This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions including not only current reversals but also spurious negative- and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker operations (in the case when Neutral Directional or Negative-Sequence Directional overcurrent functions are used). The breaker failure time of the surrounding protection systems within the reach of the ground directional function used by the Hybrid POTT scheme should be considered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized during delayed breaker operations.
ECHO DURATION: This setting defines the guaranteed and exact duration of the echo pulse. The duration is not dependent on the duration and shape of received RX signals. This setting enables the relay to avoid a permanent lockup of the transmit/receive loop. ECHO LOCKOUT: This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse. This enables the relay to avoid oscillations of the echo pulses during an autoreclosure dead-time after clearing an internal fault. HYB POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic operand (HYB POTT OP) is produced according to the Hybrid POTT scheme logic. The HYB POTT SEAL-IN DELAY defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the HYB POTT OP pulse. As this operand runs the trip table of the Hybrid POTT scheme, the trip operands HYB POTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time. GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting defines the FlexLogic operand (if any) of a protection element that is used in addition to Zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for keying the communication channel and initiating operation of the scheme (both through the transient blocking logic). Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C FWD. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O/C FWD enabling the user to combine responses of various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional or Neutral Directional Overcurrent elements. Both these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD). The selected protection element (or elements in combination) should be coordinated with the selection of GND DIR O/C REV. For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the reverselooking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal.
GND DIR O/C REV: This setting defines the FlexLogic operand (if any) of a protection element used in addition to Zone 4 for identifying reverse faults, and thus, for stopping the transmit signal and initiating the transient blocking timer. Good directional integrity is the key requirement for a reverse-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C REV. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O/C REV enabling the user to combine responses of various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative Sequence Directional or Neutral Directional Overcurrent element. Both these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The reverse indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV).
FWD.
The selected protection element (or elements in combination) should be coordinated with the selection of GND DIR O/C For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the reverse-looking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal. HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for the scheme. The transmit codes and trip table of the Hybrid POTT scheme are the same as those for the permissive under-reaching transfer trip scheme. Please refer to the description of the PUTT scheme for more information. HYB POTT RX1 through HYB POTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic operands that represent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In single-bit applications, HYB POTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, HYB POTT RX1 and HYB POTT RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications, HYB POTT RX1, HYB POTT RX2, HYB POTT RX3, and HYB POTT RX4 must be used.
GE Multilin
5-185
5 SETTINGS
SETTING GND DIR O/C FWD: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z2 PKP Off FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LINE PICKUP LEO PKP OPEN POLE OP LINE PICKUP UV PKP SETTING HYB POTT W/I COND: Off = 0 SETTING HYB POTT SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTINGS HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS: HYB POTT RX1: Off = 0 HYB POTT RX2: AND OR
SETTING HYB POTT WEAK INFEED:
Disabled
OR
Enabled
SETTING Custom AND AND HYB POTT SEAL-IN DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
t RST
HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS: RUN Phase Selector RX
HYB POTT OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS HYB POTT TRIP A TRIP TABLE HYB POTT TRIP B HYB POTT TRIP C HYB POTT TRIP 3P
SETTING HYB POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 0 AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP
t PKP
Off = 0 HYB POTT RX3: Off = 0 HYB POTT RX4: Off = 0 Off SETTING HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: Disabled OR
100 msec
SETTINGS ECHO DURATION: ECHO LOCKOUT: HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS: AND RUN
SETTING HYB POTT ECHO COND: Off=0
AND
Enabled
AND
Echo duration and lockout logic
ECHO TABLE Custom FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTINGS TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: OR AND OR RX Phase Selector TRANSMIT TABLE HYB POTT TX1 RUN HYB POTT TX2 HYB POTT TX3 HYB POTT TX4
SETTING GND DIR O/C REV: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z4 PKP GND DIST Z4 PKP PH DIST Z1 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP
t PKP
t RST
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP 837015AE.CDR
Figure 5109: HYBRID POTT SCHEME LOGIC
5-186
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS f) DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING

PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS PILOT SCHEMES BLOCKING SCHEME
BLOCKING SCHEME
BLOCKING SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled BLOCK RX CO-ORD PKP DELAY: 0.010 s TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: 0.030 s TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: 0.090 s BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.010 s GND DIR O/C FWD: Off GND DIR O/C REV: Off BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: 1 BLOCK SCHEME RX1: Off BLOCK SCHEME RX2: Off BLOCK SCHEME RX3: Off BLOCK SCHEME RX4: Off BLOCK SCHEME EVENT: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Generally, the scheme compares the direction to a fault at all terminals of the line. Unlike the permissive schemes, the absence of a blocking signal permits operation of the scheme. Consequently, the scheme is biased toward dependability and requires an "on/off" type of signaling. By default this scheme uses only a forward-looking over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to identify forward faults. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to increase the coverage for high-resistance faults. Also by default, only a reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 4 distance element for better time and sensitivity coordination. For proper operation, the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accordingly. In single-pole tripping applications, the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector together with information received from the remote terminal. The scheme generates output operands (DIR BLOCK TX INIT and DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP through DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP) that control the transmission of signals to the remote end(s). When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to key the transmitter at the interface. The output operand from the scheme (DIR BLOCK A, B, C and 3P) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
GE Multilin
5-187
5 SETTINGS
To make the scheme fully operational as a stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail, and singlepole autoreclose actions. BLOCK RX CO-ORD PKP DELAY: This setting defines a delay for the forward-looking protection elements used by the scheme for coordination with the blocking response from the remote end(s). This setting should include both the response time of the protection elements used to establish a blocking signal and the total transmission time of that signal including the relay communications equipment interfacing and the communications channel itself. TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Blocking scheme for coping with the exposure of both the over-reaching Zone 2 and ground directional overcurrent function to current reversal conditions. The transient blocking logic applies to the send path only. Identifying the fault as a reverse fault establishes the blocking signal. If the reverse fault condition prevails for TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY, the blocking operation will be extended by the transient blocking timer for TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY. This allows riding through current reversal conditions. However, if Zone 1 picks up during the transient blocking condition, the blocking action is removed. This is done to cope with evolving faults when an external fault is followed by an internal fault. Without the Zone 1 feedback, the trip would be unnecessarily delayed. The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should not be longer than the fastest possible trip time for faults on an adjacent line so that the extended blocking action could be established. This should take into account the pickup time of the reverselooking elements of the scheme. The delay defined by this setting should not be too short in order to avoid locking up a spurious reverse fault indication that can occur during internal fault conditions.
TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Blocking scheme for coping with the exposure of the overreaching protection functions to current reversal conditions (see also the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY). This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions including not only current reversals but also spurious negative and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker operations (in the case when Neutral Directional or Negative Sequence Directional overcurrent functions are used). Breaker failure time of the surrounding protection systems within the reach of the ground directional function used by the Blocking scheme should be considered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized during delayed breaker operations.
BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic operand (DIR BLOCK OP) is produced according to the Blocking scheme logic. The BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN DELAY defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the DIR BLOCK OP pulse. As this operand runs the Trip Table of the Blocking scheme, the trip operands DIR BLOCK TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time. GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting defines the FlexLogic operand (if any) of a protection element used in addition to zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for initiating operation of the scheme. Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C FWD. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O/C FWD enabling the user to combine responses of various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional or Neutral Directional Overcurrent elements. Both these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD). The selected protection element (or elements in combination) should be coordinated with the selection of GND DIR O/C REV. For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the reverse-looking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal.
GND DIR O/C REV: This setting defines the FlexLogic operand (if any) of a protection element that is used in addition to zone 4 for identifying reverse faults, and thus, for initiating the blocking signal. Either reverse-looking directional or non-directional overcurrent protection element may be used as GND DIR O/C REV. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used as GND DIR O/C REV, enabling the user to combine responses of various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative Sequence Directional, Neutral Directional, or a non-directional instantaneous overcurrent element.
5-188
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
FWD.
The selected protection element (or elements in combination) should be coordinated with the selection of GND DIR O/C For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the reverse-looking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal. BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for the scheme. With only one bit available, the scheme sends the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX INIT FlexLogic operand. This operand should be used to start the channel (set the blocking signal). On internal faults, the scheme removes the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX1 FlexLogic operand.
For tripping the scheme responds to lack of the blocking signal on Bit 1 (BLOCK SCHEME RX1 setting). The scheme uses only local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector to assert the output operands DUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P. Please refer to Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more information on communications. To take advantage of the four-bit blocking scheme, the blocking signals should be initiated from a disturbance detector. This can be accomplished by using both 50DD and DIR BLOCK TX INIT to assert the blocking signal. Subsequently, specific bits will be de-asserted by the scheme based on the phase selection providing the peer relay with more information on the fault type. Otherwise, the peer relay issues a three-pole trip upon receiving the bit pattern (0, 0, 0, 0). BLOCK SCHEME RX1 through BLOCK SCHEME RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic operands that represent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In single-bit applications, BLOCK SCHEME RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, BLOCK SCHEME RX1 and BLOCK SCHEME RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications, BLOCK SCHEME RX1, BLOCK SCHEME RX2, BLOCK SCHEME RX3, and BLOCK SCHEME RX4 must be used.
SETTING BLOCKING SCHEME FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z2 PKP GND DIST Z2 PKP SETTING GND DIR O/C FWD: Off = 0 SETTING BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: BLOCKING SCHEME RX1: Off = 0 BLOCKING SCHEME RX2: Off = 0 BLOCKING SCHEME RX3: Off = 0 BLOCKING SCHEME RX4: Off = 0 AND Phase Selector RX FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AND OR SETTINGS TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP GND DIST Z1 PKP OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR DIR BLOCK TX INIT AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP TRANSMIT TABLE DIR BLOCK TX2 STOP DIR BLOCK TX3 STOP DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP TRIP TABLE PATTERN RECEIVED (See Chapter 8) FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AR FORCE 3P TRIP OPEN POLE OP SETTING BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: RUN Phase Selector RX OR SETTING BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN DELAY: AND 0 AND SETTING BLOCKING RX CO-ORD PKP DELAY:
t PKP
5
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
t RST
BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: RUN
DIR BLOCK OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR BLOCK TRIP A TRIP TABLE DIR BLOCK TRIP B DIR BLOCK TRIP C DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P
SETTING GND DIR O/C REV. Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z4 PKP GND DIST Z4 PKP
t PKP
t RST
OR 837016AB.CDR
Figure 5110: DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-189
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7INPUTS/OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS
5 SETTINGS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT H5a CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Cont Ip 1 CONTACT INPUT H5a DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT xxx CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS
MESSAGE
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs. An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact input X being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event. A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the D60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting. A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram). Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
5-190
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is below 1msec. For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1 ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time. Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change. The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
INPUT VOLTAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
2
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record
1
At this time, the new (HIGH) contact state is validated
3
The FlexLogic operand is going to be asserted at this protection pass
TM
6
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record
5
At this time, the new (LOW) contact state is validated
5
7
RAW CONTACT STATE
DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand is going to be de-asserted at this protection pass
4
FLEXLOGICTM OPERAND
SCAN TIME (0.5 msec)
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state
DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state
PROTECTION PASS (8 times a cycle controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5111: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 for 250 V sources. For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
(52b)"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
GE Multilin
5-191
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS 5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled VIRTUAL INPUT Virt Ip 1 VIRTUAL INPUT TYPE: Latched 1 ID: 1
MESSAGE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
VIRTUAL INPUT
As above for Virtual Input 1
VIRTUAL INPUT
32
As above for Virtual Input 1
UCA SBO TIMER
UCA SBO TIMEOUT: 30 s
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (COMMANDS menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input signal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss. If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to "Disabled", the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set to "Enabled", the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in response to received input signals and the applied settings. There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is "Self-Reset", when the input signal transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to OFF = 0. If set to "Latched", the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0. The "Self-Reset" operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
NOTE
The Select-Before-Operate timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic de-selection of the virtual input, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely (used only with the UCA Select-Before-Operate feature).
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 Enabled=1
AND
S Latch SETTING
AND
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1 Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0
R
OR
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
SETTING VIRTUAL INPUT 1 TYPE: Latched Self - Reset
(Flexlogic Operand) Virt Ip 1
AND
827080A2.CDR
Figure 5112: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
5-192
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Off CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs. An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so. EXAMPLE: The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the Trip Circuit Example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the Specifications for Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the flag; e.g. Cont Op 1 IOn or Cont Op 1 IOff. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in". This can be realized in the UR using the Cont Op 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the Contact Output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1" OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
operand
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a ID L-Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1a RESET: Off OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Operate-dominant OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-193
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
The D60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic). The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module. Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message. OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the close coil of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting. OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the trip coil of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting. OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to Operate-dominant and will open if set to Reset-dominant.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The following settings should be applied. Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module): PUTS
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUT-
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus: TONS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
Application Example 2: A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module): OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1 CONTACT OUT-
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example. Application Example 3: A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement this functionality as described below:
5-194
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS INPUTS/OUTPUTS Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module): OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO4 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3 CONTACT OUT-
Application Example 4: A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1 is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows. Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
PUTS
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUT-
5.7.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(64)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Virt Op 1
1 ID
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so. For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip" VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
GE Multilin
5-195
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS 5.7.5 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE I/O OVERVIEW Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institutes (EPRI) UCA2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) specifications. The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet communications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9C and 9D versions of the CPU module.
NOTE
The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic to allow distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those messages that have originated in selected devices. GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs. The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not occurred. The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message hold time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the hold time interval, and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest possible rate, as set by its default update timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is received from a remote device before the hold time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating, can be displayed. The GOOSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs. b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GOOSE MESSAGES In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS INSTALLATION RELAY NAME setting. c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GOOSE MESSAGES
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters PRODUCT SETUP
REMOTE DEVICE
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Remote Device 1
Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
5-196
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUT 1(32) Range: 1 to 16 inclusive
REMOTE INPUT 1
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Remote Device 1

MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR: None REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off REMOTE IN 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. The relay provides 32 remote inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifications and is presented in the UCA2 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand. Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above. selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see the Remote Devices section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR selects the specific bits of the GOOSE message required.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available: Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. For additional information on the GOOSE specification, refer to the Remote Devices section in this chapter and to Appendix C: UCA/MMS Communications.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-197
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS 5.7.7 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR Range: FlexLogic Operand
REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR

MESSAGE
DNA- 1 OPERAND: Off DNA- 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted. Table 521: UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS
DNA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DEFINITION OperDev Lock Out Initiate Reclosing Block Reclosing Breaker Failure Initiate Send Transfer Trip Receive Transfer Trip Send Perm Receive Perm Stop Perm Send Block Receive Block Stop Block BkrDS BkrPhsADS BkrPhsBDS BkrPhsCDS DiscSwDS Interlock DS LineEndOpen Status Event Fault Present Sustained Arc Downed Conductor Sync Closing Mode Reserved Report mode status of local GOOSE device Report sustained arc Report downed conductor Report line open at local end Report operating status of local GOOSE device Initiate remote reclose sequence Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence Initiate remote breaker failure scheme Initiate remote trip operation Report receipt of remote transfer trip command Report permissive affirmative Report receipt of permissive affirmative Override permissive affirmative Report block affirmative Report receipt of block affirmative Override block affirmative Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Report breaker disconnect phase A state Report breaker disconnect phase B state Report breaker disconnect phase C state INTENDED FUNCTION LOGIC 0 Trip LockoutOff InitRecloseOff BlockOff BFIOff TxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOff TxPermOff RxPermOff StopPermOff TxBlockOff RxBlockOff StopBlockOff Open Open Open Open Open DSLockOff Open Offline EventOff FaultOff SustArcOff DownedOff SyncClsOff Normal LOGIC 1 Close LockoutOn InitRecloseOn BlockOn BFIOn TxXfrTripOn RxXfrTripOn TxPermOn RxPermOn StopPermOn TxBlockOn RxBlockOn StopBlockOn Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed DSLockOn Closed Available EventOn FaultOn SustArcOn DownedOn SyncClsOn Test
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2832
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices section.
NOTE
5-198
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR

MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Off UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted. The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of COMMUNICATIONS UCA/MMS PROTOCOL setany selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP tings menu. DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices section.
NOTE
5.7.8 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING
RESETTING
RESET OPERAND: Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any programmed operand. When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand. 5.7.9 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
DIRECT INPUT
DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER: 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off DIRECT INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 1 to 32
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These settings specify how the Direct Input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of this Direct Input. The specified Direct Input is driven by the device identified here.
GE Multilin
5-199
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for this Direct Input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit identified here as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the Direct Output Number of the sending device. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the Direct Input when the associated Direct Device is offline. The following choices are available: Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32) Range: FlexLogic operand
DIRECT OUTPUT
DIRECT OUT Off
1 OPERAND:
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this Direct Output.
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES The examples introduced in the Product Setup section for Direct I/Os are continued below to illustrate usage of the Direct Inputs and Outputs. EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING I/O CAPABILITIES OF A D60 RELAY Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5113: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5 and bit number 12 are used, as an example): UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = 12
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND
= Cont Ip 1 On
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON. EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
5-200
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
UR IED 1
BLOCK
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5114: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase IOC1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay. The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals): UR IED 2: UR IED 3: UR IED 4: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4" DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9 ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to On), or to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to Off). EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5115: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
GE Multilin
5-201
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 TX1
UR IED 2
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5116: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a bridge. The following settings should be applied: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6"
IED 3)
UR IED 3:
5
UR IED 2:
IED 1)
(forward a message from 1 to 3) (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 2
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1

842717A1.CDR
Figure 5117: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT I/O EXAMPLE 3 In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1 setting).
5-202
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.8TRANSDUCER I/O

PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUT H1

MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT U8
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of 1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3. Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter. dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel. Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot M. DCMA INPUT M1 DCMA INPUT M1 FUNCTION: Disabled
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT M1 ID: DCMA Ip 1 DCMA INPUT M1 UNITS: A DCMA INPUT M1 RANGE: 0 to -1 mA DCMA INPUT M1 MIN VALUE: 0.000 DCMA INPUT M1 MAX VALUE: 0.000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, 1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as Volt, C, MegaWatts, etc. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The DCMA INPUT XX RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel. The DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250C; in this case the DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE value is 250. Another example would be a Watt transducer with a span from 20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE value would be 20 and the DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE value 180. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.
GE Multilin
5-203
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5 SETTINGS 5.8.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER I/O
RTD INPUTS
RTD INPUTS
RTD INPUT H1

MESSAGE
RTD INPUT U8
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3. RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel. Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in slot M.
RTD INPUT M5
RTD INPUT M5 FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
RTD INPUT M5 ID: RTD Ip 1 RTD INPUT M5 TYPE: 100 Nickel
MESSAGE
Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum, 120 Nickel
The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel. Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature. In FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100C. For example, a trip level of 150C is achieved by setting the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an output contact directly.
5-204
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.9TESTING
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE
5.9 TESTING 5.9.1 TEST MODE
SETTINGS TESTING
MESSAGE
TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE INITIATE: On
The relay provides test settings to verify that functionality using simulated conditions for contact inputs and outputs. The Test Mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a flashing Test Mode LED indicator. To initiate the Test mode, the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be Enabled and the TEST MODE INITIATE setting must be set to Logic 1. In particular: To initiate Test Mode through relay settings, set TEST MODE INITIATE to On. The Test Mode starts when the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting is changed from Disabled to Enabled. To initiate Test Mode through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, digital input, communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FUNCTION to Enabled and set TEST MODE INITIATE to the desired operand. The Test Mode starts when the selected operand assumes a Logic 1 state.
When in Test Mode, the D60 remains fully operational, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally. The only difference between the normal operation and the Test Mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The former can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational; the latter can be forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the Test Mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs test functions described in the following sections. 5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip 1 :Disabled FORCE Cont Ip 2 :Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip xx :Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode in the following ways: If set to Disabled, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence. If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals.
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test Mode LED will be On, indicating that the relay is in Test Mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
GE Multilin
5-205
5.9 TESTING
5 SETTINGS 5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
TESTING
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op 1 :Disabled FORCE Cont Op 2 :Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
FORCE Cont Op xx :Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode. If set to Disabled, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is Logic 1 and will resets when its control operand is Logic 0. If set to Energize, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration of the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to De-energize, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to Freeze, the output retains its position from before entering the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided. Example 1: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
The Test Mode should be initiated from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as Latched (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, Digital Input 1 should remain operational, Digital Inputs 2 and 3 should open, and Digital Input 4 should close. Also, Contact Output 1 should freeze, Contact Output 2 should open, Contact Output 3 should close, and Contact Output 4 should remain fully operational. The required settings are shown below.
TESTING
To enable User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION:
Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
Make the following changes to configure the Contact I/Os. In the SETTINGS FORCE CONTACT INPUTS menus, set:
and
FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled, FORCE Cont Ip 2: Open, FORCE Cont Ip 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: Closed FORCE Cont Op 1: Freeze, FORCE Cont Op 2: De-energized, FORCE Cont Op 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Op 4: Disabled
Example 2: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or through Remote Input 1 The Test should be initiated locally from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or remotely through Remote Input 1. Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as Latched. The required settings are shown below. Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
USER-PROGRAMMABLE Set the User Programmable Pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to Latched. To enable either Pushbutton 1 or Remote Input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu: PUSHBUTTONS TEST MODE FUNCTION:
Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: VO1
5-206
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS AUTORECLOSE REMOTE DEVICES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS DIGITAL COUNTERS SELECTOR SWITCHES FLEX STATES ETHERNET DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
See page 6-3. See page 6-3. See page 6-3. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-6. See page 6-6. See page 6-7.
ACTUAL VALUES METERING
SOURCE SRC 1 SOURCE SRC 2 SYNCHROCHECK TRACKING FREQUENCY FLEXELEMENTS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS
See page 6-11.
See page 6-13. See page 6-14. See page 6-14. See page 6-14. See page 6-14.
GE Multilin
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES
ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS
FAULT REPORTS EVENT RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER MAINTENANCE
See page 6-15. See page 6-17. See page 6-17. See page 6-17. See page 6-18.
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO
MODEL INFORMATION FIRMWARE REVISIONS
6-2
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2STATUS For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
Cont Ip 1 Off

MESSAGE
Cont Ip xx Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input. 6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip 1 Off

MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32 Off
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input. 6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUT STATUS: Off

MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT 32 STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here. The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be Offline in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
GE Multilin
6-3
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
Cont Op 1 Off
MESSAGE
Cont Op xx Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output. For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On, VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
Virt Op 1 Off
MESSAGE
Virt Op 64 Off
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS AUTORECLOSE
6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE SHOT COUNT:
Range: 0, 1, 2
The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here. 6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

MESSAGE
All REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE: No REMOTE DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
Range: Online, Offline
REMOTE DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required Remote Device is not online.
6-4
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES b) STATISTICS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
6.2 STATUS
REMOTE DEVICE
REMOTE DEVICE StNum: REMOTE DEVICE SqNum:
1 0 1 0
MESSAGE
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a GOOSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented. 6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1

MESSAGE
Counter 1 0 Counter 1 0
ACCUM: FROZEN:
MESSAGE
Counter 1 FROZEN: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS Counter 1 0 MICROS:
MESSAGE
The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp. 6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS SELECTOR SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 POSITION: 0/7 SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
Range: Current Position / 7
MESSAGE
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the actual value. 6.2.10 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES
FLEX STATES
PARAM Off
1: Off
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off Off
Range: Off, On
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
GE Multilin
6-5
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.11 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS: OK

MESSAGE
Range: Fail, OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
AVG MSG RETURN TIME CH1: 0 ms

MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1: 0 CRC FAIL COUNT CH1: 0 AVG MSG RETURN TIME CH2: 0 ms UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH2: 0 CRC FAIL COUNT CH2: 0 DIRECT INPUT 1: On
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
6
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 32: On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for Direct Output messages to return to the sender in a Direct I/O ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10 messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the Direct Output messages that do not make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the Direct Output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or the relay(s). The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command. The DIRECT INPUT x values represent the state of the x-th Direct Input.
6-6
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS 6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
DIRECT DEVICES STATUS

MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline DIRECT DEVICE 2 STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
GE Multilin
6-7
6.3 METERING 6.3METERING a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
Generator
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

PARAMETERS AS SEEN BY THE UR RELAY
Voltage WATTS = Positive VARS = Positive PF = Lag VAG Current UR RELAY IB IA VCG IC
+Q PF = Lead -P PF = Lag PF = Lag

IA
+P PF = Lead -Q
M
Inductive Generator
LOAD Resistive
VBG
S=VI
G
Voltage WATTS = Positive VARS = Negative PF = Lead Current IB UR RELAY VBG IC VCG
+Q
PF = Lead
IA VAG
PF = Lag
-P
IA
+P PF = Lag
-Q
PF = Lead
6
Inductive
LOAD Resistive Resistive LOAD VCG Voltage WATTS = Negative VARS = Negative PF = Lag Current VBG UR RELAY IC IA IB VAG
S=VI
2
+Q PF = Lead -P
IA
PF = Lag +P
PF = Lag -Q
PF = Lead
G
Generator Resistive LOAD
S=VI
3
VCG Voltage WATTS = Negative VARS = Positive PF = Lead IA Current UR RELAY VBG IC VAG IB
+Q PF = Lead
IA
PF = Lag
+P
-P PF = Lag
PF = Lead
-Q
4
G
Generator
827239AC.CDR
S=VI
Figure 61: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS
6-8
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES
6.3 METERING
All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times. For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting defines a particular Source to be used as the reference. The relay will first determine if any Phase VT bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any Aux VT bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include Phase CT bank and Ground CT bank. If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o
-315o positive angle direction
-180o
UR phase angle reference
0o
-135o
-45o
-90o
827845A1.CDR
Figure 62: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages. For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section. WYE-Connected Instrument Transformers: ABC phase rotation: 1 V_0 = -- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) 3 1 2 V_1 = -- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) 3 1 2 V_2 = -- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) 3 The above equations apply to currents as well. ACB phase rotation: 1 V_0 = -- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) 3 1 2 V_1 = -- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) 3 1 2 V_2 = -- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) 3
GE Multilin
6-9
6.3 METERING DELTA-Connected Instrument Transformers: ABC phase rotation: V_0 = N/A 1 30 2 V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) 3 3 1 30 2 V_2 = ---------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) 3 3 ACB phase rotation:
6 ACTUAL VALUES
V_0 = N/A 1 30 2 V_1 = ---------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) 3 3 1 30 2 V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation. Table 61: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VAG 13.9 0 VBG 76.2 125 VCG 79.7 250 VAB 84.9 313 84.9 0 VBC 138.3 97 138.3 144 VCA 85.4 241 85.4 288 VT CONN. WYE DELTA UR INPUTS, SEC. V F5AC 13.9 0 84.9 0 F6AC 76.2 125 138.3 144 F7AC 79.7 250 85.4 288 SYMM. COMP, SEC. V V0 19.5 192 N/A V1 56.5 7 56.5 54 V2 23.3 187 23.3 234
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 can be determined)
The power system voltages are phase-referenced for simplicity to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a relative matter. It is important to remember that the UR displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
WYE VTs
C B 2
U re R ph fe a re se nc a e ng

U re R ph fe a re se nc a e ng le
le
A
DELTA VTs
C B 2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 63: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
6-10
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING 6.3.2 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
SOURCE SRC 1
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT or VT characteristics.
NOTE
PHASE CURRENT SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ib: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ic: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS In: 0.000 A SRC 1 PHASOR Ia: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Ib: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Ic: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR In: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 POS SEQ I1: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 RMS Ig: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT SRC 1
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Igd: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 RMS Vag: 0.000 V
MESSAGE
PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vbg: 0.000 V SRC 1 RMS Vcg: 0.000 V SRC 1 PHASOR Vag: 0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
6-11
6.3 METERING SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 RMS Vab: 0.000 V SRC 1 RMS Vbc: 0.000 V SRC 1 RMS Vca: 0.000 V SRC 1 PHASOR Vab: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vca: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 POS SEQ V1: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 RMS Vx: 0.000 V SRC 1 PHASOR Vx: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 REAL POWER 3: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1

MESSAGE
POWER SRC 1
SRC 1 REAL POWER a: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER b: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER c: 0.000 W SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR 3: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR a: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR b: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR c: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
6-12
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES SRC 1 APPARENT PWR 3: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR a: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR b: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR c: 0.000 VA SRC 1 3: SRC 1 a: SRC 1 b: SRC 1 c: POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000
6.3 METERING
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ENERGY SRC 1
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR: 0.000 Wh SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR: 0.000 Wh SRC 1 POS VARHOUR: 0.000 varh SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR: 0.000 varh SRC 1 FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY SRC 1
Two identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration (see the SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients.
SOURCE FREQUENCY
6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHROCHECK 1
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA VOLT: 0.000 V

MESSAGE
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA PHASE: 0.0 SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA FREQ: 0.00 Hz
MESSAGE
The Actual Values menu for Synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of Synchrocheck 1. If a Synchrocheck function setting is set to "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.
GE Multilin
6-13
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY: 60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used. 6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units. Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
BREAKER ARCING AMPS (Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C) dcmA FREQUENCY PHASE ANGLE POWER FACTOR RTDs SOURCE CURRENT BASE = 2000 kA2 cycle BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. fBASE = 1 Hz BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
SOURCE ENERGY (SRC X Positive and Negative Watthours); (SRC X Positive and Negative Varhours) SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts)
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs
6.3.6 TRANSDUCER I/O

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx 0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx -50 C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID and the bottom line as the value.
6-14
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4RECORDS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS FAULT REPORTS
6.4 RECORDS 6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS
NO FAULTS TO REPORT
or
FAULT REPORT #
FAULT # 2000/08/11
MESSAGE
DATE:
Range: YYYY/MM/DD
FAULT # TIME: 00:00:00.000000 FAULT # ABG FAULT # 00.0 km FAULT # SHOT: 0 TYPE: LOCATION RECLOSE
Range: HH:MM:SS.ssssss
MESSAGE
Range: where applicable; not seen if the source VTs are in the "Delta" configuration Range: where applicable; not seen if the source VTs are in the "Delta" configuration Range: where applicable
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The latest 10 fault reports can be stored. The most recent fault location calculation (when applicable) is displayed in this menu, along with the date and time stamp of the event which triggered the calculation. See the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FAULT REPORT menu for assigning the Source and Trigger for fault calculations. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing fault reports. Fault Type determination is required for calculation of Fault Location the algorithm uses the angle between the negative and positive sequence components of the relay currents. To improve accuracy and speed of operation, the fault components of the currents are used, i.e., the pre-fault phasors are subtracted from the measured current phasors. In addition to the angle relationships, certain extra checks are performed on magnitudes of the negative and zero sequence currents. The single-ended fault location method assumes that the fault components of the currents supplied from the local (A) and remote (B) systems are in phase. The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location.
distance to fault
Local Bus
Remote Bus
Z A
IA
mZ
(1 m)Z
IB
Z B
EA
VA
VF
RF
VB
EB
Figure 64: EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION The following equations hold true for this equivalent system. VA = m Z IA + RF ( IA + IB ) where: m = sought pu distance to fault, Z = positive sequence impedance of the line.
(EQ 6.1)
The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault (F) and pre-fault load (pre) components: I A = I AF + I Apre and neglecting shunt parameters of the line: I B = I BF I Apre
(EQ 6.3) (EQ 6.2)
GE Multilin
6-15
6.4 RECORDS Inserting Equations 6.2 and 6.3 into Equation 6.1 and solving for the fault resistance yields: VA m Z IA R F = ----------------------------------I BF I AF 1 + ------- I
AF
6 ACTUAL VALUES
(EQ 6.4)
Assuming the fault components of the currents, IAF and IBF are in phase, and observing that the fault resistance, as impedance, does not have any imaginary part gives: VA m Z IA Im ----------------------------------- = 0 I AF
(EQ 6.5)
where: Im() represents the imaginary part of a complex number. Equation 6.5 solved for the unknown m creates the following fault location algorithm: Im ( V A I AF ) m = --------------------------------------Im ( Z I A I AF ) where: * denotes the complex conjugate and I AF = I A I Apre
(EQ 6.7) (EQ 6.6)
Depending on the fault type, appropriate voltage and current signals are selected from the phase quantities before applying Equations 6.6 and 6.7 (the superscripts denote phases, the subscripts denote stations): For AG faults: V A = V A , For BG faults: V A = V A , For CG faults: V A = V A ,
C B A
I A = I A + K 0 I 0A I A = I A + K 0 I 0A I A = I A + K 0 I 0A
A B BC B
For AB and ABG faults: V A = V A V A , For BC and BCG faults: V A = V A V A ,

C A B C
IA = IA IA IA = IA IA
C B C A
For CA and CAG faults: V A = V A V A , I A = I A I A where K0 is the zero sequence compensation factor (for the first six equations above) For ABC faults, all three AB, BC, and CA loops are analyzed and the final result is selected based upon consistency of the results
The element calculates the distance to the fault (with m in miles or kilometers) and the phases involved in the fault.
SETTING FAULT REPORT TRIG: Off=0 SETTING FAULT REPORT SOURCE: SRC X 50DD OP 0 1 SEC
AND
RUN ACTUAL VALUES FAULT REPORT # DATE FAULT LOCATOR TIME FAULT TYPE FAULT LOCATION FAULT# RECLOSE SHOT
IA IB IC 3I_0
VA VB VC SHOT # FROM AUTO RECLOSURE
827094A1.CDR
Figure 65: FAULT LOCATOR SCHEME
6-16
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS 6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT: XXXX RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3 POWER ON EVENT: 2 POWER OFF EVENT: 1 EVENTS CLEARED
EVENT 3 DATE: 2000/07/14 EVENT 3 TIME: 14:53:00.03405 Date and Time Stamps
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records. 6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
FORCE TRIGGER? No
MESSAGE
Range: No, Yes
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: 0 AVAILABLE RECORDS: 0 CYCLES PER RECORD: 0.0 LAST CLEARED DATE: 2000/07/14 15:40:16
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The cycles per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography section of Chapter 5 for further details.
CLEAR RECORDS
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS menu for clearing the oscillography records. 6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: 2000/01/14 13:45:51

MESSAGE
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: 2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME is the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME is the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If Data Logger channels are defined, then both values are static. Refer to the COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
menu for clearing data logger records.
GE Multilin
6-17
6.4 RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
MAINTENANCE
BREAKER 1(2)
BREAKER 1
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A: 0.00 kA2-cyc

MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP B: 0.00 kA2-cyc BKR 1 ARCING AMP C: 0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE
There is an identical Actual Value menu for each of the 2 Breakers. The BKR 1 ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records. cycles. Refer to the COMMANDS
6-18
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
ORDER CODE LINE 1: D60-A00-HCL-F8A-H6H ORDER CODE LINE 2: ORDER CODE LINE 3: ORDER CODE LINE 4: SERIAL NUMBER: ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 MANUFACTURING DATE: 0 OPERATING TIME: 0:00:00
Example code shown
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here. 6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
D60 Line Relay REVISION: 3.40 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER: 0 BOOT PROGRAM REVISION: 1.13 FRONT PANEL PROGRAM REVISION: 0.08 COMPILE DATE: 2003/11/20 04:55:16 BOOT DATE: 2003/11/20 16:41:32
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the application firmware. Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE) Value is 0 for each standard firmware release. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the boot program firmware. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of faceplate program firmware. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when product firmware was built. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when the boot program was built.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been installed.
GE Multilin
6-19
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6-20
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS
7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the Password Security section of Chapter 5. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry: COMMAND EXECUTED 7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: COMMANDS COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip 1 Off

Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32 Off
Range: Off, On
7
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state Off (0) or On (1).
PATH: COMMANDS
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS? No CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? No CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER? No
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
GE Multilin
7-1
7.1 COMMANDS CLEAR BREAKER 1 ARCING AMPS? No CLEAR BREAKER 2 ARCING AMPS? No CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS? No CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS? No CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS? No
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes Valid only for units with Direct I/O module. Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to No. 7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME: 2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked. 7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
PERFORM LAMPTEST? No UPDATE ORDER CODE? No
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to No. The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown. UPDATING... PLEASE WAIT There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
7-2
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2TARGETS
7.2 TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT LATCHED
1:
Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown. Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16: LATCHED

MESSAGE
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the Targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read No Active Targets: 7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message. The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed. Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY 1 2 3 ACTIVE STATUS OP PKP LATCHED DESCRIPTION element operated and still picked up element picked up and timed out element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed. 7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present. Major self-test errors also result in the following: the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation the faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-Programmable Self-Tests section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
GE Multilin
7-3
7.2 TARGETS
Table 72: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGE LATCHED TARGET MESSAGE? DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE TEST IS PERFORMED Every 1/8th of a cycle.
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
WHAT TO DO
DSP ERRORS: Yes A/D Calibration, A/D Interrupt, A/D Reset, Inter DSP Rx, Sample Int, Rx Interrupt, Tx Interrupt, Rx Sample Index, Invalid Settings, Rx Checksum DSP ERROR: INVALID REVISION EQUIPMENT MISMATCH with 2nd-line detail message FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN with 2nd-line detail message LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR Yes
CT/VT module with digital signal processor may have a problem.
Cycle the control power (if the problem recurs, contact the factory).
One or more DSP modules in a multiple DSP unit has Rev. C hardware
Rev. C DSP needs to be replaced with a Rev. D DSP.
Contact the factory
No
Configuration of modules does not On power up; thereafter, the match the order code stored in the backplane is checked for missing CPU. cards every 5 seconds. FlexLogic equations do not compile properly. Discrepancy in the position of a latching contact between relay firmware and hardware has been detected. Error was found while checking Flash memory. Settings indicate the unit is not calibrated. Event driven; whenever FlexLogic equations are modified. Every 1/8th of a cycle.
Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power (if problem persists, contact factory). Finish all equation editing and use self test to debug any errors. Latching output module failed. Replace the Module.
No
No
PROGRAM MEMORY Test Failed UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
Yes No
Once flash is uploaded with new firmware. On power up.
Contact the factory. Contact the factory. Program all settings (especially those under PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION).
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No
PRODUCT SETUP On power up and whenever the INSTALLATION setting indicates RELAY PROGRAMMED setting is relay is not in a programmed state. altered.
Table 73: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGE BATTERY FAIL DIRECT RING BREAK LATCHED TARGET MESSAGE Yes No DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE TEST IS PERFORMED WHAT TO DO
Battery is not functioning. Direct I/O settings configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring.
Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported Replace the battery located in the after 1 minute if problem persists. power supply module (1H or 1L). Every second. Check Direct I/O configuration and/or wiring. Check Direct I/O configuration and/or wiring. Contact the factory.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF EEPROM DATA ERROR
No Yes No
Direct Device is configured but not Every second. connected The non-volatile memory has been corrupted. Bad IRIG-B input signal. On power up only.
IRIG-B FAILURE
Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal Ensure IRIG-B cable is connected, is received. check cable functionality (i.e. look for physical damage or perform continuity test), ensure IRIG-B receiver is functioning, and check input signal level (it may be less than specification). If none of these apply, contact the factory. Event driven. Contact the factory. Contact the factory. Check connections. Contact the factory.
LATCHING OUT ERROR LOW ON MEMORY PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE REMOTE DEVICE OFF
Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Latching output failure.
Memory is close to 100% capacity Monitored every 5 seconds. Primary Ethernet connection failed A prototype version of the firmware is loaded. Monitored every 2 seconds On power up only.
One or more GOOSE devices are Event driven. Occurs when a device Check GOOSE setup not responding programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving. Every 1 to 60 s., depending on GOOSE packets. Sec. Ethernet connection failed SNTP server not responding. Monitored every 2 seconds 10 to 60 seconds. Check connections. Check SNTP configuration and/or network connections. Contact the factory.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION
Yes No Yes
Abnormal restart from modules Event driven. being removed/inserted when powered-up, abnormal DC supply, or internal relay failure. Some tasks are behind schedule Event driven.
WATCHDOG ERROR
No
Contact the factory.
7-4
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1DISTANCE ELEMENTS
8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS 8.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The distance elements use memory voltage for polarization. Additional supervising functions different for ground and phase distance zones complement a classical mho characteristic to enhance directional integrity and reach accuracy: To avoid overreaching during resistive faults under heavy pre-fault load conditions, the ground distance elements utilize a load-adaptive (zero-sequence polarized) reactance characteristic to supervise the base mho characteristic. Both negative and zero-sequence currents are compared with the memory voltage to enhance directional integrity of the ground distance elements. It is well known that ground distance elements as per the principle of distance relaying may have limited accuracy during double-line-to-ground faults. In order to prevent maloperation in such cases the ground elements are blocked by an extra fault-type comparator that utilizes the phase angle between the negative- and zero-sequence currents. The phase distance elements use reactance and memory polarized directional characteristics to supervise the mho characteristic. Both ground and phase distance elements have the current supervision functions built-in.
The quadrilateral distance characteristic uses the reactance, directional, and current supervising functions as described above. Right and left blinders adjustable as to both the resistive and angular positions complete the characteristic. More information regarding the distance characteristics is found in the Distance Characteristics section. An example of analysis of the steady-state operation of the distance elements is found in the Distance Elements Analysis section. The relay provides four zones of distance protection. All zones are identical in terms of settings. However, Zone 1 has extra adaptive mechanisms built-in to enhance the transient reach accuracy even when the voltage signals are supplied from poor quality voltage sources such as Capacitive Voltage Transformers (CVTs). Ground Zones 2 through 4, in turn, have an extra zero-sequence directional supervision implemented for their time-delayed operation after the memory expires. Consequently, Zone 1 is recommended as an underreaching element, and Zones 2 through 4 are recommended as overreaching elements and for time-delayed tripping. The relay uses offset ground directional overcurrent functions as an optional supplement of the ground distance protection for pilot-aided schemes. The elements are described in more details in the Ground Directional Overcurrent section. The relay provides for an adaptive distance reach control to cope with the overreaching and sub-synchronous oscillations when applied to, or in a near vicinity of series compensated lines. More details can be found in the Application on Series Compensated Lines section. The distance elements use phase angle comparators to shape their characteristics as described in the Distance Characteristics section. The voltage and current phasors are estimated using optimized techniques as explained in the next section. 8.1.2 PHASOR ESTIMATION The relay samples its input AC signals at 64 samples per power system cycle. A fast and accurate frequency tracking mechanism ensures accurate filtering and phasor estimation during off-nominal frequency conditions. The phasor estimation process for both currents and voltages is based on the commonly used Fourier algorithm. Due to a different nature of signal distortions in the current and voltage signals digital pre-filtering algorithms have been, however, designed and optimized separately for the current and voltage channels. The current signals are pre-filtered using an improved digital MIMIC filter. The filter removes effectively the DC component(s) guaranteeing transient overshoot below 2% regardless of the initial magnitude and time constant of the dc component(s). The filter has significantly better frequency response for higher frequencies as compared with a classical MIMIC filter. This was possible without introducing any significant phase delay thanks to the high sampling rate used by the relay. The voltage signals are pre-filtered using a special digital filter designed to cope with CVT transients. The patented filter combines filtering and memory actions enabling the relay to cope with CVT noise under high Source Impedance Ratios (SIRs). The filter controls underestimation of the fault voltage magnitude to less than 1% of the nominal and prevents certain phase angle anomalies that can be encountered under heavy CVT noise and high SIRs.
GE Multilin
8-1
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1.3 DISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS
a) DEFINITIONS The relay shapes its distance characteristics using phase angle comparators and voltage and current phasors estimated as described in the previous section. The following definitions pertain to all of the distance functions: IA, IB, IC IG VA, VB, VC ()_1 ()_2 ()_0 ()M Z ZD ZR ZL K0 K0M Phase A, B, and C current phasors ground current from a parallel line Phase A to ground, Phase B to ground, and Phase C to ground voltage phasors positive-sequence phasor of () derived from the phase quantities negative-sequence phasor of () derived from the phase quantities zero-sequence phasor of () derived from the phase quantities memorized value of () reach impedance (REACH RCA) directional characteristic impedance (1 DIR RCA) right blinder characteristic impedance: ZR = RGT BLD sin (RGT BLD RCA) 1 (RGT BLD RCA 90) left blinder characteristic impedance: ZL = LFT BLD sin (LFT BLD RCA) 1 (LFT BLD RCA + 90) zero-sequence compensating factor: K0 = (Z0/Z1 MAG Z0/Z1 ANG) 1 mutual zero-sequence compensating factor: K0M = 1/3 x Z0M/Z1 MAG Z0M/Z1 ANG
b) MHO CHARACTERISTIC The dynamic 100% memory polarized mho characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between: AB phase element: BC phase element: CA phase element: A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: (IA IB) Z (VA VB) and (VA VB)_1M (IB IC) Z (VB VC) and (VB VC)_1M (IC IA) Z (VC VA) and (VC VA)_1M IA Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VA and VA_1M IB Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VB and VB_1M IC Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VC and VC_1M
The limit angle of the comparator is adjustable enabling the user to shape the characteristic as a mho or a lens as shown in the figures below.The memory-polarized mho characteristic has an excellent directional integrity built-in as explained in the Memory Polarization section.
X Reach setting X Reach setting Comparator angle setting < 90
Comparator angle setting= 90
R MHO CHARACTERISTIC
837715A2.CDR
R LENS CHARACTERISTIC
837714A2.CDR
Figure 81: MHO AND LENS CHARACTERISTICS c) REACTANCE CHARACTERISTIC The reactance characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between: AB phase element: BC phase element: CA phase element: (IA IB) Z (VA VB) and (IA IB) Z (IB IC) Z (VB VC) and (IB IC) Z (IC IA) Z (VC VA) and (IC IA) Z
8-2
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: IA Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VA and I_0 Z IB Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VB and I_0 Z IC Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VC and I_0 Z
If the MHO characteristic is selected, the limit angle of the comparator is adjustable concurrently with the limit angle of the mho characteristic, resulting in a tent shape complementing the lens characteristic being effectively applied. If the Quad characteristic is selected, the reactance comparator constitutes the upper boundary of the operating region. The reactance characteristic enables the relay to avoid overreaching on resistive faults during heavy load conditions. d) DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC The directional characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between: AB phase element: BC phase element: CA phase element: A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: (IA IB) ZD and (VA VB)_1M (IB IC) ZD and (VB VC)_1M (IC IA) ZD and (VC VA)_1M I_0 ZD and VA_1M IA_2 ZD and VA_1M I_0 ZD and VB_1M IB_2 ZD and VB_1M I_0 ZD and VC_1M IC_2 ZD and VC_1M
The characteristic and limit angles of the directional comparator are adjustable independently from the mho and reactance comparators. The directional characteristic improves directional integrity of the distance functions. e) RIGHT BLINDER The right blinder characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between the following signals: AB phase element: BC phase element: CA phase element: A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: (IA IB) ZR (VA VB) and (IA IB) ZR (IB IC) ZR (VB VC) and (IB IC) ZR (IC IA) ZR (VC VA) and (IC IA) ZR IA ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR VA and IA ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR IB ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR VB and IB ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR IC ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR VC and IC ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR
The blinders apply to the Quad characteristic only. f) LEFT BLINDER The left blinder characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between the following signals: AB phase element: BC phase element: CA phase element: A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: (IA IB) ZL (VA VB) and (IA IB) ZL (IB IC) ZL (VB VC) and (IB IC) ZL (IC IA) ZL (VC VA) and (IC IA) ZL IA ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL VA and IA ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL IB ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL VB and IB ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL IC ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL VC and IC ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL
The blinders apply to the Quad characteristic only. g) FAULT-TYPE CHARACTERISTIC The fault-type characteristic applies to ground elements only and is achieved by checking the angle between: A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: I_0 I_0 I_0 and and and IA_2; IB_2 IC_2
The limit angle of the comparator is not adjustable and equals 50. The fault-type characteristic is intended to block the ground distance elements during double-line-to-ground faults.
GE Multilin
8-3
8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS h) ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC
8 THEORY OF OPERATION
The extra zero-sequence characteristic applies to ground Zones 2 to 4 only and is achieved by checking angles between: A ground element: B ground element: C ground element: I_0 ZD I_0 ZD I_0 ZD and and and V_0 V_0 V_0
The limit angle of the comparator is not adjustable and equals 90. The zero-sequence directional characteristic improves directional integrity for time-delayed operations after the memory expires. i) OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION The overcurrent supervision responds to the following currents: AB phase element: BC phase element: CA phase element: A, B, C ground element: (IA IB) / (IB IC) / (IC IA) / 3 I_0 3 3 3
The following tables summarize the characteristics of the distance elements Table 81: MHO PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS
CHARACTERISTIC Variable MHO Reactance Directional COMPARATOR INPUTS IZV IZV I ZD V_1M IZ V_1M LIMIT ANGLE COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT
Table 82: MHO GROUND DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

CHARACTERISTIC Variable MHO Reactance Directional Directional Fault-type Zero-sequence COMPARATOR INPUTS IZV IZV I_0 ZD I_2 ZD I_0 I_0 ZD V_1M I_0 Z V_1M V_1M I_2 V_0 LIMIT ANGLE COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT 50 (removed during open pole conditions) 90 (Zones 2, 3 and 4 only; removed for Zones 2 and 3 during open pole conditions)
Table 83: QUAD PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

CHARACTERISTIC Reactance Directional Right Blinder Left Blinder COMPARATOR INPUTS IZV I ZD I ZR V I ZL V IZ V_1M I ZR I ZL LIMIT ANGLE COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT 90 90
Table 84: QUAD GROUND DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

CHARACTERISTIC Reactance Directional Directional Right Blinder Left Blinder Fault-type Zero-sequence COMPARATOR INPUTS IZV I_0 ZD I_2 ZD I ZR V I ZL V I_0 I_0 ZD I_0 Z V_1M V_1M I ZR I ZL I_2 V_0 LIMIT ANGLE COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT DIR COMP LIMIT 90 90 50 (removed during open pole conditions) 90 (Zones 2, 3, and 4 only; removed for Zones 2 and 3 during open pole conditions)
8-4
GE Multilin
8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS 8.1.4 MEMORY POLARIZATION
All distance functions use memory polarization. The positive-sequence voltage either memorized or actual is used as a polarizing signal. The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage remains above 80% of its nominal value for five power system cycles. The memory voltage is a three-cycle old voltage. Once established, the memory is applied for the user-specified time interval. The memory timer is started when the voltage drops below 80% of nominal. After the memory expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If it is higher than 10% of nominal, the actual voltage is used; if lower, the memory voltage continues to be used. The memory-polarized mho has an extra directional integrity built-in as illustrated below. The self-polarized mho characteristic is shifted in the reverse direction for a forward fault by an amount proportional to the source impedance, and in the forward direction for a reverse fault.
X
Memory-polarized mho (Reverse fault) Memory-polarized mho (Forward fault)
Self-polarized mho
R
837719A1.CDR
Figure 82: DYNAMIC SHIFT OF THE MHO CHARACTERISTIC The same desirable effect of memory polarization applies to the directional comparator of the Quad characteristic.
Memorypolarized (Reverse fault) Self-polarized
837724A1.CDR
Memorypolarized (Forward fault)
Figure 83: DYNAMIC SHIFT OF THE MEMORY-POLARIZED DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC Mutual zero-sequence compensation may raise concerns regarding directional integrity on reverse faults in the situation when the relay gets overcompensated. This problem does not affect the D60 because its ground distance elements use zero-sequence and negative-sequence currents in extra directional comparators. Both the currents are from the protected line and are not affected by any compensation as the latter applies only to the reach defining comparators: the mho, reactance and blinder characteristics.
GE Multilin
8-5
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1.5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS ANALYSIS
a) DESCRIPTION This subsection shows how to analyze the operation of the distance elements in steady states using the results of short circuit studies. All quantities are secondary ohms, volts, and amperes. Ground phase A and phase AB distance elements are analyzed. Assume the following settings have been entered: Phase Rotation: ABC Right Blinder Reach: 10 Nominal Secondary Voltage: 69.28 V Right Blinder RCA: 88 Distance Reach: 14 Left Blinder Reach: 5 Distance RCA: 88 Left Blinder RCA: 88 Assume the following signals are injected to the relay: VA = 64.71 V 0.0 (pre-fault) VA = 25.43 V 19.9 VB = 80.22 V 133.5 VC = 77.33 V 135.7 Based on the entered setting the relay calculates: K0 = 3.58 15.2 K0M= 0 Z = 14.00 88 For the assumed steady-state injection the relay calculates: VA_1 VA_1M I_0 IA_2 = 58.83 V 2.1 = 64.71 V 0.0 = 1.37 A 68.2 = 1.37 A 68.1 V_0 (VAVB)_1 (VAVB)_1M IAIB = 29.18 V 8.4 = 93.35 V 32.0 = 112.08 V 30.0 = 7.39 A 109.1 ZD = 1 88 ZR = 9.99 2 ZL = 4.99 178 IA IB IC = 4.47 A 107.8 = 2.92 A 68.9 = 2.93 A 51.1 Directional RCA: 88 Z0/Z1 Magnitude: 4.55 Overcurrent supervision: 3 A Z0/Z1 Angle: 12 Distance Comparator limit angle: 75 Z0M/Z1 Magnitude: 0 Directional Comparator limit angle: 75
b) MHO PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT (BEFORE MEMORY EXPIRES) IA Z + I_0 K0 Z + IA K0M Z VA = 103.33 V 3.9 VA_1M = 64.71 V 0.0 IA_2 ZD = 1.37 V 19.8 I_0 Z = 19.11 V 19.8 I_0 ZD = 1.37 V 19.8 Overcurrent supervision: | 3 I_0 | = 4.09 A > 3 A Mho difference angle = | 3.9 0 | = 3.9 < 75 Reactance difference angle = | 3.9 19.8 | = 23.7 < 75 Zero-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8 0.0 | = 19.8 < 75 Negative-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8 0.0 | = 19.8 < 75 Fault-type comparator difference angle = | 19.8 19.8 | = 0.0 < 50
All four comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied. The MHO phase A ground element will operate for this fault.
8-6
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION c) MHO PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT (AFTER MEMORY EXPIRES)
After the memory expires, the relay checks the actual positive-sequence voltage and compares it with 10% of the nominal voltage: | VA_1 | = 58.83 V > 0.1 69.28 V After the memory expires the relay will use the actual voltage for polarization. IA Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VA = 103.33 V 3.9 VA_1 = 58.83 V 2.1 IA_2 ZD = 1.37 V 19.8 I_0 Z = 19.11 V 19.8 I_0 ZD = 1.37 V 19.8 Overcurrent supervision: | 3 I_0 | = 4.09 A > 3 A Mho difference angle = | 3.9 (2.1) | = 1.8 < 75 Reactance difference angle = | 3.9 19.8 | = 23.7 < 75 Zero-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8 (2.1) | = 21.9 < 75 Negative-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8 (2.1) | = 21.9 < 75 Fault-type comparator difference angle = | 19.8 19.8 | = 0.0 < 50
All four comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied. The Zone 1 MHO phase A ground element will operate for this fault. Zero-sequence directional difference angle for Zones 2 through 4 (phase A) = | 19.8 8.4 | = 11.4 < 90.
Zones 2 through 4 phase A ground elements will pick-up, time-out and operate. d) MHO AB PHASE ELEMENT (IA IB) Z (VA VB) = 88.65 V 78.7 (VA VB)_1M = 112.08 V 30.0 (IA IB) Z = 103.50 V 21.2 (IA IB) ZD = 7.39 V 21.2 Overcurrent supervision: | (IA IB) / 3 | = 4.27 A > 3 A Mho difference angle = | 78.7 30.0 | = 108.7 > 75 Reactance difference angle = | 78.7 (21.2) | = 57.5 < 75 Directional difference angle = | 21.2 30.0 | = 51.2 < 75 The mho comparator is not satisfied. The MHO AB phase element will not operate for this fault. Repeating the above analysis one concludes that out of the six distance elements only the ground element in phase A will operate for this fault.
GE Multilin
8-7
8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS e) QUAD PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT (BEFORE MEMORY EXPIRES) IA Z + I_0 K0 Z + IG K0M Z VA = 103.33 V 3.9 VA_1M I_0 Z IA_2 ZD I_0 ZD IA ZR + I_0 K0 ZR IA ZL + I_0 K0 ZL = 64.71 V 0.0 = 19.11 V 19.8 = 1.37 V 19.8 = 1.37 V 19.8 = 91.5 V 93.0 = 45.8 V 82.9
IA ZR + I_0 K0 ZR + IG K0M ZR VA= 87.6 V 109.2 IA ZL + I_0 K0 ZL + IG K0M ZL VA= 57.0 V 108.7 Overcurrent supervision: | 3 I_0 | = 4.09 A > 3 A Reactance difference angle = | 3.9 19.8 | = 23.7 < 75 Zero-sequence difference angle = | 19.8 0.0 | = 19.8 < 75 Negative-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8 0.0 | = 19.8 < 75 Right blinder difference angle = | 93.0 (109.2) | = 16.2 < 90 Left blinder difference angle = | 82.9 108.7 | = 25.8 < 90 Fault-type comparator difference angle = | 19.8 19.8 | = 0.0 < 50
All six comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied. The Quad Phase A ground element will operate for this fault.
8-8
GE Multilin
8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS 8.2.1 DESCRIPTION
8.2PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS
As a Wye-Delta transformer introduces discontinuity for the zero-sequence circuit, the ground distance protection cannot be applied, except special circumstances, to respond to faults behind the transformer. The phase distance elements, however, could be developed so that both accurate reach and correct fault phase identification is retained for faults behind the power transformer as seen from the relaying point. Without appropriate compensation, the relay's reach would depend on a type of fault, creating considerable difficulties in applying the relay. The D60 provides for any location of the VTs and CTs with respect to the involved power transformer and the direction of any given zone. In the following equations, the VT and CT locations are referenced as None if the transformer is not present between the CT/VT and the intended reach point. Otherwise, the location is to be selected as a type of a transformer as seen from the VT/CT position towards the intended reach point. The following figure explains the adopted rules.
(a) (b)
delta
wye, 330o lag
delta
wye, 330o lag
Z4 Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z4 Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1 Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c)
delta
wye, 330o lag
(e)
L1 L2
Z4 Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1
Zone 4 Zone 1 ZL1 ZT ZL2
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Figure 84: APPLICATIONS OF THE PHS DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS
GE Multilin
8-9
Table 85: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR DELTA-WYE TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER CONNECTION None LOOP AB BC CA Dy1 AB CURRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION
IA IB IB IC IC IA 3I A 3I B 3I C I AB_21P = 3I C I BC_21P = 3I A I CA_21P = 3I B I AB_21P = 3I B I BC_21P = 3I C I CA_21P = 3I A I AB_21P = 3I A I BC_21P = 3I B I CA_21P = 3I C I AB_21P = 3I C I BC_21P = 3I A I CA_21P = 3I B I AB_21P = 3I B I BC_21P = 3I C I CA_21P = 3I A
V AB V BC V CA 1------ ( V AB V CA ) 3 1------ ( V BC V AB ) 3 1------ ( V CA V BC ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V BC V CA ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V CA V AB ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V AB V BC ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V BC V AB ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V CA V BC ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V AB V CA ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V CA V AB ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V AB V BC ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V BC V CA ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V CA V BC ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V AB V CA ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V BC V AB ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V AB V BC ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V BC V CA ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V CA V AB ) 3
BC
CA
Dy3
AB
BC
CA
Dy5
AB
BC
CA
Dy7
AB
BC
CA
Dy9
AB
8
BC CA
Dy11
AB
BC
CA
8-10
GE Multilin
Table 86: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR WYE-DELTA TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER CONNECTION Yd1 LOOP AB CURRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION
1I AB_21P = ------ ( 2I A I B I C ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( 2I B I A I C ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( 2I C I A I B ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( I A + I B 2I C ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( I B + I C 2I A ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( I A + I C 2I B ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( 2I B I A I C ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( 2I C I A I B ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( 2I A I B I C ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( I B + I C 2I A ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( I A + I C 2I B ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( I A + I B 2I C ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( 2I C I A I B ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( 2I A I B I C ) 3 1 I CA_21P = ------ ( 2I B I A I C ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( I A + I C 2I B ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( I A + I B 2I C ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( I B + I C 2I A ) 3
V AB_21P = V BC_21P = V CA_21P =
3V A 3V B 3V C
BC
CA
Yd3
AB
V AB_21P = 3V C V BC_21P = 3V A V CA_21P = 3V B V AB_21P = V BC_21P = V CA_21P = 3V B 3V C 3V A
BC
CA
Yd5
AB
BC
CA
Yd7
AB
V AB_21P = 3V A V BC_21P = 3V B V CA_21P = 3V C V AB_21P = V BC_21P = V CA_21P = 3V C 3V A 3V B
BC
CA
Yd9
AB
BC
CA
Yd11
AB
V AB_21P = 3V B V BC_21P = 3V C V CA_21P = 3V A
BC
CA
GE Multilin
8-11
Equations from the Current Transformation and Voltage Transformation columns are used to derive inputs to the three (AB, BC, and CA) phase distance elements. For example, if the CTs are located at the delta side of the Delta-Wye 11 transformer, and a given zone is set to look through the transformer into the system connected to the Wye winding, the CT location setting for that zone shall be set to Dy11 and the relay would use 3I B instead of a traditional I A I B for the AB phase distance element. The current supervision pickup setting applies to the currents specified in the Current Transformation columns. A distance zone originates at the location of the VTs (regardless of the location of the CTs). For more information on settings please refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings. 8.2.2 EXAMPLE Consider the system shown below:
150 MVA, 10% 13.8kV/315kV delta wye, 330 lag ZL = 30.1185 AB
H VT = 13.8kV/120V CT = 8000:5
X VT = 315kV/120V CT = 300:5 0.68885 2.5788.4
837727A2.CDR
Figure 85: SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Normally, in order to respond to the fault shown in the figure, a distance relay shall be applied at the relaying point X. The relay input signals at this location are shown in the following table.
INPUT VA VB VC IA IB IC PRIMARY 100.4 kV 7.32 97.23 kV 53.4 181.8 kV 150.0 1.288 kA 27.6 1.288 kA 152.4 0 SECONDARY 38.25 V 7.32 37.04 V 53.4 69.26 V 150.0 21.47 A 27.6 21.47 A 152.4 0
If installed at the location X, the relay would use the following input signals for its phase AB distance element: V = VAB = 77.402 kV 57.5 primary or 29.49 V 57.5 secondary I = IA IB = 2.576 kA 27.6 primary or 42.93 A 27.6 secondary And consequently it would see an apparent impedance of: Zapp = V / I = 30.05 85 primary or 0.687 85 secondary
8-12
GE Multilin
If applied at location H, the relay sees the following input signals:

INPUT VA VB VC IA IB IC PRIMARY 7.584 kV 5.59 6.269 kV 120.1 7.751 kV 125.5 16.976 kA 27.6 33.952 kA 152.4 16.976 kA 27.6 SECONDARY 69.95 V 5.59 54.52 V 120.1 65.84 V 125.5 10.61 A 27.6 21.22 A 152.4 10.61 A 27.6
The relay is set as follows:

XFMR VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 XFMR CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Consequently, the following signals are applied to the phase AB distance element: 1V = ------ V AB V BC = 10.861 kV 59.9 primary or 94.45 V 59.9 secondary 3 I = 3I B = 58.860 kA 27.6 primary or 36.75 A 27.6 secondary This results in the following apparent impedance: 94.45 kV 59.9Z app = V = --------------------------------------------- = 2.570 87.5 secondary --I 36.75 kA 27.6
(EQ 8.3) (EQ 8.1)
(EQ 8.2)
The above value is a correct measure of the distance from the VT location to the fault. For relay location 2, this certainly includes the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer: 10- ( 13.8 kV ) Z T ( at 13.8 kV ) = --------- --------------------------- = 0.127 90 100 150 MVA 13.8 2 Z L ( at 13.8 kV ) = 30.11 ---------- = 0.05779 85 315 Thus, 0.127 90 + 0.05779 85 = 0.1847 88.4 primary side or 2.569 88.4 on the secondary side. The above example illustrates how the relay maintains correct reach for fault behind power transformers. When installed at X, the relay shall be set to 0.687 85 secondary in order to reach to the fault shown in the figure. When installed at H, the relay shall be set to 2.569 88.4 to ensure exactly same coverage. See Chapter 9: Application of Settings for more information on setting calculations.
2
(EQ 8.4)
GE Multilin
8-13
8.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT 8.3GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.3.1 DESCRIPTION
Consider the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element. As illustrated below, the negative-sequence voltage could be low during internal fault conditions.
(a) (b)
S_op S_pol I_2 x Z ECA
V_2 V_2 UR
-V_2
I_2
(c)
(d)
I_2 x Z V_2 > I_2 * Z_2line -V_2 S_pol S_op -V_2 ECA V_2
I_2 UR
Figure 86: OFFSET IMPEDANCE AUGMENTATION In order to ensure operation of the element under such circumstances the angle comparator uses a polarizing voltage augmented by the negative-sequence current as per following equations: Forward-looking element: S_pol = V_2 + I_2 Z_offset 1 ECA S_op = I_2 1 ECA Reverse-looking element: S_pol = V_2 + I_2 Z_offset 1 ECA S_op = I_2 1 ECA ECA = forward ECA angle (maximum torque angle); Z_offset = offset impedance
where:
The effect of the augmentation for forward and reverse fault is shown in the figures above. As long as the offset impedance is not higher than the negative-sequence line impedance the element will ensure correct and fast fault direction identification for both forward and reverse faults. The same principle applies to the neutral directional overcurrent element. 8.3.2 EXAMPLE Consider relay input signals as in the Distance Elements Analysis section and assume an offset impedance of 4 and ECA and limit angles of 88 and 90, respectively. The relay calculates the following negative-sequence quantities:
V_2 = 6.39 V 159.6; I_2 = 1.37 A 68.1; I_1 = 2.94 A 144.2 and the following signals for the directional unit of the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element: Forward-looking element: S_pol = 11.87 V 20.2 S_op = 1.37 V 20.2 Reverse-looking element: S_pol = 11.87 V 20.2 S_op = 1.37 V 160.0
After comparing the angles, a solid forward indication is given. Assume further the pickup setting of 0.25 A for both forward and reverse directions, and the Negative-sequence mode setting entered for the overcurrent unit of the element. The relay calculates the operating signal using the positivesequence restraint: I_op = |I_2| |I_1| / 8 = 1.003 A > 0.25 A. The overcurrent unit will pickup and the element will operate in the forward direction.
8-14
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.4SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 8.4.1 DESCRIPTION
Faults on or in a close vicinity of series compensated lines may create problems for distance protection: Voltage and/or current inversion may lead to false direction discrimination by directional elements. This may potentially include both a failure to operate on a forward in-zone fault as well as misoperation on a reverse fault. Both distance and overcurrent directional elements can be affected. Series-capacitors and their overvoltage protection equipment (air gaps and/or Metal-Oxide Varistors) have a steadystate overreaching effect on the apparent impedance seen by the relay - a forward fault may appear much closer to the relay as compared with the actual fault location. The apparent impedance may be shifted towards the relay by as much as the total reactance of the series capacitors placed between the potential source of the relay and the fault point. This extreme steady-state overreach happens during low-current faults when the air-gaps do not flashover or the MOVs do not conduct any significant current. In addition to the above steady-state overreach effect; sub-synchronous oscillations in both currents and voltages may cause significant transient overreach.
Distance protection elements of the D60 deal with the problem of voltage inversion by using 100% memory polarized directional comparators. As the memory duration is set longer that the slowest fault clearing time for reverse faults, it is guaranteed that the distance element would not pick-up on reverse faults should the voltage inversion happen. At the same time, it is guaranteed that the distance elements would pick-up for all forward faults regardless of any voltage inversion as long as the memory voltage is used. Before the memory expires the relay would respond to any fault on the protected line. Stepped distance backup zones operate after the memory voltage expires. But the backup protection responds to distant faults that do not cause any inversion of the positive-sequence voltage. As a result, the time-delayed stepped-distance zones are guaranteed to operate. Distance protection elements of the D60 deal with the problem of current inversion by using a multi-input-comparator approach as described in the Distance Characteristics subsection. Should the current inversion happen, the distance elements are secure on reverse faults because multiple conditions involving fault-loop, negative-sequence and zero-sequence currents and the memory voltage are checked prior to declaring a forward fault. On close-in forward faults beyond the series capacitors as seen from the relaying point, the current inversion phenomenon may take place for a short period of time. The condition cannot sustain for a long time as very high fault currents would occur causing large voltage drops across the series capacitors and prompting the overvoltage protection of the capacitors to operate quickly. This would effectively remove the series compensation and eliminate the current inversion. However, when the currents used by distance comparator (fault-loop current for ground and phase distance protection, and the negative- and zero-sequence currents for ground elements) stay shifted by more than 90 degrees from their natural fault position determined by the user as the element characteristic angle, the distance elements may fail to pick-up on such a forward fault for the brief period of current inversion. This is an inherent attribute of the 100% memory polarized mho element, and not a weakness particular to the D60 relay. Therefore, for dependability, it is recommended to use high-set phase overcurrent protection for direct tripping on close-in faults potentially causing current inversion, and overreaching ground fault directional overcurrent functions (such as negative-sequence, ground or neutral) for communication-aided schemes. The problem of steady-state overreaching due to the negative reactance of the series capacitors may be addressed in the D60 in a traditional way by shortening the reach of an underreaching distance elements to the net inductive reactance of the line between the potential source and the far end busbar(s). This generic approach has two major drawbacks. First, it leaves large portion of the line uncovered by the directly tripping distance protection. Second, it does not solve the transient overreaching problem caused by sub-synchronous oscillations. Therefore, the D60 offers a unique option for dynamic reach control that is effectively based on the magnitude of the current flowing through the series capacitor bank(s). The underreaching distance functions can be set as for plain uncompensated line, i.e. using the impedance of the line alone, and the relay would control an effective reach accordingly using the current magnitude as illustrated in the figure below. The reach is reduced sufficiently to cope with both steady-state and transient overreach phenomena. For large degrees of compensation and small-current faults, the transient overreach may be as high as 100%. This means that fast distance protection is not achievable. The adaptive D60's mechanism would guarantee security on external faults. Overreaching ground fault directional overcurrent functions (such as negative-sequence, ground or neutral) shall be used for dependability.
GE Multilin
8-15
FAR -E BUS ND BAR
THE REACH IS DYNAMICALLY REDUCED BY VL/abs(I)
SET REACH (ZR) ACTUAL REACH FOR VERY HIGH CURRENTS ACTUAL REACH IS A FUNCTION OF CURRENT MAGNITUDE
ACTUAL REACH FOR VERY SMALL CURRENTS
837729A1.CDR
Figure 87: DYNAMIC REACH CONTROL Section (a) of the figure below shows the effect of adaptive reach control for low-current external fault. The reach is reduced sufficiently to cope with both transient and steady-state overreach. Section (b) shows a high-current external fault. The air gaps or MOVs conduct majority of the fault current and neither steady-state nor transient overreach takes place. The relay does not reduce its reach as it is not necessary. Section (c) shows a high-current internal fault. Because of the large current, the reach is not reduced and the element responds to this internal fault. Traditional approach would leave this fault out of the relay reach. The neutral and negative-sequence directional protection functions of the relay cope with the voltage and/or current inversions by adding appropriate offset to their polarizing signals as explained in the Ground Directional Overcurrent section. The offset impedance can always be successfully selected to guarantee correct fault direction discrimination regardless of the degree of compensation and location of the series capacitors and the potential source. Refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings for detailed recommendations on settings for series compensation applications.
8-16
GE Multilin
(a)
LOW-CURRENT EXTERNAL FAULT
Set reach
FAR-E N BUSB D AR RF
Z SC&MOV
Impedance Trajectory
Steady-state apparent impedance
SC
The reach is safely reduced R
M OV
(b)
HIGH-CURRENT EXTERNAL FAULT
Set reach
FAR-E N BUSB D AR RF
Impedance Trajectory (no subsynchronous oscillations) Steady-state apparent impedance
SC
M OV
The reach is not reduced R
(c)
HIGH-CURRENT INTERNAL FAULT
FAR-E N BUSB D AR
Set reach
Impedance Trajectory (no subsynchronous oscillations)

RF
Steady-state apparent impedance

SC
M OV
The reach is not reduced R
837730A1.CDR
Figure 88: DYNAMIC REACH FOR INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULTS
GE Multilin
8-17
8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING 8.5SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING a) INTRODUCTION
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5.1 OVERVIEW
Single pole operations make use of many features of the relay. At the minimum, the Trip Output, Recloser, Breaker Control, Open Pole Detector, and Phase Selector must be fully programmed and in service; and either protection elements or digital inputs representing fault detection must be available for successful operation. When single pole trip-and-reclose is required overall control within the relay is performed by the Trip Output element. This element includes interfaces with pilot aided schemes, the Line Pickup, Breaker Control, and Breaker Failure elements. Single pole operations are based on use of the Phase Selector to identify the type of the fault, to eliminate incorrect fault identification that can be made by distance elements in some circumstances and to provide trip initiation from elements that are not capable of any fault type identification, such as high-set negative-sequence directional overcurrent element. The scheme is also designed to make use of the advantages provided by communications channels with multiple-bit capacities for fault identification.
Phase Selector Volts and Amps Reset Output Block Specific Protection Elements
AR RIP Fault Locator
Protection Elements Inputs PilotAided Schemes Setting Inputs Setting Outputs
Trip Output
Setting Setting 1-Pole Trip Request
Volts and Amps
1-Pole Trip
Open Pole
Trip A or B or C
Detector
Communications Channels AG BG CG Setting SLG Faulted Phase Permission
1-Pole Operation
Initiate Breaker Failure Breaker 1 and 2 Pole State Breaker 1 and 2 OOS
Reset
Breaker Control 3-Pole Trip Setting
Line Pickup Multi - Phase Void
3-Pole Trip Request
S e t t i n g
Inputs
B k r 1 & 2
Outputs
CLOSE 1 CLOSE 2 CLOSE 1 CLOSE 2

Trip AR Initiate 3-Pole Initiate Initiate Recloser
Setting AR Force 3-P
Force 3-Pole Operation
3-Pole Operation
Operator Setting
Reclose Request
Multi-Phase
837026A4.CDR
Figure 89: SINGLE-POLE OPERATION The Trip Output element receives requests for single and three pole trips and three pole reclose initiation, which it then processes to generate outputs that are used to: determine whether a single or three pole operation should be performed initiate tripping of breaker poles A, B and C, either individually or as a group initiate Breaker Failure protection for phases A, B and C, either individually or as a group notify the Open Pole Detector when a single pole operation is imminent
8-18
GE Multilin
8 THEORY OF OPERATION initiate either single or three pole reclosing notify the Phase Selector when a trip operation is imminent
8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING
When notified that a single pole operation has been initiated Open Pole Detector will: initiate blocking of protection elements that could potentially maloperate when a breaker pole is open instruct the Phase Selector to de-assert all outputs, as an Open Pole invalidates calculations.
The operation of the scheme on a line in a single breaker arrangement will be described. The line is protected by a D60 relay using the Line Pickup and Zone 1 Phase and Ground Distance elements, and a Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip scheme (using Zone 2 Phase and Ground distance elements as well as Negative-Sequence Directional Overcurrent elements, GND DIR O/C FWD: NEG SEQ OC1 FWD, GND DIR O/C REV: NEG SEQ OC1 REV). Zone 1 is configured to issue a single-pole trip when appropriate (TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1: GND DIST Z1 OP, TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-2: PHS DIST Z1 OP). By default the POTT scheme will issue a single-pole trip. It is assumed that when tripping three-poles both the Zone 1 and the POTT shall initiate three-pole reclosing. This is achieved by setting TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1: POTT TRIP 3P, TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-2: GND DIST Z1 OP, and TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-3: PHS DIST Z1 OP. It is assumed for this discussion that the relay features that are shown on Single Pole Operation diagram above have all been programmed for the application and are in service. The description begins with line breakers open at both the local and remote ends, and the operation of the scheme is described in chronological order. Because the line is de-energized the Line Pickup element is armed. The Recloser is presently enabled. An operator requests that Breaker Control close the breaker, and it operates output relays to close breaker poles A, B and C. This operator manual close request is also forwarded from Breaker Control to Recloser, which becomes disabled, de-asserting its Enabled output. This output is transferred to Trip Output, where it converts any input request for a single pole operation into a three-pole operation. At the Recloser, the AR1 BLK TIME @ MAN CLOSE timer is started. The breaker closes and status monitoring contacts on the breaker poles change state; the new breaker pole states are reported to Breaker Control, which in turn transfers these states to the Recloser, Trip Output, Breaker Failure and Open Pole Detector. Because a fault is not detected the AR1 BLK TIME @ MAN CLOSE times out and the Recloser is enabled, which asserts the Enabled output, informing the Trip Output element that single pole trip operations are now permitted. When normal voltage appears on the line the Line Pickup element is disarmed. As the local line breaker has not tripped the operator closes the breaker at the remote end of the line, placing the line in service. Several scenarios are considered below. b) SLG FAULT An AG fault occurs close to the considered relay. Immediately after the fault, the Disturbance Detector (50DD) picks-up and activates the Phase Selector. The Phase Selector recognizes an AG fault by asserting its PHASE SELECT AG operand. Ground distance Z1 (AG element) responds to the fault. As the fault is close to the relay the phase distance Z1 (AB, CA elements) may respond to this fault as well. In any case, a single-pole operation is requested by Z1 via the GND DIST Z1 OP and/or PHS DIST Z1 OP operands. At this moment the request to trip is placed for the Trip Output. As the fault is recognized as an AG fault, the TRIP PHASE A operand is asserted by the Trip Output. This signal is passed to the Breaker Control scheme and results in tripping pole A of the breaker. Simultaneously with the TRIP PHASE A operand, the TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted. This operand activates the OPEN POLE detector. The latter detector responds to the TRIP PHASE A signal by declaring phase A open by asserting OPEN POLE OP FA (even before it is actually opened). The TRIP PHASE A signal resets only after the breaker actually operates as indicated by its auxiliary contact. At this moment the Open Pole Detector responds to the breaker position and continues to indicate phase A opened. This indication results in establishing blocking signals for neutral and negative-sequence overcurrent elements (OPEN POLE BLK N), and distance elements (OPEN POLE BLK AB, OPEN POLE BLK CA). The two latter operands block phase distance AB and CA elements, respectively (all zones); the OPEN POLE FA OP blocks the ground distance AG elements (all zones). As a result, the Z1 OP and Z2 PKP operands that were picked-up reset immediately. The following distance elements remain operational guarding the line against evolving faults: BG, CG and BC. As Z2 and/or negative-sequence directional elements pick-up due to the fault, the permission to trip is keyed to the remote end. Assume here that a single-bit channel is used. If so, no extra information is sent to the remote end, just permission to trip sent over the TX1 operand. Upon receiving permission to trip over the RX1, the POTT decides to trip. The scheme will check the Phase Selector for phase type identification and will issue a trip for phase A by asserting the POTT TRIP A operand. This operand is passed to the Trip Output and results in exactly same action as described above for Z1.
GE Multilin
8-19
Depending on response times, the actual trip is initiated either by the Z1 or by the POTT. At the moment TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted, the Phase Selector resets and no other trip action could take place. After the trip command is issued all the picked up elements are forced to reset by the Open Pole Detector. The TRIP 1-POLE operand initiates automatically a single-pole autoreclose. The AR is started and asserts its AR RIP operand. This operand keeps blocking the Phase Selector so that it does not respond to any subsequent events. At the same time the operand removes zero-sequence directional supervision from ground distance zones 2 and 3 so that they could respond to a single-line-to-ground fault during open pole conditions. 1.25 cycles after the AR is initiated, the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP operand is asserted. This operand acts as an enabler for any existing trip request. In this case none of the protection elements is picked up at this time, therefore no more trips are initiated. When the Recloser dead time interval is complete it signals the Breaker Control element to close the breaker. The Breaker Control element operates output relays to close the breaker. When pole A of the breaker closes this new status is reported to the Breaker Control element, which transfers this data to the Breaker Failure, Recloser, Open Pole Detector and Trip Output elements. The response at Breaker Failure is dependent on the programming of that element. The response at Recloser is not relevant to this discussion. At the Open Pole Detector, the blocking signals to protection elements are de-asserted. If the fault was transient the reset time would expire at the Recloser and the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP and RIP outputs would be de-asserted, returning all features to the state described at the beginning of this description. If the fault was permanent appropriate protection elements would detect it and place a trip request for the Trip Output element. As the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is still asserted, the request is executed as a three-pole trip. The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip, except the Recloser will go to lockout upon the next initiation (depending on the number of shots programmed). c) SLG FAULT EVOLVING INTO LLG When an AG fault occurs the events unfold initially as in the previous example. If the fault evolves quickly, the Phase Selector will change its initial assessment from AG to ABG fault and when the trip request is placed either by the Z1 or the POTT, a trip-pole trip will be initiated. If this is the case, all three TRIP PHASE A, B and C operands will be asserted. The command is passed to the Breaker Control element and results in a three-pole trip. At the same time the Recloser is initiated as per settings of the Trip Output. As the TRIP 3-POLE operand is asserted (not the TRIP 1-POLE operand) the Open Pole is not activated. Because the AR RIP in progress is asserted, the Phase Selector is blocked as well. If the fault evolves slowly, the sequence is different: The relay trips phase A as in the previous example. The Phase Selector Resets, the Open Pole Detector is activated and forces Z1 and Z2 AG, AB, CA and negative-sequence overcurrent elements to reset. If the Z1 BG element picks up, or Z2 BG element picks up resulting in operation of the POTT scheme, no trip command will be issued until the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is asserted. This happens 1.25 cycles after the first trip. If at this time or any time later a request for trip is placed (due to an evolving fault), a three-pole trip is initiated. The TRIP 1-POLE operand is de-asserted by the TRIP 3-POLE operand, resetting the OPEN POLE detector. Shortly all three-poles are opened. When the dead time expires, the Recloser signals the Breaker Control to close the breaker. At this time all the protection elements are operational, as the Open Pole Detector is not blocking any elements. If the line-side VTs are used, the Line Pickup element is armed as well. If there is a fault on the line, these elements will pickup the fault and issue next request for trip. This request results in three-pole trip as the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is still asserted. The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip, except the Recloser will go to lockout upon the next initiation (depending on the number of shots programmed).
8-20
GE Multilin
8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING 8.5.2 PHASE SELECTION
The D60 uses phase relations between current symmetrical components for phase selection. First, the algorithm validates if there is enough zero-, positive-, and negative-sequence currents for reliable analysis. The comparison is adaptive; that is, the magnitudes of the three symmetrical components used mutually as restraints confirm if a given component is large enough to be used for phase selection. Once the current magnitudes are validated, the algorithm analyzes phase relations between the negative and positive-sequence currents and negative and zero-sequence currents (when applicable) as illustrated below.
AB, ABG CG, ABG
BG
BC, BCG
I2F
AG I1F
I2F
AG, BCG I0F
CG
CA, CAG
BG, CAG
837725A1.CDR
Figure 810: PHASE SELECTION PRINCIPLE (ABC PHASE ROTATION) Due to dual comparisons, the algorithm is very secure. For increased accuracy and to facilitate operation in weak systems, the pre-fault components are removed from the analyzed currents. The algorithm is very fast and ensures proper phase selection before any of the correctly set protection elements operates. Under unusual circumstances such as weak-infeed conditions with the zero-sequence current dominating during any ground fault, or during cross-country faults, the current-based phase selector may not recognize any of the known fault pattern. If this is the case, voltages are used for phase selection. The voltage algorithm is the same as the current-based algorithm, e.g. phase angles between the zero-, negative-, and positive-sequence voltages are used. The pre-fault values are subtracted prior to any calculations. The pre-fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the Disturbance Detector (50DD) operates. When the trip command is issued by the Trip Output logic (TRIP 1-POLE or TRIP 3-POLE) and during open pole conditions (OPEN POLE OP), the phase selector resets all its output operands and ignores any subsequent operations of the Disturbance Detector.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS TRIP 1-POLE TRIP 3-POLE OPEN POLE OP OR DELAY 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRCn 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRCn VT FUSE FAIL OP SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: I_0 I_1 I_2 V_0 V_1 V_2 837027A2.CDR DELAY 4 cycles AND 0 150 ms START FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE SELECT AG PHASE SELECT BG PHASE SELECT CG PHASE SELECTOR PHASE SELECT AB PHASE SELECT BC PHASE SELECT CA PHASE SELECT ABG PHASE SELECT BCG PHASE SELECT CAG PHASE SELECT 3P PHASE SELECT SLG PHASE SELECT MULTI-P PHASE SELECT VOID RESET
Figure 811: PHASE SELECTOR LOGIC
GE Multilin
8-21
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5.3 COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS FOR PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
a) DESCRIPTION In the D60 relay pilot-aided schemes transmit a code representing the type of fault determined by the local phase selector according to the scheme logic. At a receiving terminal the local and remote data is combined to determine the action to be performed. Schemes can be used with channels that can carry one, two or four bits. Using a one-bit channel, the schemes at all terminals of the line use their local phase selectors to identify the fault type and initiate appropriate tripping actions. In single pole operation applications however, a three-pole trip can be performed in the event of an in-line single-phase fault co-incident with a fault on a different phase (cross-country fault) that is within the reach of the local phase selector, which is considerably longer than the line. This possibility can be reduced by using a two-bit channel, and eliminated by using a four-bit channel. Using two-bit channels, the relays can share limited information about their local phase selection, improving considerably the accuracy of single-pole tripping on cross-country faults. Two-bit channels however can only provide four different messages, one of which must be no fault has been detected. With only three messages available it is not possible to transmit sufficient information to eliminate the use of local phase selector data, so a three-pole operation can occur in a cross-country fault condition. Using four-bit channels, the relays share enough information about fault types seen from all the line terminals that local fault selector data can be rejected. In addition, in multiple bit systems the relays do not respond to nonvalid bit combinations, making the protection system more immune to communication problems than in a single bit system. Each scheme within the relay has a setting that specifies the number of bits available on the associated communications channel. This setting defines the input (RX1, RX2, RX3, RX4) and output (TX1, TX2, TX3, TX4 for communications and [Scheme Abbreviation] TRIP A, TRIP B, TRIP C, TRIP 3P for action) operands used by the scheme, the data codes used to convey fault data between terminals, and the method of combining information from the local and remote terminals to produce an output. b) SINGLE BIT CHANNELS The TX1 and RX1 operands are used, and fault data is coded per the following tables. Table 87: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS
PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, BC, BCG, BG, CA, CAG, CG, AB, ABG, 3P Unrecognized or AR FORCE 3P TRIP None of the above BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 1 1 0
Table 88: BLOCKING SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, BC, BCG, BG, CA, CAG, CG, AB, ABG, 3P BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 0 0 1
Unrecognized or AR FORCE 3P TRIP None of the above
The action output is generated per the following tables. Table 89: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS
REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 1 1 1 1 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE Any Any Any Any LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG Fault BG Fault CG Fault AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized TRIP OUTPUT Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Trip Three Phases
8-22
GE Multilin
Table 810: BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS

REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 0 0 0 0 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE Any Any Any Any LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG Fault BG Fault CG Fault AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized TRIP OUTPUT Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Trip Three Phases
The scheme initiates a three-phase trip if the Phase Selector fails to recognize the fault type or after the AR FORCE 3P TRIP operand is asserted. c) TWO-BIT CHANNELS The TX1, TX2, RX1 and RX2 operands are used and fault data is coded per the following tables. Table 811: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 2-BIT CHANNELS
PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 1 0 1 TX2 0 1 1

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 0 1 0 0 TX2 1 0 0 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS ASSERTED TX1 STOP 1 0 1 1 TX2 STOP 0 1 1 1
The action output is generated per the following tables. Table 813: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 2-BIT CHANNELS
REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 RX2 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG, BC, BCG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, AB, ABG CA, CAG, 3P AG AG BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P BG BG CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG CG CG AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BC, BCG, Unrecognized CA, CAG, Unrecognized Trip Three Phases Trip Phase C Trip Phase B TRIP OUTPUT Trip Phase A
GE Multilin
8-23
Table 814: BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 2-BIT CHANNELS

REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 RX2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG, BC, BCG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG, BC, BCG BG, CA, CAG LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG, AB, ABG CA, CAG, 3P AG AG BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P BG BG CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG CG CG AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BC, BCG Unrecognized CA, CAG Unrecognized DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P DIR BLOCK TRIP C DIR BLOCK TRIP B TRIP OUTPUT DIR BLOCK TRIP A
d) FOUR-BIT CHANNELS The TX1, TX2, TX3, TX4, RX1, RX2, RX3 and RX4 operands are used. Table 815: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 4-BIT CHANNELS
PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG BG CG AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 1 0 0 0 TX2 0 1 0 0 TX3 0 0 1 0 TX4 0 0 0 1

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG BG CG AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED TX1 0 1 1 1 TX2 1 0 1 1 TX3 1 1 0 1 TX4 1 1 1 0 FLEXLOGIC OPRERANDS ASSERTED TX1 STOP TX2 STOP TX3 STOP TX4 STOP 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
The action output is generated per the following tables.
8-24
GE Multilin
Table 817: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 4-BIT CHANNELS

REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 RX2 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 RX3 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 RX4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE MULTI-P BG CG AG BG AG CG MULTI-P CG AG BG MULTI-P AG BG CG MULTI-P LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG AG AG AG, AB, ABG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P, Unrecognized BG BG BG CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized CG CG CG BC, BCG CA, CAG AB, ABG Unrecognized Trip Three Phases Trip Phase C Trip Phase B TRIP OUTPUT
Trip Phase A
Table 818: BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR FOUR-BIT CHANNELS

REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 0 RX2 0 RX3 0 RX4 0 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE Any while the INIT signal was not established MULTI-P BG CG AG BG AG CG MULTI-P CG AG BG MULTI-P AG BG CG MULTI-P AG AG AG AG, AB, ABG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P, Unrecognized BG BG BG CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized CG CG CG BC, BCG CA, CAG AB, ABG Unrecognized DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P DIR BLOCK TRIP C DIR BLOCK TRIP B LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE TRIP OUTPUT
Trip as for single-bit channel DIR BLOCK TRIP A
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
GE Multilin
8-25
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5.4 PERMISSIVE ECHO SIGNALING
The echo feature can reduce the response time of an over-reaching scheme when a terminal is disconnected from the line. In this condition, a Zone 2 element at the terminal that remains in-service can detect a fault, but cannot trip, as a permissive signal is not received from the remote terminal. This feature is provided in the permissive over-reaching transfer trip and hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip schemes. PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP SCHEME: When used this feature will echo a reliable received permissive signal back to the originating terminal when a lineend-open condition is identified by the Line Pickup logic. The Permissive Echo is programmed as a one-shot logic. The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period. The duration of the echo pulse does not depend on the duration or shape of the received RX signals but is settable. The echo is sent back only if none of the overreaching protection elements operates. HYBRID PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP PERMISSIVE ECHO: When used this feature will echo a reliable received permissive signal back to the originating terminal if the line-endopen condition is recognized by the LINE PICKUP scheme and the fault is not identified as a reverse fault by the zone 4 or the ground directional overcurrent function (if used). The Permissive Echo is programmed as a one-shot logic. The echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period. The duration of the echo pulse does not depend on the duration or shape of the received RX signal but is settable as ECHO DURATION. The echo is sent back only if none of the overreaching protection elements operates. PERMISSIVE ECHO OPERANDS AND TRANSMIT CODES: In single-pole tripping, single-bit channel applications the signal received on bit no. 1 (RX1) is echoed back on bit no. 1 (TX1). In two- and four-bit applications the following Echo Tables apply. Table 819: ECHO TABLE FOR 2-BIT CHANNELS
LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG BG CG AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized ECHOED BITS TX1 1 0 1 TX2 0 1 1
Send back as received
Table 820: ECHO TABLE FOR 4-BIT CHANNELS

LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE TX1 AG BG 1 0 0 ECHOED BITS TX2 0 1 0 TX3 0 0 1 TX4 0 0 0
CG AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized
Send back as received
8-26
GE Multilin
8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING 8.5.5 PILOT SCHEME / PHASE SELECTOR COORDINATION
For local fault type identification the pilot schemes use the Phase Selector. The latter may fail to respond to certain fault scenarios. Examples are: simultaneous forward and reverse fault, simultaneous SLG and LL fault involving different phases (e.g. AG and BC) or two simultaneous faults in the same direction but at very different locations. The Phase Selector is optimized to either indicate correctly the forward fault or to assert the Void flag. For example, a combination of AG and BC is not a valid fault type - it is two different simultaneous faults and as such cannot be described by any single fault pattern, therefore, the Phase Selector would assert the Void flag. The VOID phase selection combined with a local trip request (such as high-set directional overcurrent) will result in threepole trip as per the Trip Output logic. The Pilot Schemes, however, try to recover more information from the distance elements. Each scheme uses a forward looking, either underreaching or overreaching, distance zone. A given Pilot Scheme analyzes this zone for fault type identification if the Phase Selector asserts its Void flag: the DUTT scheme uses Z1; all the other schemes use Z2. The schemes analyze all six fault loops of the zone to determine the fault type. For example, simultaneous forward AG and reverse BG faults may result in the Void indication. The POTT scheme would analyze the Z2 response. As only the AG element is picked up, the local phase selection is determined as AG. This is a correct indication. Depending on the number of bits used for communications, the accuracy of the overall response will be further improved as illustrated in the next subsection. This enhanced operation of the pilot-aided schemes is the reason to use a short pilot scheme priority time when setting the Trip Output logic. The timer will force the scheme to wait for a decision from the pilot scheme for a short period of time before accepting any local trip request. The advantage, however, materializes only if more than one-bit communications channels are used, and is important only on parallel lines or when the application requires maximum accuracy of singlepole tripping. In other cases, it is not recommended to delay the local trip decision.
GE Multilin
8-27
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5.6 CROSS-COUNTRY FAULT EXAMPLE
Assume a single pole operation application where D60 relays are used to protect a two terminal line, (terminals T1 and T2) using phase and ground distance zone 1, 2 and 3 elements in a permissive over-reaching transfer trip scheme. The performance of the system with one- two and four-bit communications channels is outlined for a mid-line phase A-to-ground fault and a co-incident phase B-to-ground fault just behind terminal T2. Assume also that the reclosers are enabled and reset. At T1 the following protection elements will pickup: Ground Distance Zone 1, 2, and 3 for an AG fault Ground Distance Zone 2 and 3 for a BG fault Phase Distance Zone 2 and 3 for an AB fault
At T1 the phase selector will determine the fault is type ABG. This response is independent from the distance elements the Phase Selector sees two forward faults. At T2 the following protection elements will pickup: Ground Distance Zone 1, 2, and 3 for an AG fault
At T2 the phase selector will determine the fault is type AG. The reverse BG fault is likely to be ignored. If a one-bit channel is used, terminal T1 will trip three poles but terminal T2 will trip phase A only, (see the Tables below) which is undesirable.
TERMINAL RX1 T1 T2 1 1 REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE Any Any LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE MULTI-P (ABG) AG TRIP OUTPUT Trip Three Phases Trip Phase A
If a two-bit channel is used both terminals will trip phase A only, (see the Tables below) which is the desired outcome.
TERMINAL RX1 T1 T2 1 1 REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX2 0 1 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG ABG LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE ABG AG TRIP OUTPUT Trip Phase A Trip Phase A
If a four-bit channel is used both terminals will trip phase A only, (see the Tables below) which is the desired outcome.
TERMINAL REMOTE DATA BIT PATTERN RECEIVED RX1 T1 T2 0 1 RX2 0 0 RX3 0 0 RX4 1 0 REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE AG ABG LOCAL DATA LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE ABG AG TRIP OUTPUT Trip Phase A Trip Phase A
8-28
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1APPLICATION GUIDELINES
9.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides general application guidelines for stepped distance, overcurrent and pilot protection. Where relevant, design details and performance characteristics of the D60 are given to facilitate the process of setting the relay for a given application. 9.1.2 IMPACT OF MEMORY POLARIZATION As explained in Chapter 8, the D60 uses a memorized positive sequence voltage as a polarizing signal in order to achieve dependable operation for forward faults and secure non-operation for reverse faults. The dynamic shift of the characteristic ensures improved directionality, but it also means that if a backup function is required for a reverse fault on the bus, then it is appropriate to reverse Zone 4 so that a time delayed backup function may be obtained. As mentioned earlier, it may be beneficial to also avoid extremely large reach settings by setting a remote backup so that it is reverse looking. This strategy can be beneficial if the reduced reach enhances the discrimination between the load and fault conditions. 9.1.3 HIGH-SET OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS Especially at low SIR values, fast fault clearance times may be seen as extremely important, both from system stability, and from equipment damage viewpoints. The high-set overcurrent element, when set appropriately, can be extremely useful in achieving these goals. It helps the setting calculations if the system impedances are reasonably well known. The overcurrent pick up should be set to the greater of the following values: 1. 2. The maximum infeed seen by the relay, for a close in reverse fault. The maximum fault level seen by the relay for a fault at 100% of the protected line.
The maximum error of the phase overcurrent elements is below 2%. A safety factor of 1.25 should be used to account for relay errors and system impedance uncertainty. If CT saturation is an issue such as close to a generation where long lasting dc components are likely to saturate the CTs, it should be noted that the IOC elements require 1.33 cycle of data to operate for a multiple of pickup of 1.01. For higher multiples of pickup, the relation between the multiple of pickup and the amount of data required for operation before complete CT saturation is approximately linear. For example, for a multiple of pickup of 4, approximately 1.33 / 4 = 0.332 of power cycle is required by the phase IOC to operate. The above information should not be confused with the operating time, which includes some inherent delays such as a trip rated output contact.
GE Multilin
9-1
9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME) 9.2DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME) a) PHASE CURRENT SUPERVISION AND FUSE FAILURE
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2.1 PHASE DISTANCE
The phase-to-phase (delta) current is used to supervise the phase distance elements, primarily to ensure that in a de-energized state the distance elements will not be picked up due to noise or induced voltages, on the line. However, this supervision feature may also be employed to prevent operation under fuse failure conditions. This obviously requires that the setting must be above maximum load current and less than the minimum fault conditions for which operation is expected. This potential problem may be avoided by the use of a separate fuse fail function, which means that the phase current supervision can be set much lower, typically 2 times the capacitance charging current of the line. The usage of the fuse fail function is also important during double-contingency events such as an external fault during fuse fail conditions. The current supervision alone would not prevent maloperation in such circumstances. It must be kept in mind that the Fuse Failure element provided on the D60 needs some time to detect fuse fail conditions. This may create a race between the instantaneous Zone 1 and the Fuse Failure element. Therefore, for maximum security, it is recommended to both set the current supervision above the maximum load current and use the Fuse Failure function. The current supervision prevents maloperation immediately after the fuse fail condition giving some time for the Fuse Failure element to take over and block the distance elements permanently. This is of a secondary importance for time-delayed Zones 2 through 4 as the Fuse Failure element has some extra time for guaranteed operation. The current supervision may be set below the maximum load current for the time delayed zones. Blocking distance elements during fuse fail conditions may not be acceptable in some applications and/or under some protection philosophies. Applied solutions may vary from not using the Fuse Failure element for blocking at all; through using it and modifying through FlexLogic and multiple setting groups mechanisms other protection functions or other relays to provide some protection after detecting fuse fail conditions and blocking the distance elements; to using it and accepting the fact that the distance protection will not respond to subsequent internal faults until the problem is addressed. To be fully operational, the Fuse Failure element must be enabled, and its output FlexLogic operand must be indicated as the blocking signal for the selected protection elements.
NOTE
For convenience, the current supervision threshold incorporates the b) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1
3 factor.
As typically used for direct tripping, the Zone 1 reach must be chosen so that it does not extend beyond the far end(s) of the protected line. The Zone 1 provides nominally instantaneous protection for any phase fault within a pre-determined distance from the relay location. To ensure that no overreach occurs, typically requires a setting of 80 to 90% of the line length, which covers CT and VT errors, relay inaccuracy and transient overreach as well as uncertainty in the line impedance for each phase, although transposition may minimize this latter concern. The total relay inaccuracy including both steady state and transient overreach even when supplied from CVTs under the Source Impedance Ratios of up to 30, is below 5%. c) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 The Zone 2 is an overreaching element, which essentially covers the final 10 to 20% of the line length with a time delay. The additional function for the Zone 2 is as a timed backup for faults on the remote bus. Typically the reach is set to 125% of the positive sequence impedance of the line, to ensure operation, with an adequate margin, for a fault at 100% of the line length. The necessary time delay must ensure that coordination is achieved with the clearance of a close-in fault on the next line section, including the breaker operating time. Typically the Zone 2 time delay would be 0.2 to 0.6 sec., although this may have to be reviewed more carefully if a short line terminates on the remote bus because the two Zone 2 elements may overlap and therefore not coordinate satisfactorily. d) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 3
If a remote backup philosophy is followed, then the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the remote bus, plus the impedance of the longest line which terminates on this remote bus. The time delay must coordinate with other time-delayed protections on any remote line. Circuit loading limitations created by a long zone reach may be overcome by using lens or quadrilateral characteristics and/or a load encroachment supervising characteristic. Consideration should also be given to a situation where the load impedance may enter into the relay characteristic for a time longer than the chosen time delay, which could occur transiently during a system power swing. For this reason the Power Swing Blocking function should be used.
9-2
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS e) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 4
9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)
A further contribution to remote backup, the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the remote bus. The time delay must coordinate with other time-delayed protections on the next line. The use of a lens characteristic or the load encroachment element may be advantageous if load limits are a problem. To avoid extremely large reach settings, the D60 has the ability to implement any element so that it is reverse looking, which then can provide a back up for the longest line terminated on the local bus. This strategy can be beneficial if the reduced reach helps discrimination between the load and fault conditions, but must be implemented at both ends of the protected line. 9.2.2 GROUND DISTANCE a) NEUTRAL CURRENT SUPERVISION The current supervision for the ground distance elements responds to an internally calculated neutral current (3 x I_0). The setting for this element should be based on twice the zero-sequence line capacitance current or the maximum zerosequence unbalance under maximum load conditions. This element should not be used to prevent an output when the load impedance is inside the distance characteristic on a steady state basis. b) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1 The Zone 1 reach must be set so that nominally instantaneous operation does not extend beyond the end of the protected line. However this may be somewhat more complicated than for the phase elements, because of zero sequence mutual induction with an adjacent parallel line, possibly carried on the same tower, which can be out of service and grounded at multiple points. A fault beyond 100% of the protected line may cause overreach unless the reach is reduced significantly, sometimes as low as 65% of the line length. If the line being protected does not have a significant interaction with an adjacent circuit, then the typical 80% setting may be used. If there is significant mutual coupling between the parallel lines, then the mutual compensation feature of the ground distance elements can be used instead of a drastic reduction in the reach. However, even in this case, there is more uncertainty as compared with the phase distance elements because the zerosequence impedance of the line and thus the zero-sequence-compensating factors may vary significantly due to weather and other conditions. c) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2 To ensure that the Zone 2 can see 100% of the line, inter-circuit mutual effects must be considered, as they can contribute to a significant under-reach. Typically this may occur on double circuit lines, when both lines may carry the same current. An analytical study should be carried out to determine the appropriate reach setting. The main purpose of this element is to operate for faults beyond the reach of the local Zone 1 element, and therefore a time delay must be used similar to the phase fault case. d) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 3 This remote back up function must have a reach which is set to account for any infeed at the remote bus, plus the impedance of the longest line which terminates on this remote bus. Similar to the phase fault case, a Zone 3 element must be time coordinated with timed clearances on the next section. e) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 4 As a further contribution to a remote backup philosophy, the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the remote bus. The time delay must coordinate with other time-delayed protections on the next line. The use of a lens characteristic or load encroachment element may be advantageous if load limits are a problem. To avoid extremely large reach settings the D60 has the ability to implement any element, so that it is reverse looking. This strategy can be beneficial if the reduced reach enhances the discrimination between the load and fault conditions. It should be recognized however that, if adopted, this approach must be implemented at both ends of the protected line.
GE Multilin
9-3
9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES 9.3PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES The D60 includes five common pilot-aided schemes: direct under-reaching transfer trip (DUTT) permissive under-reaching transfer trip (PUTT) permissive over-reaching transfer trip (POTT) hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip (Hybrid POTT) directional comparison blocking
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.3.1 OVERVIEW
9.3.2 DIRECT UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (DUTT) This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal to the remote end(s), where on receipt, the DUTT pilot scheme operates without any additional supervision. For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 1 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. The scheme generates an output operand (DUTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. Note that the same protection signaling may be used by a breaker failure scheme, in which case the signal can be sealed in by breaker fail for a time longer than the auto-reclose reclaim time which then prevents auto-reclose when not required. A provision for an optional seal-in of the send signal is made to cover those situations where PLC (Power Line Carrier) signaling is used and the signal must be transmitted in a potentially noisy situation due to the fault. The scheme output operand (DUTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. 9.3.3 PERMISSIVE UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT) This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal to the remote end where it is supervised by the over-reaching Zone 2 distance elements. For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 1 and 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. The scheme generates an output operand (PUTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. The PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY timer can be used to ride through spurious PLC receive signals. The scheme output operand (PUTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9.3.4 PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT) This scheme is intended for two-terminal line applications only. This scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both the ends of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This provides increased coverage for high-resistance faults.
9-4
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used to supplement Zone 2. Even though any FlexLogic operand could be used for this purpose allowing the user to combine responses of various protection elements, or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional IOC or Neutral Directional IOC. Both of these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD). An important consideration is when one of the line terminals is open. It is then necessary to identify this condition and arrange for a continuous sending of the permissive signal or use a slower but more secure echo feature to send a signal to the other terminal, which is producing the fault infeed. With any echo scheme however, a means must be provided to avoid a permanent lock up of the transmit/receive loop. The echo co-ordination (ECHO DURATION) and lock-out (ECHO LOCKOUT) timers perform this function by ensuring that the permissive signal is echoed once for a guaranteed duration of time before going to a lockout for a settable period of time. It should be recognized that in ring bus or breaker and a half situations, it may be the line disconnect or a combination of the disconnect and/or the breaker(s) status that is the indication that the terminal is open. The POTT RX PICKUP DELAY timer is included in the permissive receive path to ride through spurious receive outputs that may be produced during external faults, when power line carrier is utilized as the communications medium. No current reversal logic is included for the overreaching phase and ground distance elements, because long reaches are not usually required for two terminal lines. A situation can occur however, where the ground distance element will have an extended reach. This situation is encountered when it is desired to account for the zero sequence inter-circuit mutual coupling. This is not a problem for the ground distance elements in the D60 which do have a current reversal logic built into their design as part of the technique used to improve ground fault directionality. Unlike the distance protection elements the ground directional overcurrent functions do not have their reach well defined, therefore the current reversal logic is incorporated for the extra signal supplementing Zone 2 in the scheme. The transient blocking approach for this POTT scheme is to recognize that a permissive signal has been received and then allow a settable time TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY for the local forward looking directional element to pick up. The scheme generates an output operand (POTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. Power Line Carrier (PLC) channels are not recommended for this scheme since the PLC signal can be interrupted by a fault. For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-endopen/weak-infeed conditions. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accordingly The output operand from the scheme (POTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. 9.3.5 HYBRID POTT SCHEME (HYB-POTT) Generally, this scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both ends of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This increases the coverage for high-resistance faults. The scheme is intended for three-terminal applications and for weak-infeed conditions. As a long reach of the overreaching distance element may be required for three-terminal applications, transient blocking logic is provided for both distance and ground directional overcurrent elements. In order to cope with weak-infeed conditions an echo feature is made available. By default the scheme uses the reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Additionally, reverselooking ground directional overcurrent functions can be used in conjunction with Zone 4. For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-end-open/weak-infeed and undervoltage conditions.
GE Multilin
9-5
If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured, and set accordingly. The scheme generates an output operand (HYBRID POTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. For more application recommendation refer to the POTT scheme. The output operand from the scheme (HYBRID POTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. 9.3.6 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING Generally, the scheme compares the direction to a fault at both ends of the line. Unlike the permissive schemes, the absence of a blocking signal permits operation of the scheme. Consequently, the scheme is biased toward dependability and requires an on/off type of signaling. By default this scheme uses only a forward-looking over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to identify forward faults. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to increase the coverage for high-resistance faults. By default the scheme uses only a reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 4 distance element for better time and sensitivity coordination. For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of distance relaying. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accordingly. The scheme generates output operands (BLOCKING SCHEME TX INIT and BLOCKING SCHEME TX STOP) that are used control the transmission of signals to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/ Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. A blocking scheme may be preferred over a Hybrid POTT scheme, because of shorter reach settings for the Zone 2 elements. This follows from the fundamental difference that all zone 2 elements are required to see an internal fault for the POTT approach, under all system conditions, which in turn, means that the reversed Zone 4 block initiate elements must also have an increased reach. A blocking scheme on the other hand, can have much shorter Zone 2 reach settings if sequential clearance can be accepted. The simple rule to ensure that all faults can be cleared, is for each terminal to have a reach setting equal to the distance to the tap plus twice the distance from the tap to the remote terminal. The Zone 2 element must have a coordinating timer BLOCK RX CO-ORD PKP DELAY, to ensure that the blocking signal is received for all external faults that are within the set reach of the local overreaching Zone 2. Transient blocking logic is implemented via the TRANS BLOCK timer, which continues to send a blocking signal for a settable time TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY, if it was being sent for at least 30 ms during the initial reverse fault set via TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY. The output operand from the scheme (BLOCKING SCHEME OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9-6
GE Multilin
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
9.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 9.4.1 INTRODUCTION
For reasons described in Chapter 8: Theory of Operation, it is recommended to apply a combination of distance, ground directional overcurrent and high-set overcurrent functions for protection of series compensated lines. The setting rules described below must take into account variety of system configurations, particularly a status of series capacitors (in-service, by-passed). Either the worst-case topology shall be considered or - if possible - adaptive settings shall be applied though the multiple settings groups mechanism. A line compensating capacitor is a bank of three physical capacitors and their overvoltage protecting devices (air gaps and/ or MOVs). If none of the MOV/gaps conducts any significant current, the positive-, negative- and zero-sequence reactance of the three-phase bank equal the reactance of the actual (phase) capacitors. Under asymmetrical conditions, however, such as a single line to ground fault, when only one MOV/gap may operate, the series capacitor bank would create extra (series) asymmetry in addition to the fault (shunt) asymmetry. The positive-, negative- and zero-sequence impedances will differ from each other and will not equal the impedance of the phase capacitors. Moreover, there may be mutual coupling between the sequence networks representing the series capacitor bank. This makes analytical analysis of fault conditions very burdensome. For setting calculations, however, it is justified to assume the zero-, positive-, and negative-sequence reactance of the capacitor bank equal the reactance of the actual (phase) capacitors. This represents a worst-case low-current fault scenario, when the steady-state effects of series compensation are most weighty. 9.4.2 DISTANCE Traditionally, the reach setting of an underreaching distance function shall be set based on the net inductive impedance between the potential source of the relay and the far-end busbar, or location for which the zone must not overreach. Faults behind series capacitors on the protected and adjacent lines need to be considered for this purpose. For further illustration a sample system shown in the figure below is considered.
voltage protection level INFINITE BUS
SENDING BUS 0.5 pu -2 0.6 pu -4
RECEIVING BUS 0.5 pu -3 0.7 pu -5
reactance
10
F2
A B Protected Line
B A
F1
Figure 91: SAMPLE SERIES COMPENSATED SYSTEM Assuming 20% security margin, the underreaching zone shall be set as follows. At the Sending Bus, one must consider an external fault at F1 as the 5 capacitor would contribute to the overreaching effect. Any fault behind F1 is less severe as extra inductive line impedance increases the apparent impedance: Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 3 5) = 1.6 if the line-side (B) VTs are used Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 4 3 5) = 1.6 if the bus-side (A) VTs are used The negative value means that an underreaching zone cannot be used as the circuit between the potential source of the relay and an external fault for which the relay must not pick-up, is overcompensated, i.e. capacitive. At the Receiving Bus, one must consider a fault at F2: Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 4 2) = 3.2 if the line-side (B) VTs are used Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 4 3 2) = 0.8 if the bus-side (A) VTs are used Practically, however, to cope with the effect of sub-synchronous oscillations, one may need to reduce the reach even more. As the characteristics of sub-synchronous oscillations are in complex relations with fault and system parameters, no solid setting recommendations are given with respect to extra security margin for sub-synchronous oscillations. It is strongly recommended to use a power system simulator to verify the reach settings or to use an adaptive D60 feature for dynamic reach control. If the adaptive reach control feature is used, the PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL setting shall be set accordingly.
INFINITE BUS
GE Multilin
9-7
This setting is a sum of the overvoltage protection levels for all the series capacitors located between the relay potential source and the far-end busbar, or location for which the zone must not overreach. The setting is entered in pu of the phase VT nominal voltage (RMS, not peak value). If a minimum fault current level (phase current) is causing a voltage drop across a given capacitor that prompts its air gap to flash over or its MOV to carry practically all the current, then the series capacitor shall be excluded from the calculations (the capacitor is immediately by-passed by its overvoltage protection system and does not cause any overreach problems). If a minimum fault current does not guarantee an immediate capacitor by-pass, then the capacitor must be included in the calculation: its overvoltage protection level, either air gap flash-over voltage or MOV knee-point voltage, shall be used (RMS, not peak value). Assuming none of the series capacitors in the sample system is guaranteed to get by-passed, the following calculations apply: For the Sending Bus: For the Receiving Bus: 0.5 + 0.7 = 1.2 pu if the line-side (B) VTs are used 0.6 + 0.5 + 0.7 = 1.8 pu if the bus-side (A) VTs are used 0.6 + 0.5 = 1.1 pu if the line-side (B) VTs are used 0.6 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.6 pu if the bus-side (A) VTs are used 9.4.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Ground directional overcurrent function (negative-sequence or neutral) uses an offset impedance to guarantee correct fault direction discrimination. The following setting rules apply. 1. 2. If the net impedance between the potential source and the local equivalent system is inductive, then there is no need for an offset. Otherwise, the offset impedance shall be at least the net capacitive reactance. The offset cannot be higher than the net inductive reactance between the potential source and the remote equivalent system. For simplicity and extra security, the far-end busbar may be used rather than the remote equivalent system.
As the ground directional functions are meant to provide maximum fault resistance coverage, it is justified to assume that the fault current is very low and none of the series capacitors is guaranteed to get by-passed. Consider settings of the negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection element for the Sample Series Compensated System. For the Sending Bus relay, bus-side VTs: Net inductive reactance from the relay into the local system = 2 + 3 = 1 > 0; there is no need for offset. Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 4 + 10 3 = 3 ; the offset cannot be higher than 3 . It is recommended to use 1.5 offset impedance. Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = 2 + 3 4 = 3 < 0; an offset impedance 3 must be used. Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 10 3 = 7 ; the offset cannot be higher than 7 . It is recommended to use 5 offset impedance. Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = 5 + 7 = 2 > 0; there is no need for offset. Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 3 + 10 4 = 3 ; the offset cannot be higher than 3 . It is recommended to use 1.5 offset impedance. Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = 3 5 + 7 = 1 < 0; an offset impedance 1 must be used. Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 10 4 = 6 ; the offset cannot be higher than 6 . It is recommended to use 3.5 offset impedance. 9.4.4 HIGH-SET PHASE OVERCURRENT The setting rules for high-set overcurrent protection are explained in the High-Set Overcurrent Elements section.
For the Sending Bus relay, line-side VTs:
For the Receiving Bus relay, bus-side VTs:
For the Receiving Bus relay, line-side VTs:
9-8
GE Multilin
9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 9.5.1 PHASE DISTANCE PROTECTION
9.5PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS a) DESCRIPTION
Phase distance elements of the D60 could be set to respond to faults beyond any three-phase power transformer. The relay guarantees accurate reach and targeting for any phase fault. Moreover, the current and voltage transformers may be located independently on different sides of the transformer. The following setting rules apply to this feature: 1. 2. 3. A given distance zone is terminated by location of the VTs, not the CTs. Consequently, the positive-sequence impedance of a transformer must be included in the reach setting only if the transformer is located between the potential source and the intended reach point. The current signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the CTs and the intended reach point. If this is the case the CT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the CTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the CT connection setting shall be set to "None". The voltage signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the VTs and the intended reach point. If this is the case the VT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the VTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the VT connection setting shall be set to "None". The reach setting is entered in secondary ohms and as such must take into account location and ratios of VTs and CTs as well as voltage ratio of the involved power transformer.
4.
5.
The following equations explain the setting rules. Consider two applications as shown in the figure below:
(a) ZH ZT ZX
(b) ZH ZT ZX
Z4
Z1
Z4
Z1
Figure 92: PHASE DISTANCE LOOKING THROUGH A POWER TRANSFORMER where: ZX = intended reach impedance for Zone 1 (primary ohms) ZH = intended reach impedance for Zone 4 (primary ohms) ZT = positive-sequence impedance of the transformer VX, VH = transformer rated voltages nCT = transformation ratio of the CTs nVT = transformation ratio of the VTs Z1: Z1 reach setting (secondary ohms) Z4: Zone 4 reach setting (secondary ohms)
b) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A) As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 1, the reach impedance must include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. In addition, the primary impedance must be re-calculated for the voltage level of the VTs and CTs, and eventually, re-calculated to secondary quantities: V H 2 n CT Z 1 = ( Z T ( at X ) + Z x ) ------ -------- V X n VT
(EQ 9.1)
GE Multilin
9-9
9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS c) ZONE 4 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A)
As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 4, the reach impedance must not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. Because both VTs and CTs are located on the same side as the intended reach point, no correction for the transformer ratio is required. The primary impedance must be only re-calculated to secondary quantities: n CT Z 4 = Z H --------n VT d) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B) As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Z1, the reach impedance must not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The CTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus transformer ratio must be included: VH n CT Z 1 = Z X ------ -------- V X n VT e) ZONE 4 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B) As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 4, the reach impedance must include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The VTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus transformer ratio must be included: VX n CT Z 4 = ( Z T ( at H ) + Z H ) ------ -------- V H n VT
(EQ 9.4) (EQ 9.3) (EQ 9.2)
9.5.2 EXAMPLE Given the following for the system shown in the previous section: ZX = 30 85 (intended reach of Zone 1) ZH = 0.06 88 (intended reach of Zone 4) nCT = 8000:5 = 1600 (located at H) nVT = 315000:120 = 2625 (located at X) Transformer: 13.8/315 kV, 150 MVA, 10%, delta/wye, 315 kV side lagging 30 Transformer impedance: 10- ( 13.8 ) Z T ( at H ) = --------- ------------------ = 0.127 90 150 100 The Zone 1 settings are: 13.8 1600 Z 1 = 30 ---------- ------------ = 0.8011 85 315 2625
PHS DIST Z1 REACH: "0.80" PHS DIST Z1 RCA: "85" PHS DIST Z1 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "None" PHS DIST Z1 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "Dy1"
2
(EQ 9.5)
(EQ 9.6)
The Zone 4 settings are: 315- 1600 Z 4 = ( 0.127 90 + 0.006 88 ) ---------- ------------ = 2.601 89.4 13.8 2625
PHS DIST Z4 REACH: "2.60" PHS DIST Z4 RCA: "89" PHS DIST Z4 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "Yd11" PHS DIST Z4 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "None"
(EQ 9.7)
9-10
GE Multilin
Appendices
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A FLEXANALOG PARAMETERSA.1FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST
A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 1 of 5)
ADDR 6144 6146 6148 6150 6152 6154 6155 6157 6158 6160 6161 6163 6164 6166 6168 6169 6171 6172 6174 6175 6177 6178 6180 6208 6210 6212 6214 6216 6218 6219 6221 6222 6224 6225 6227 6228 6230 6232 6233 6235 6236 6238 6239 6241 6242 6244 6656 6658 6660 DATA ITEM SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle SRC 1 Ground Current RMS SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle SRC 2 Phase A Current RMS SRC 2 Phase B Current RMS SRC 2 Phase C Current RMS SRC 2 Neutral Current RMS SRC 2 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 2 Phase A Current Angle SRC 2 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 2 Phase B Current Angle SRC 2 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 2 Phase C Current Angle SRC 2 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 2 Neutral Current Angle SRC 2 Ground Current RMS SRC 2 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 2 Ground Current Angle SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 2 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 2 Positive Sequence Current Angle SRC 2 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 2 Negative Sequence Current Angle SRC 2 Differential Ground Current Magnitude SRC 2 Differential Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS

ADDR 6662 6664 6665 6667 6668 6670 6671 6673 6675 6677 6679 6680 6682 6683 6685 6686 6688 6690 6691 6693 6694 6696 6697 6699 6720 6722 6724 6726 6728 6729 6731 6732 6734 6735 6737 6739 6741 6743 6744 6746 6747 6749 6750 6752 6754 6755 6757 6758 6760 DATA ITEM SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 2 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
GE Multilin
A-1

APPENDIX A
ADDR 13504 13505 13506 13507 13508 13509 13510 13511 13512 13513 13514 13515 13516 13517 13518 13519 13520 13521 13522 13523 13524 13525 13526 13527 13552 13553 13554 13555 13556 13557 13558 13559 13560 13561 13562 13563 13564 13565 13566 13567 13568 13569 13570 13571 13572 13573 13574 13575 13576 13577 13578 13579 DATA ITEM DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 2 Value DCMA Inputs 3 Value DCMA Inputs 4 Value DCMA Inputs 5 Value DCMA Inputs 6 Value DCMA Inputs 7 Value DCMA Inputs 8 Value DCMA Inputs 9 Value DCMA Inputs 10 Value DCMA Inputs 11 Value DCMA Inputs 12 Value DCMA Inputs 13 Value DCMA Inputs 14 Value DCMA Inputs 15 Value DCMA Inputs 16 Value DCMA Inputs 17 Value DCMA Inputs 18 Value DCMA Inputs 19 Value DCMA Inputs 20 Value DCMA Inputs 21 Value DCMA Inputs 22 Value DCMA Inputs 23 Value DCMA Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 1 Value RTD Inputs 2 Value RTD Inputs 3 Value RTD Inputs 4 Value RTD Inputs 5 Value RTD Inputs 6 Value RTD Inputs 7 Value RTD Inputs 8 Value RTD Inputs 9 Value RTD Inputs 10 Value RTD Inputs 11 Value RTD Inputs 12 Value RTD Inputs 13 Value RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD Inputs 19 Value RTD Inputs 20 Value RTD Inputs 21 Value RTD Inputs 22 Value RTD Inputs 23 Value RTD Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 25 Value RTD Inputs 26 Value RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD Inputs 28 Value
ADDR 6761 6763 7168 7170 7172 7174 7176 7178 7180 7182 7184 7186 7188 7190 7192 7193 7194 7195 7200 7202 7204 7206 7208 7210 7212 7214 7216 7218 7220 7222 7224 7225 7226 7227 7552 7553 9040 9042 9044 9046 9048 9050 9052 9054 9056 9058 9216 9218 9219 9220 9222 9223
DATA ITEM SRC 2 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power SRC 1 Phase A Real Power SRC 1 Phase B Real Power SRC 1 Phase C Real Power SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor SRC 2 Three Phase Real Power SRC 2 Phase A Real Power SRC 2 Phase B Real Power SRC 2 Phase C Real Power SRC 2 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 2 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 2 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 2 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 2 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 2 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 2 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 2 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 2 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 2 Phase A Power Factor SRC 2 Phase B Power Factor SRC 2 Phase C Power Factor SRC 1 Frequency SRC 2 Frequency Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude Prefault Zero Sequence Current Prefault Positive Sequence Current Prefault Negative Sequence Current Prefault Phase A Voltage Prefault Phase B Voltage Prefault Phase C Voltage Last Fault Location Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase
A-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
ADDR 13580 13581 13582 13583 13584 13585 13586 13587 13588 13589 13590 13591 13592 13593 13594 13595 13596 13597 13598 13599 13600 13601 32768 39425 39426 39427 39428 39429 39430 39431 39432 40971 DATA ITEM RTD Inputs 29 Value RTD Inputs 30 Value RTD Inputs 31 Value RTD Inputs 32 Value RTD Inputs 33 Value RTD Inputs 34 Value RTD Inputs 35 Value RTD Inputs 36 Value RTD Inputs 37 Value RTD Inputs 38 Value RTD Inputs 39 Value RTD Inputs 40 Value RTD Inputs 41 Value RTD Inputs 42 Value RTD Inputs 43 Value RTD Inputs 44 Value RTD Inputs 45 Value RTD Inputs 46 Value RTD Inputs 47 Value RTD Inputs 48 Value Ohm Inputs 1 Value Ohm Inputs 2 Value Tracking Frequency FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 2 Actual FlexElement 3 Actual FlexElement 4 Actual FlexElement 5 Actual FlexElement 6 Actual FlexElement 7 Actual FlexElement 8 Actual Current Setting Group
GE Multilin
A-3
APPENDIX A
A-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that: The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master computer. For Modbus, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands. B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER The Modbus RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in all configurations. See Chapter 3 for details on wiring. Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300). The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for further details. The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the address is the broadcast address see below). A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will accept any address when the Modbus RTU protocol is used. B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code. Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA CRC DEAD TIME SIZE 1 byte 1 byte N bytes 2 bytes 3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address. A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated with Function Code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin
B-1
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B
FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section for further details. DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC. DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave. B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder. A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request. Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS: --> A Alow Ahigh CRC i,j (+) N Di G shr (x) ALGORITHM: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. data transfer 16 bit working register low order byte of A high order byte of A 16 bit CRC-16 result loop counters logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator total number of data bytes i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1) 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits are shifted right one location) FFFF (hex) --> A 0 --> i 0 --> j Di (+) Alow --> Alow j + 1 --> j shr (A) Is there a carry? Is j = 8? i + 1 --> i Is i = N? A --> CRC No: go to 3; Yes: continue No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue. No: go to 5; Yes: continue
B-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B B.2FUNCTION CODES
B.2 FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE HEX 03 04 05 06 10 DEC 3 4 5 6 16 Read Holding Registers Read Holding Registers Force Single Coil Preset Single Register Preset Multiple Registers Read Actual Values or Settings Read Actual Values or Settings Execute Operation Store Single Setting Store Multiple Settings MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay. Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus Memory Map table for exact details on the data registers. Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3 register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively. Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 40 50 00 03 A7 4A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high DATA #1 - low DATA #2 - high DATA #2 - low DATA #3 - high DATA #3 - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 06 00 28 01 2C 00 00 0D 60
GE Multilin
B-3
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
APPENDIX B B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Summary of Operation Codes table below. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The high and low Code Value bytes always have the values FF and 00 respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code. Table B4: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - high OPERATION CODE - low CODE VALUE - high CODE VALUE - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - high OPERATION CODE - low CODE VALUE - high CODE VALUE - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A
Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION CODE (HEX) 0000 0001 0005 0006 1000 to 101F DEFINITION NO OPERATION RESET CLEAR EVENT RECORDS CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF DESCRIPTION Does not do anything. Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key. Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
Clears all oscillography records. Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either ON or OFF.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17 dec). Table B6: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low DATA - high DATA - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low DATA - high DATA - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD
B-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2 FUNCTION CODES B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to slave device 11h (17 decimal). Table B7: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high order byte DATA #1 - low order byte DATA #2 - high order byte DATA #2 - low order byte CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 04 00 C8 00 01 12 62 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXMAPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 07 64
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order bit of the function code set to 1. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11. Table B8: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 39 CD F2 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE ERROR CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 B9 01 93 95
GE Multilin
B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS B.3FILE TRANSFERS a) DESCRIPTION
APPENDIX B B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)" and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from the UR relay, use the following steps: 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case sensitive. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The "position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
2.
3. 4.
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections. b) OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for example, TFTP or MMS). c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format. d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details. The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available. The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay. Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last Cleared Date to the present date and time. To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames: OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT Replace nnn with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT
B-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files. datalog.cfg and datalog.dat To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files. dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it: To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename: EVT.TXT To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename: EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number) To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename: EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number) g) READING FAULT REPORT FILES Fault report data has been available via the D60 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2.00. The file name is faultReport#####.htm. The ##### refers to the fault report record number. The fault report number is a counter that indicates how many fault reports have ever occurred. The counter rolls over at a value of 65535. Only the last ten fault reports are available for retrieval; a request for a non-existent fault report file will yield a null file. The current value fault report counter is available in Number of Fault Reports Modbus register at location 0x3020. For example, if 14 fault reports have occurred then the files faultReport5.htm, faultReport6.htm, up to faultReport14.htm are available to be read. The expected use of this feature has an external master periodically polling the Number of Fault Reports' register. If the value changes, then the master reads all the new files. The contents of the file is in standard HTML notation and can be viewed via any commercial browser. B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of 0 removes COMMAND password protection. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002. PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa. To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware. COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password, and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled. COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
GE Multilin
B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 39)

ADDR 0000 0002 0010 0020 0022 0040 0090 0093 00A0 00B0 00C0 0200 0204 0220 0248 0280 REGISTER NAME UR Product Type Product Version Serial Number Manufacturing Date Modification Number Order Code Ethernet MAC Address Reserved (13 items) CPU Module Serial Number CPU Supplier Serial Number Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) Self Test States (2 items) LED Column x State (10 items) Display Message Last Key Pressed Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 ------------0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 --0 to 42 0 to 38 UNITS ----------------------0 --------STEP 1 0.01 --1 1 ------------1 1 --1 1 FORMAT F001 F001 F203 F050 F001 F204 F072 F001 F203 F203 F203 F143 F501 F204 F530 F190 DEFAULT 0 1 0 0 0 Order Code x 0 0 (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (none) 0 (None) 0 (No key -- use between real keys) 0 (Off) Product Information (Read Only)
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
Self Test Targets (Read Only) Front Panel (Read Only)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules) 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 040A 040B 040C 040D 040E 040F 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 041A 041B Virtual Input x State ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 0 to 1 --1 F108
B-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 2 of 39)

ADDR 041C 041D 041E 041F 0800 0802 0804 0806 0808 0810 0818 0820 0828 0830 0838 0900 1000 1080 1200 14C0 14C1 14C2 14C3 1500 1508 1510 1518 1520 1528 1530 1540 1542 1550 1551 1553 1555 1559 155D 1561 1565 1569 156D REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Digital Counter x Value Digital Counter x Frozen Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp us ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 FlexState Bits (16 items) Element Operate States (64 items) Formatted user-definable displays (8 items) User Map Values (256 items) Target Sequence Number of Targets Target to Read Target Message Contact Input States (6 items) Virtual Input States (2 items) Contact Output States (4 items) Contact Output Current States (4 items) Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) Virtual Output States (4 items) Contact Output Detectors (4 items) Remote Device x States Remote Input States (2 items) Remote Devices Online Remote Device x StNum Remote Device x SqNum ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 ----------------------------------------1 1 --1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483647 to 2147483647 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 --------1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules) F004 F004 F050 F003 0 0 0 0
FlexStates (Read Only) F001 F502 F200 F001 F001 F001 F001 F200 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F126 F003 F003 0 0 (none) 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 0 Element States (Read Only) User Displays Actuals (Read Only) Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only Element Targets (Read Only)
Element Targets (Read/Write) Element Targets (Read Only) Digital I/O States (Read Only)
Remote I/O States (Read Only)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
GE Multilin
B-9
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 3 of 39)
ADDR 1571 1575 1579 157D 1581 1585 1589 158D 15C0 15C8 15C9 15D0 15D1 15D2 15D3 1610 1611 1618 1619 161B 161D 1800 1802 1804 1806 1808 180A 180B 180D 180E 1810 1811 1813 1814 1816 1818 1819 181B 181C 181E 181F 1821 1822 1824 1825 1840 1880 18C0 1900 1940 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Direct Input States (6 items) Platform Direct Outputs Average Msg Return Time 1 Platform Direct Outputs Average Msg Return Time 2 Direct Device States Reserved Platform Direct I/O CRC Fail Count 1 Platform Direct I/O CRC Fail Count 2 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status Data Logger Channel Count Time of oldest available samples Time of newest available samples Data Logger Duration Phase A Current RMS Phase B Current RMS Phase C Current RMS Neutral Current RMS Phase A Current Magnitude Phase A Current Angle Phase B Current Magnitude Phase B Current Angle Phase C Current Magnitude Phase C Current Angle Neutral Current Magnitude Neutral Current Angle Ground Current RMS Ground Current Magnitude Ground Current Angle Zero Sequence Current Magnitude Zero Sequence Current Angle Positive Sequence Current Magnitude Positive Sequence Current Angle Negative Sequence Current Magnitude Negative Sequence Current Angle Differential Ground Current Magnitude Differential Ground Current Angle Reserved (27 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 16 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 999.9 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 ----------CHNL seconds seconds DAYS A A A A A A A A A A A A A A --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 --F001 F001 F134 F134 F001 F050 F050 F001 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F001 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --ms ms --1 1 1 1 F500 F001 F001 F500 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Platform Direct I/O States (Read Only) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
B-10
GE Multilin

ADDR 1A00 1A02 1A04 1A06 1A08 1A09 1A0B 1A0C 1A0E 1A0F 1A11 1A13 1A15 1A17 1A18 1A1A 1A1B 1A1D 1A1E 1A20 1A22 1A23 1A25 1A26 1A28 1A29 1A2B 1A2C 1A40 1A80 1AC0 1B00 1B40 1C00 1C02 1C04 1C06 1C08 1C0A 1C0C 1C0E 1C10 1C12 1C14 REGISTER NAME Phase AG Voltage RMS Phase BG Voltage RMS Phase CG Voltage RMS Phase AG Voltage Magnitude Phase AG Voltage Angle Phase BG Voltage Magnitude Phase BG Voltage Angle Phase CG Voltage Magnitude Phase CG Voltage Angle Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle Auxiliary Voltage RMS Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude Auxiliary Voltage Angle Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude Zero Sequence Voltage Angle Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude Positive Sequence Voltage Angle Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude Negative Sequence Voltage Angle Reserved (20 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Three Phase Real Power Phase A Real Power Phase B Real Power Phase C Real Power Three Phase Reactive Power Phase A Reactive Power Phase B Reactive Power Phase C Reactive Power Three Phase Apparent Power Phase A Apparent Power Phase B Apparent Power -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W W W W var var var var VA VA VA 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 RANGE 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 --UNITS V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V --STEP 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 ---
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F001
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules) F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GE Multilin
B-11
ADDR 1C16 1C18 1C19 1C1A REGISTER NAME Phase C Apparent Power Three Phase Power Factor Phase A Power Factor Phase B Power Factor Phase C Power Factor Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Positive Watthour Negative Watthour Positive Varhour Negative Varhour Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Energy Clear Command Frequency ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase A Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase B Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase C ...Repeated for module number 2 Breaker x Arcing Clear Command ...Repeated for module number 2 Reset Unauthorized Access Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude Prefault Zero Seq Current Prefault Pos Seq Current Prefault Neg Seq Current Prefault Phase A Voltage Prefault Phase B Voltage Prefault Phase C Voltage Last Fault Location in Line length units (km or miles) 0 to 1 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -3276.7 to 3276.7 --A A A A A A V V V --1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 F126 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 0 to 1 --1 F126 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc kA2-cyc kA2-cyc 1 1 1 F060 F060 F060 0 to 1 2 to 90 --Hz 1 0.01 F126 F001 0 to 1000000000000 0 to 1000000000000 0 to 1000000000000 0 to 1000000000000 --Wh Wh varh varh --0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 --F060 F060 F060 F060 F001 RANGE -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -0.999 to 1 -0.999 to 1 -0.999 to 1 -0.999 to 1 --UNITS VA ----------STEP 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 --FORMAT F060 F013 F013 F013 F013 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0
1C1B 1C1C 1C20 1C40 1C60 1C80 1CA0 1D00 1D02 1D04 1D06 1D08 1D10 1D20 1D30 1D40 1D50 1D60 1D80 1D81 1D82 1D83 1D84 1D85 2200 2202 2204 2206 220C 220D 2230 2350 2352 2354 2356 2358 235A 235C 235E 2360 2362
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules) 0 0 0 0 0
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command) 0 (No) 0 Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules) 0 0 0
Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules) 0 (No)
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command) 0 (No) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fault Location (Read Only)
B-12
GE Multilin

ADDR 2400 2402 2403 2404 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2B00 2D00 2D80 2E00 2F00 2F80 3000 3001 3002 3004 3005 3011 3020 3030 3032 3034 3036 3038 303A 303C 303E 3040 3042 3100 3200 3202 3203 3400 3402 3404 REGISTER NAME Synchrocheck X Delta Voltage Synchrocheck X Delta Frequency Synchrocheck X Delta Phase ...Repeated for module number 2 Autoreclose Count ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items) Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) Remote Input States, one per register (32 items) Oscillography Number of Triggers Oscillography Available Records Oscillography Last Cleared Date Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record Oscillography Force Trigger Oscillography Clear Data Number Of Fault Reports Fault Time ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 Name of file to read Character position of current block within file Size of currently-available data block Block of data from requested file (122 items) Events Since Last Clear Number of Available Events Event Recorder Last Cleared Date --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 ----------------1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 400000000 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 ----------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 65535 --1 RANGE -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 0 to 655.35 0 to 179.9 UNITS V Hz STEP 1 0.01 0.1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F060 F001 F001
DEFAULT 0 0 0
Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules) F001 0
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only) F108 F108 F108 F108 F155 F108 F001 F001 F050 F001 F126 F126 F001 F050 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Offline) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 (No) 0 0 Expanded Digital I/O states (Read Only)
Expanded Remote I/O Status (Read Only)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
Fault Report Indexing (Read Only Non-Volatile) Fault Reports (Read Only Non-Volatile) (10 modules)
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write) F204 F003 F001 F001 F003 F003 F050 (none) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
Event Recorder (Read Only)
GE Multilin
B-13
ADDR 3406 34C0 REGISTER NAME Event Recorder Clear Command DCMA Inputs x Value ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 RTD Inputs x Value ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 -32768 to 32767 C 1 F002 RANGE 0 to 1 -9999.999 to 9999.999 UNITS ----STEP 1 0.001 FORMAT F126 F004
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (No) 0
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command) DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules) 34C2 34C4 34C6 34C8 34CA 34CC 34CE 34D0 34D2 34D4 34D6 34D8 34DA 34DC 34DE 34E0 34E2 34E4 34E6 34E8 34EA 34EC 34EE 34F0 34F1 34F2 34F3 34F4 34F5 34F6 34F7 34F8 34F9 34FA 34FB 34FC 34FD 34FE 34FF 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules) 0
B-14
GE Multilin

ADDR 350A 350B 350C 350D 350E 350F 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 351A 351B 351C 351D 351E 351F 3520 3521 3560 3570 4000 4002 4008 400A 4010 4011 4040 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 407E 407F REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 Ohm Inputs x Value ...Repeated for module number 2 Direct Device States, one per register (8 items) Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) Command Password Setting Setting Password Setting Command Password Entry Setting Password Entry Command Password Status Setting Password Status Invoke and Scroll through User Display Menu Operand LED Test Function LED Test Control Flash Message Time Default Message Timeout Default Message Intensity Screen Saver Feature Screen Saver Wait Time Current Cutoff Level Voltage Cutoff Level COM1 minimum response time COM2 minimum response time 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0.5 to 10 10 to 900 0 to 3 0 to 1 1 to 65535 0.002 to 0.02 0.1 to 1 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 ----------------------s s ----min pu V ms ms 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.1 10 10 0 to 65535 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules) F001 0
Expanded Platform Direct I/O Status (Read Only) F155 F108 F003 F003 F003 F003 F102 F102 F300 F102 F300 F001 F001 F101 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 (Offline) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 10 300 0 (25%) 0 (Disabled) 30 20 10 0 0
Passwords (Read/Write Command) Passwords (Read/Write Setting) Passwords (Read/Write)
Passwords (Read Only)
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting) User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
GE Multilin
B-15
ADDR 4080 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4089 408B 408D 4097 409A 409B 409C 40A0 40A1 40A2 40A3 40A4 40A5 40A7 40A8 40A9 40AA 40AB 40AC 40AD 40AE 40AF 40B0 40B1 40B2 40B3 40B4 40B5 40B6 40B7 40B8 40B9 40BA 40BC 40BE 40C0 40C8 40D0 40D1 40D2 40E0 40E1 40E2 40E3 40E4 40E5 40E6 REGISTER NAME Modbus Slave Address RS485 Com1 Baud Rate RS485 Com1 Parity RS485 Com2 Baud Rate RS485 Com2 Parity IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Network Address NSAP Default GOOSE Update Time DNP Port DNP Address DNP Client Addresses (2 items) TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol TCP Port Number for the UCA/MMS Protocol TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol (zero means automatic) (2 items) DNP Unsolicited Responses Function DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address Ethernet Operation Mode DNP User Map Function DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list DNP Current Scale Factor DNP Voltage Scale Factor DNP Power Scale Factor DNP Energy Scale Factor DNP Other Scale Factor DNP Current Default Deadband DNP Voltage Default Deadband DNP Power Default Deadband DNP Energy Default Deadband DNP Other Default Deadband DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period DNP Message Fragment Size DNP Client Address 3 DNP Client Address 4 DNP Client Address 5 DNP Communications Reserved (8 items) UCA Logical Device Name GOOSE Function UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS Flexlogic Operand UCA Communications Reserved (14 items) TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Tx Period IEC Number of Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list IEC Current Default Threshold IEC Voltage Default Threshold RANGE 1 to 254 0 to 11 0 to 2 0 to 11 0 to 2 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 --1 to 60 0 to 4 0 to 65519 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 60 1 to 255 0 to 65519 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 6 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 1 to 10080 30 to 2048 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 1 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 6 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 UNITS ------------------s --------------------s ------------------------------min ------------------------s ------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F001 F112 F113 F112 F113 F003 F003 F003 F074 F001 F177 F001 F003 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F192 F102 F001 F194 F194 F194 F194 F194 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F003 F003 F003 F001 F203 F102 F300 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 254 8 (115200) 0 (None) 8 (115200) 0 (None) 56554706 4294966272 56554497 0 60 0 (NONE) 1 0 502 20000 102 80 69 0 0 (Disabled) 5 10 1 0 (Half-Duplex) 0 (Disabled) 1 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 1440 240 0 0 0 0 UCADevice 1 (Enabled) 0 0 2404 0 (Disabled) 0 60 1 30000 30000
B-16
GE Multilin

ADDR 40E7 40E8 40E9 40EA 4100 4168 4169 416B 4170 4180 4181 41A0 41A2 41A4 41A6 41B0 41B1 41B2 41C0 41C1 41C2 41C3 41C4 41D0 4200 4260 4261 4280 4281 4282 4284 4286 4288 428A 428C 428E 4290 4292 4294 4296 4298 429A 429C 429E REGISTER NAME IEC Power Default Threshold IEC Energy Default Threshold IEC Other Default Threshold IEC Communications Reserved (22 items) DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items) Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP Addr Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port No. Clear Data Logger Data Logger Rate Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items) RTC Set Time SR Date Format SR Time Format IRIG-B Signal Type Fault Report Source Fault Report Trigger Fault Reports Clear Data Command Oscillography Number of Records Oscillography Trigger Mode Oscillography Trigger Position Oscillography Trigger Source Oscillography AC Input Waveforms Oscillography Analog Channel x (16 items) Oscillography Digital Channel x (63 items) Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED User LED type (latched or self-resetting) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 58 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 7 --0 to 235959 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 2 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 1 1 to 64 0 to 1 0 to 100 0 to 65535 0 to 4 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 UNITS ----------------------------------------% ----------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F001 F001 F001 F197 F102 F003 F001 F126 F178 F600 F050 F051 F052 F114 F167 F300 F126 F001 F118 F001 F300 F183 F600 F300 F300 F300 F300 F127
DEFAULT 30000 30000 30000 0 0 (Not Used) 0 (Disabled) 0 123 0 (No) 1 (1 min) 0 0 0 0 0 (None) 0 (SRC 1) 0 0 (No) 15 0 (Auto Overwrite) 50 0 2 (16 samples/cycle) 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Self-Reset)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command) Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)
Clock (Read/Write Command) Clock (Read/Write Setting)
Fault Report Settings and Commands (Read/Write Setting)
Fault Report Settings and Commands (Read/Write Command) Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
GE Multilin
B-17
ADDR 42A0 42A2 42A4 42A6 42A8 42AA 42AC 42AE 42B0 42B2 42B4 42B6 42B8 42BA 42BC 42BE 42C0 42C2 42C4 42C6 42C8 42CA 42CC 42CE 42D0 42D2 42D4 42D6 42D8 42DA 42DC 42DE 43E0 43E1 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4488 448C 4490 4494 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 Relay Programmed State Relay Name User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function User Programmable Direct Device Off Function User Programmable Remote Device Off Function User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function User Programmable Battery Fail Function User Programmable SNTP Fail Function User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function Phase CT Primary Phase CT Secondary Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 65000 0 to 1 1 to 65000 0 to 1 --------------------A --A --1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F133 F202 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F001 F123 F001 F123 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Installation (Read/Write Setting) 0 (Not Programmed) Relay-1 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 0 (1 A) 1 0 (1 A)
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
B-18
GE Multilin

ADDR 4500 4501 4502 4504 4505 4506 4508 4510 4580 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 458E 4595 459C 45A3 4600 4601 4602 4603 46D0 46D1 46D2 46D3 46D4 46D5 46F0 4700 4701 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 470A 470B 470D 470E 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 REGISTER NAME Phase VT Connection Phase VT Secondary Phase VT Ratio Auxiliary VT Connection Auxiliary VT Secondary Auxiliary VT Ratio ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 Source Name Source Phase CT Source Ground CT Source Phase VT Source Auxiliary VT ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Nominal Frequency Phase Rotation Frequency And Phase Reference Frequency Tracking Function Line Pos Seq Impedance Line Pos Seq Impedance Angle Line Zero Seq Impedance Line Zero Seq Impedance Angle Line Length Units Line Length UCA XCBR x SelTimOut Breaker 1 Function Breaker 1 Name Breaker 1 Mode Breaker 1 Open Breaker 1 Close Breaker 1 Phase A 3 Pole Breaker 1 Phase B Breaker 1 Phase C Breaker 1 External Alarm Breaker 1 Alarm Delay Breaker 1 Push Button Control Breaker 1 Manual Close Recal Time Breaker 1 UCA XCBR x SBOClass Breaker 1 UCA XCBR x SBOEna Breaker 1 Out Of Service UCA XCBR PwrSupSt Bit 0 Operand UCA XCBR x PresSt Operand UCA XCBR x TrpCoil Operand Reserved (2 items) 25 to 60 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0.01 to 250 25 to 90 0.01 to 650 25 to 90 0 to 1 0 to 2000 1 to 60 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1000000 0 to 1 0 to 1000000 1 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 Hz ------ ----s ------------------s --s ------------1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 0.1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 ------------1 1 1 1 RANGE 0 to 1 50 to 240 1 to 24000 0 to 6 50 to 240 1 to 24000 UNITS --V :1 --V :1 STEP 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F100 F001 F060 F166 F001 F060
DEFAULT 0 (Wye) 664 1 1 (Vag) 664 1
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules) F206 F400 F400 F400 F400 SRC 1 0 0 0 0
Power System (Read/Write Setting) F001 F106 F167 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F147 F001 F001 F102 F206 F157 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F003 F102 F003 F001 F102 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 60 0 (ABC) 0 (SRC 1) 1 (Enabled) 300 75 900 75 0 (km) 1000 30 0 (Disabled) Bkr 1 0 (3-Pole) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 1 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 0 0
Line (Read/Write Setting)
Breaker Control Global Settings (Read/Write Setting) Breaker Control (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
GE Multilin
B-19
ADDR 4718 4780 4781 4782 4783 4785 4786 4787 4788 4789 478A 478B 478C 478D 478E 478F 4790 4800 48F0 4A00 4C00 4C0A 4C14 4C19 4C20 4C40 4C60 4C80 4CA0 4CC0 4CE0 4E00 4E01 4E0B 4E15 4E1F 4E20 4E21 4E22 4E24 4E48 4E6C 4E90 4EB4 4ED8 4EFC 4F20 4F44 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 2 Synchrocheck 1 Function Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source Synchrocheck 1 Max Volt Diff Synchrocheck 1 Max Angle Diff Synchrocheck 1 Max Freq Diff Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Max Volt Synchrocheck 1 Dead V2 Max Volt Synchrocheck 1 Live V1 Min Volt Synchrocheck 1 Live V2 Min Volt Synchrocheck 1 Target Synchrocheck 1 Events Synchrocheck 1 Block Synchrocheck 1 Frequency Hysteresis ...Repeated for module number 2 FlexCurve A (120 items) FlexCurve B (120 items) Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) User display top line text User display bottom line text Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items) Reserved (7 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 User Programmable Pushbutton Function Programmable Pushbutton Top Line Prog Pushbutton On Text Prog Pushbutton Off Text Programmable Pushbutton Drop-Out Time Programmable Pushbutton Target User Programmable Pushbutton Events Programmable Pushbutton Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 0 to 2 ------0 to 60 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 --------s ------1 ------0.05 1 1 1 F109 F202 F202 F202 F001 F109 F102 F001 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----0 to 65535 --ms ms ----------1 1 1 ----1 --F011 F011 F001 F202 F202 F001 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 100000 0 to 100 0 to 2 0 to 5 0 to 1.25 0 to 1.25 0 to 1.25 0 to 1.25 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 0.1 ------V Hz --pu pu pu pu ------Hz 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.01 F102 F167 F167 F060 F001 F001 F176 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F102 F300 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1 (SRC 2) 10000 30 100 1 (LV1 and DV2) 30 30 70 70 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 6
Flexcurve A (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 0 0 0 Flexcurve B (Read/Write Setting) Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting) User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules) 2 (Disabled) (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B-20
GE Multilin

ADDR 4F68 4F8C 5000 5800 5801 5802 5803 5808 5810 5818 5820 5828 5830 5838 5840 5848 5850 5858 5860 5868 5870 5878 5880 5888 5890 5898 58A0 58A8 58B0 58B8 58C0 58C8 58D0 58D8 58E0 58E8 58F0 58F8 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 590B 590C 590D 5910 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) FlexLogic Timer 1 Type FlexLogic Timer 1 Pickup Delay FlexLogic Timer 1 Dropout Delay FlexLogic Timer 1 Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Phase TOC Function Phase TOC Signal Source Phase TOC Input Phase TOC Pickup Phase TOC Curve Phase TOC Multiplier Phase TOC Reset Phase TOC Voltage Restraint Phase TOC Block For Each Phase (3 items) Phase TOC Target Phase TOC Events Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------pu ----------------1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 60000 0 to 60000 0 to 65535 ----------1 1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
FlexLogic (Read/Write Setting) F300 F129 F001 F001 F001 16384 0 (millisecond) 0 0 0 FlexLogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
Phase TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules) F102 F167 F122 F001 F103 F001 F104 F102 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Phasor) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-21
ADDR 5920 5930 5940 5950 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay Phase Inst OC 1 Block for each phase (3 items) Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Function Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Input Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Curve Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Reset Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Block Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Target Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------pu --------------1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F122 F001 F103 F001 F104 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) 5A00 5A01 5A02 5A03 5A04 5A05 5A08 5A09 5A0A 5A10 5A20 5A30 5A40 5A50 5A60 5A70 5A80 5A90 5AA0 5AB0 5B00 5B01 5B02 5B03 5B04 5B05 5B06 5B07 5B08 5B09 5B0A 5B10 5B20 5B30 5B40 5B50 5C00 5C01 5C02 5C03 5C04 5C05 5C06 5C07 5C08 5C10 5C20 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Neutral TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Phasor) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B-22
GE Multilin

ADDR 5C30 5C40 5C50 5C60 5C70 5C80 5C90 5CA0 5CB0 5D00 5D01 5D02 5D03 5D04 5D05 5D06 5D07 5D08 5D09 5D0A 5D10 5D20 5D30 5D40 5D50 5E00 5E01 5E02 5E03 5E04 5E05 5E06 5E07 5E08 5E10 5E20 5E30 5E40 5E50 5E60 5E70 5E80 5E90 5EA0 5EB0 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 Negative Sequence TOC1 Function Negative Sequence TOC1 Signal Source Negative Sequence TOC1 Pickup Negative Sequence TOC1 Curve Negative Sequence TOC1 Multiplier Negative Sequence TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 ----pu ------1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------pu --------------1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules) F102 F167 F122 F001 F103 F001 F104 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Phasor) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) F167 F102 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Disabled) 1000 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Negative Sequence TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) F102 F167 F001 F103 F001 F104 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous)
GE Multilin
B-23
ADDR 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6410 64A0 64A1 64A2 64A3 64A4 64A5 64A6 64A7 65C0 65C1 65C2 65C3 65C4 65C5 65C6 65C7 65C8 65C9 65CA 65CB 65CC 65CD 65CE 65CF 65D0 65D1 65D2 65D3 65D4 65D5 65D6 65D7 65D8 65D9 65DA 65DB REGISTER NAME Negative Sequence TOC1 Block Negative Sequence TOC1 Target Negative Sequence TOC1 Events Reserved (7 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 Negative Sequence IOC1 Function Negative Sequence IOC1 Signal Source Negative Sequence IOC1 Pickup Negative Sequence IOC1 Delay Negative Sequence IOC1 Reset Delay Negative Sequence IOC1 Block Negative Sequence IOC1 Target Negative Sequence IOC1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function Negative Sequence Overvoltage Source Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Delay Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events Power Swing Function Power Swing Source Power Swing Mode Power Swing Supv Power Swing Fwd Reach Power Swing Fwd Rca Power Swing Rev Reach Power Swing Rev Rca Outer Limit Angle Middle Limit Angle Inner Limit Angle Delay 1 Pickup Delay 1 Reset Delay 2 Pickup Delay 3 Pickup Delay 4 Pickup Seal In Delay Trip Mode Power Swing Block Power Swing Target Power Swing Event Power Swing Shape Power Swing Quad Fwd Mid Power Swing Quad Fwd Out Power Swing Quad Rev Mid Power Swing Quad Rev Out Power Swing Outer Rgt Bld Power Swing Outer Left Bld 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1.25 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0.05 to 30 0.1 to 500 40 to 90 0.1 to 500 40 to 90 40 to 140 40 to 140 40 to 140 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 ----pu s s ------------pu ohms ohms s s s s s s ----------ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms 1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F102 F167 F513 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F514 F300 F109 F102 F085 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS --------STEP 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F300 F109 F102 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Negative Sequence IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 300 50 50 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Two Step) 600 5000 75 5000 75 120 90 60 30 50 17 9 17 400 0 (Delayed) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Mho) 6000 7000 6000 7000 10000 10000
Power Swing Detect (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
B-24
GE Multilin

ADDR 65DC 65DD 65DE 65DF 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 6706 6707 6708 6709 670A 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 6807 6808 6809 680A 680B 680C 680D 680E 680F 6810 6811 6812 6813 6814 6815 6816 6817 6818 6819 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824 6825 6826 6830 6831 REGISTER NAME Power Swing Middle Rgt Bld Power Swing Middle Lft Bld Power Swing Inner Rgt Bld Power Swing Inner Lft Bld Load Encroachment Function Load Encroachment Source Load Encroachment Min Volt Load Encroachment Reach Load Encroachment Angle Load Encroachment Pkp Delay Load Encroachment Rst Delay Load Encroachment Block Load Encroachment Target Load Encroachment Events Load Encroachment Reserved (6 items) Trip Mode Trip 3-Pole Input1 Trip 3-Pole Input2 Trip 3-Pole Input3 Trip 3-Pole Input4 Trip 3-Pole Input5 Trip 3-Pole Input6 Trip 1-Pole Input1 Trip 1-Pole Input2 Trip 1-Pole Input3 Trip 1-Pole Input4 Trip 1-Pole Input5 Trip 1-Pole Input6 Trip Reclose Input1 Trip Reclose Input2 Trip Reclose Input3 Trip Reclose Input4 Trip Reclose Input5 Trip Reclose Input6 Trip Force 3-Pole Trip Pilot Priority BKR Phase A Open BKR Phase B Open BKR Phase C Open Trip Events Reserved (7 items) Open Pole Function Open Pole Block Open Pole Voltage SUPV Open Pole Current PKP Open Pole Target Open Pole Events Reserved (10 items) DUTT D60 Function DUTT D60 Seal In Delay RANGE 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0.02 to 250 5 to 50 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 UNITS ohms ohms ohms ohms ----pu ohms s s ------------------------------------------------s ----------------pu --------s STEP 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 0.001
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F195 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 F300 F300 F300 F102 F001 F102 F300 F102 F001 F109 F102 F001 F102 F001
DEFAULT 10000 10000 10000 10000 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 250 100 30 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 50 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0
Load Encroachment (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Trip Output (Read/Write Setting)
Open Pole Detect (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
Pilot DUTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
GE Multilin
B-25
ADDR 6832 6833 6834 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839 6840 6841 6842 6843 6844 6845 6846 6847 6848 6849 684A 6850 6851 6852 6853 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 685A 685B 685C 685D 685E 685F 6860 6861 6862 6868 6869 686A 686B 686C 686D 686E 686F 6870 6871 6872 6873 6874 REGISTER NAME DUTT 1P No of Comm Bits DUTT D60 RX1 DUTT D60 RX2 DUTT D60 RX3 DUTT D60 RX4 DUTT 1P Target DUTT 1P Event Reserved (7 items) PUTT 1P Scheme Function PUTT 1P Rx Pickup Delay PUTT 1P Seal In Delay PUTT 1P No of Comm Bits PUTT 1P Rx1 PUTT 1P Rx2 PUTT 1P Rx3 PUTT 1P Rx4 PUTT 1P Target PUTT 1P Event Reserved (6 items) POTT 1P Scheme Function POTT 1P Permissive Echo POTT 1P Rx Pickup Delay POTT 1P Trans Block Pickup Delay POTT 1P Trans Block Reset Delay POTT 1P Echo Duration POTT 1P Echo Lockout POTT 1P Line End Open Pickup Delay POTT 1P Seal In Delay POTT 1P Gnd Dir OC Fwd POTT 1P No of Comm Bits POTT 1P Rx1 POTT 1P Rx2 POTT 1P Rx3 POTT 1P Rx4 POTT 1P Target POTT 1P Event POTT 1P Echo Cond Reserved (6 items) Hybrid POTT 1P Scheme Function Hybrid POTT 1P Permissive Echo Hybrid POTT 1P Rx Pickup Delay Hybrid POTT 1P Trans Block Pickup Delay Hybrid POTT 1P Trans Block Reset Delay Hybrid POTT 1P Echo Duration Hybrid POTT 1P Echo Lockout Hybrid POTT 1P Seal In Delay Hybrid POTT 1P Gnd Dir OC Fwd Hybrid POTT 1P Gnd Dir OC Rev Hybrid POTT 1P No of Comm Bits Hybrid POTT 1P Rx1 Hybrid POTT 1P Rx2 RANGE 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 UNITS ------------------s s --------------------s s s s s s s ------------------------s s s s s ------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F198 F300 F300 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001 F102 F001 F001 F198 F300 F300 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001 F102 F199 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F198 F300 F300 F300 F300 F109 F102 F300 F001 F102 F199 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F300 F198 F300 F300
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (1) 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 (1) 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 20 90 100 250 50 0 0 0 (1) 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 20 90 100 250 0 0 0 0 (1) 0 0
Pilot PUTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
Pilot POTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
Pilot Hybrid POTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
B-26
GE Multilin

ADDR 6875 6876 6877 6878 6879 687A 687B 687C 6880 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 6888 6889 688A 688B 688C 688D 688E 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 689A 689B 689C 689D 689E 689F 68A0 68A1 68A2 68A3 68A4 68A5 68A6 68A7 68A8 68A9 68AA 68AB 68AC REGISTER NAME Hybrid POTT 1P Rx3 Hybrid POTT 1P Rx4 Hybrid POTT 1P Target Hybrid POTT 1P Event Hybrid POTT Echo Cond Hybrid POTT Weak Infeed Hybrid POTT W/I Cond Reserved (4 items) Blocking Scheme 1P Function Block 1P Rx Coord Pickup Delay Block 1P Transient Block Pickup Delay Block 1P Transient Block Reset Delay Blocking Scheme 1P Seal In Delay Blocking Scheme 1P Gnd Dir OC Fwd Blocking Scheme 1P Gnd Dir OC Rev Blocking Scheme 1P No of Comm Bits Blocking Scheme 1P Rx1 Blocking Scheme 1P Rx2 Blocking Scheme 1P Rx3 Blocking Scheme 1P Rx4 Blocking 1P Target Blocking 1P Event Reserved (2 items) Autoreclose 1 Mode Autoreclose 1 Maximum Number of Shots Autoreclose 1 Block Breaker 1 Autoreclose 1 Close Time Breaker 1 Autoreclose 1 BKR Man Close Autoreclose 1 Function Autoreclose 1 Blk Time Mnl Cls Autoreclose 1 1P Init Autoreclose 1 3P Init Autoreclose 1 3P TD Init Autoreclose 1 Multi P Fault Autoreclose 1 BKR 1 Pole Open Autoreclose 1 BKR 3 Pole Open Autoreclose 1 3P Dead Time 1 Autoreclose 1 3P Dead Time 2 Autoreclose 1 Extend Dead T1 Autoreclose 1 Dead T1 Extension Autoreclose 1 Reset Autoreclose 1 Reset Time Autoreclose 1 BKR Closed Autoreclose 1 Block Autoreclose 1 Pause Autoreclose 1 Inc Seq Time Autoreclose 1 Block Breaker 2 Autoreclose 1 Close Time Breaker 2 Autoreclose 1 Transfer 1 to 2 Autoreclose 1 Transfer 2 to 1 Autoreclose 1 Breaker 1 Fail Option Autoreclose 1 Breaker 2 Fail Option RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 3 1 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 655.35 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 0 to 655.35 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS ------------------s s s s --------------------------s ----s ------------s s --s --s ------s --s --------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F300 F300 F109 F102 F300 F199 F300 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F300 F198 F300 F300 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001 F080 F001 F300 F001 F300 F102 F001 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 F001 F300 F001 F300 F001 F300 F300 F300 F001 F300 F001 F126 F126 F081 F081
DEFAULT 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 1 (Enabled) 0 0 0 (Disabled) 10 30 90 0 0 0 0 (1) 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (1 & 3 Pole) 2 0 10 0 0 (Disabled) 1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 120 0 50 0 6000 0 0 0 500 0 10 0 (No) 0 (No) 0 (Continue) 0 (Continue)
Pilot Blocking (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
Autoreclose 1P 3P (Read/Write Setting)
GE Multilin
B-27
ADDR 68AD 68AE 68AF 68B0 68B1 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 700A 7013 7100 7101 7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7120 7121 7122 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 713A 713B 713C 713D 713E 713F 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 REGISTER NAME Autoreclose 1 1P Dead Time Autoreclose 1 BKR Sequence Autoreclose 1 Transfer Time Autoreclose 1 Event Reserved (16 items) Phase Undervoltage 1 Function Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage Phase Undervoltage 1 Block Phase Undervoltage 1 Target Phase Undervoltage 1 Events Phase UV Measurement Mode Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 Phase Overvoltage 1 Function Phase Overvoltage 1 Source Phase Overvoltage 1 Pickup Phase Overvoltage 1 Delay Phase Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay Phase Overvoltage 1 Block Phase Overvoltage 1 Target Phase Overvoltage 1 Events Reserved (8 items) Distance Signal Source Memory Duration Force Self-Polar Phase Distance Zone 1 Function Phase Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision Phase Distance Zone 1 Reach Phase Distance Zone 1 Direction Phase Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit Phase Distance Zone 1 Delay Phase Distance Zone 1 Block Phase Distance Zone 1 Target Phase Distance Zone 1 Events Phase Distance Zone 1 Shape Phase Distance Zone 1 RCA Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR RCA Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR Comp Limit Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder RCA Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder RCA Phase Distance Zone 1 Volt Limit Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Voltage Connection Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Current Connection ...Repeated for module number 2 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 5 to 25 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0.05 to 30 0.02 to 250 0 to 1 30 to 90 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 30 to 90 30 to 90 30 to 90 0.02 to 500 60 to 90 0.02 to 500 60 to 90 0 to 5 0 to 12 0 to 12 ----pu s s ----------cycles ----pu ohms -- s -------- ohms ohms pu ----1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.01 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.001 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F167 F001 F300 F102 F001 F001 F154 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F120 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F153 F153 RANGE 0 to 655.35 0 to 4 0 to 655.35 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 1 0 to 600 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS s --s --------pu --s pu ----------STEP 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F001 F082 F001 F102 F102 F102 F167 F001 F111 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F186 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 100 3 (1 - 2) 400 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 (Definite Time) 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Phase to Ground) 0
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (SRC 1) 10 0 0 (Disabled) 200 200 0 (Forward) 90 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Mho) 85 85 90 1000 85 1000 85 0 0 (None) 0 (None)
Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Phase Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (4 modules)
B-28
GE Multilin

ADDR 7158 716C 7190 7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 7197 7198 7199 719A 719B 719C 719D 719E 719F 71A0 71A1 71A2 71A3 71A4 71A5 71A6 71A7 71BE 71D5 71F0 71F1 71F2 71F3 71F4 71F5 71F6 71F7 71F8 71F9 71FA 71FB 71FC 71FD 71FE 7200 7201 7208 7209 720A 720B 720C 720D REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 Ground Distance Zone 1 Function Ground Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision Ground Distance Zone 1 Reach Ground Distance Zone 1 Direction Ground Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit Ground Distance Zone 1 Delay Ground Distance Zone 1 Block Ground Distance Zone 1 Target Ground Distance Zone 1 Events Ground Distance Zone 1 Shape Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0 Z1 Mag Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0 Z1 Ang Ground Distance Zone 1 RCA Ground Distance Zone 1 DIR RCA Ground Distance Zone 1 DIR Comp Limit Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder RCA Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder RCA Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0M Z1 Mag Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0M Z1 Ang Ground Distance Zone 1 Volt Level Ground Distance Zone 1 Reserved ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 Line Pickup Function Line Pickup Signal Source Line Pickup Phase IOC Pickup Line Pickup UV Pickup Line End Open Pickup Delay Line End Open Reset Delay Line Pickup OV Pickup Delay Autoreclose Coordination Pickup Delay Autoreclose Coordination Reset Delay Autoreclose Coordination Bypass Line Pickup Block Line Pickup Target Line Pickup Events Terminal Open AR Accelerate Breaker Failure 1 Function Breaker Failure 1 Mode Breaker Failure 1 Source Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate Breaker Failure 1 Block Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 3 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0.001 to 30 ----pu pu s s s s s --------------------------pu 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0 to 1 0.05 to 30 0.02 to 250 0 to 1 30 to 90 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.5 to 7 -90 to 90 30 to 90 30 to 90 30 to 90 0.02 to 500 60 to 90 0.02 to 500 60 to 90 0 to 7 -90 to 90 0 to 5 ----pu ohms -- s ---------- ohms ohms -- pu --1 0.001 0.01 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.001 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Ground Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (4 modules) F102 F001 F001 F154 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F120 F001 F002 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F002 F001 F001 0 (Disabled) 200 200 0 (Forward) 90 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Mho) 270 0 85 85 90 1000 85 1000 85 0 0 0 0
Line Pickup (Read/Write Grouped Setting) F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F300 F109 F102 F300 F300 F102 F157 F167 F126 F126 F300 F300 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 700 150 90 40 45 5 1 (Enabled) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (3-Pole) 0 (SRC 1) 1 (Yes) 1 (Yes) 0 0 1050
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
GE Multilin
B-29
ADDR 720E 720F 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 7218 7219 721A 721B 721C 721D 721E 721F 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 7226 7227 7260 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265 7266 7267 7268 7270 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284 7285 7286 7287 7288 7289 728A 728B 728C 728D 728E 7290 REGISTER NAME Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1 Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 2 Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 3 Breaker Failure 1 Timer 3 Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay Breaker Failure 1 Target Breaker Failure 1 Events Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C ...Repeated for module number 2 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Function Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Source Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 ECA Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Pol V Threshold Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block OC Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Target Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 Neutral DIR OC1 Function Neutral DIR OC1 Source Neutral DIR OC1 Polarizing Neutral DIR OC1 Forward ECA Neutral DIR OC1 Forward Limit Angle Neutral DIR OC1 Forward Pickup Neutral DIR OC1 Reverse Limit Angle Neutral DIR OC1 Reverse Pickup Neutral DIR OC1 Target Neutral DIR OC1 Block Neutral DIR OC1 Events Neutral DIR OC X Polarizing Voltage Neutral DIR OC X Op Current Neutral DIR OC X Offset Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 2 -90 to 90 40 to 90 0.002 to 30 40 to 90 0.002 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 250 0 to 1 ------ Lag pu pu ---------- --1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 F102 F167 F230 F002 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F300 F102 F231 F196 F001 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 359 0 to 3 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------pu --------1 1 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F300 F001 F001 F126 F109 F102 F001 RANGE 0.001 to 30 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0.001 to 30 0.001 to 30 0.001 to 30 0.001 to 30 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 UNITS pu --s --s --s ------pu pu pu pu s s ------------------STEP 0.001 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 0.001 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F001 F126 F001 F126 F001 F126 F001 F300 F300 F300 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F102 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 1050 1 (Yes) 0 1 (Yes) 0 1 (Yes) 0 0 0 0 1050 1050 1050 1050 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase Directional (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 30 700 0 (No) 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Neutral Directional OC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Voltage) 75 90 50 90 50 0 (Self-reset) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Calculated V0) 0 (Calculated 3I0) 0 0
B-30
GE Multilin

ADDR 72A0 72A1 72A2 72A3 72A4 72A5 72A6 72A7 72A8 72A9 72AA 72AB 72AC 72B0 72C0 72C1 72C2 72C3 72C4 72C5 72C6 72C7 72C8 7300 7301 7307 730B 730E 730F 7311 7313 7318 7330 7348 7360 7378 7390 73A8 73C0 73D8 73F0 7408 7420 7438 7450 7468 7480 7498 74B0 74C8 74E0 REGISTER NAME Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Function Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Source Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Type Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Forward ECA Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Forward Limit Angle Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Forward Pickup Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Reverse Limit Angle Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Reverse Pickup Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Target Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Block Negative Sequence DIR OC1 Events Negative Sequence DIR OC X Offset Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 Breaker x Arcing Amp Function Breaker x Arcing Amp Source Breaker x Arcing Amp Init Breaker x Arcing Amp Delay Breaker x Arcing Amp Limit Breaker x Arcing Amp Block Breaker x Arcing Amp Target Breaker x Arcing Amp Events ...Repeated for module number 2 DCMA Inputs x Function DCMA Inputs x ID DCMA Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items) DCMA Inputs x Units DCMA Inputs x Range DCMA Inputs x Minimum Value DCMA Inputs x Maximum Value DCMA Inputs x Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 --0 to 6 -9999.999 to 9999.999 -9999.999 to 9999.999 0 to 65535 ----------------1 --1 --1 0.001 0.001 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 65.535 0 to 50000 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 ------s kA2-cyc ------1 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 90 40 to 90 0.05 to 30 40 to 90 0.05 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 250 0 to 1 UNITS ------ Lag pu pu ------ --STEP 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.01 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F102 F167 F179 F002 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F300 F102 F001 F001
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Neg Sequence) 75 90 5 90 5 0 (Self-reset) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0
Negative Sequence Directional OC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules) F102 F167 F300 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 0 1000 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules) F102 F205 F001 F206 F173 F004 F004 F001 0 (Disabled) DCMA Ip 1 0 mA 6 (4 to 20 mA) 4000 20000 0
GE Multilin
B-31
ADDR 74F8 7510 7528 7540 7541 7547 754B 754C 7550 7560 7570 7580 7590 75A0 75B0 75C0 75D0 75E0 75F0 7600 7610 7620 7630 7640 7650 7660 7670 7680 7690 76A0 76B0 76C0 76D0 76E0 76F0 7700 7710 7720 7730 7740 7750 7760 7770 7780 7790 77A0 77B0 77C0 77D0 77E0 77F0 7800 7810 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 RTD Inputs x Function RTD Inputs x ID RTD Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items) RTD Inputs x Type RTD Inputs x Reserved 2 (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 3 0 to 65535 ----------1 --1 1 1 F102 F205 F001 F174 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
0 (Disabled) RTD Ip 1 0 0 (100 Platinum) 0
B-32
GE Multilin

ADDR 7820 7830 7840 7841 7847 7850 7F00 7F01 7F02 7F03 7F04 7F05 7F06 7F07 7F08 7F10 7F20 7F30 7F31 7F32 7F33 7F34 7F35 7F36 7F37 7F38 7F40 7F50 7F60 7F61 7F62 7F63 7F64 7F65 7F66 7F67 7F68 7F69 7F70 7F80 8000 8800 9000 9001 9004 9005 9006 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 Ohm Inputs x Function Ohm Inputs x ID Ohm Inputs x Reserved (9 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 Auxiliary UV 1 Function Auxiliary UV 1 Signal Source Auxiliary UV 1 Pickup Auxiliary UV 1 Delay Auxiliary UV 1 Curve Auxiliary UV 1 Minimum Voltage Auxiliary UV 1 Block Auxiliary UV 1 Target Auxiliary UV 1 Events Auxiliary UV 1 Reserved (7 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 Tracking Frequency FlexState Parameters (256 items) FlexElement 1 Function FlexElement 1 Name FlexElement 1 InputP FlexElement 1 InputM FlexElement 1 Compare 2 to 90 --0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 Hz ------------0.01 --1 --1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ----pu s --pu --------1 1 0.001 0.01 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1.25 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 ------1 --1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules) F102 F205 F001 0 (Disabled) Ohm Ip 1 0
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules) F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 300 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules) F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 300 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules) F102 F167 F001 F001 F111 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 700 100 0 (Definite Time) 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Frequency (Read Only) F001 F300 F102 F206 F600 F600 F516 0 0 0 (Disabled) FxE 1 0 0 0 (LEVEL) FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting) FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
GE Multilin
B-33
ADDR 9007 9008 9009 900A 900C 900D 900F 9010 9011 9012 9013 9014 9028 903C 9050 9064 9078 908C 90A0 90B4 90C8 90DC 90F0 9104 9118 912C 9A01 9A03 9A05 9A07 9A09 9A0B 9A0D 9A0F 9A11 9A13 9A15 9A17 9A19 9A1B 9A1D 9A1F A000 A001 A002 A009 A00A A00B A040 REGISTER NAME FlexElement 1 Input FlexElement 1 Direction FlexElement 1 Hysteresis FlexElement 1 Pickup FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units FlexElement 1 DeltaT FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay FlexElement 1 Reset Delay FlexElement 1 Block FlexElement 1 Target FlexElement 1 Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 FlexElement 1 Actual ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) Setting Groups Block FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 to 8 (5 items) Setting Group Function Setting Group Events Current Setting Group VT Fuse Failure Function 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 --------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F001 F300 F300 F102 F102 F001 F102 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 --0.001 F004 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.1 to 50 -90 to 90 0 to 2 20 to 86400 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 UNITS ----% pu ----s s ------STEP 1 1 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 FORMAT F515 F517 F001 F004 F518 F003 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (SIGNED) 0 (OVER) 30 1000 0 (Milliseconds) 20 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules) 0
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only) VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
B-34
GE Multilin

ADDR A041 A042 A043 A044 A045 A400 A401 A410 A411 A412 A413 A414 A415 A416 A417 A418 A419 A41A A41B A41C A41D A41E A428 AC00 AC78 AD00 AD01 AD02 AD03 AD04 AD05 AD06 AD0A AD14 AD1E AD28 AD32 AD3C AD46 AD50 AD5A AD64 AD6E AD78 AD82 AD8C AD96 B000 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Selector 1 Position Selector 2 Position Selector 1 Function Selector 1 Range Selector 1 Timeout Selector 1 Step Up Selector 1 Step Mode Selector 1 Ack Selector 1 Bit0 Selector 1 Bit1 Selector 1 Bit2 Selector 1 Bit Mode Selector 1 Bit Ack Selector 1 Power Up Mode Selector 1 Target Selector 1 Events Selector 1 Reserved (10 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 FlexCurve C (120 items) FlexCurve D (120 items) Latch 1 Function Latch 1 Type Latch 1 Set Latch 1 Reset Latch 1 Target Latch 1 Events Latch 1 Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Digital Element 1 Function 0 to 1 --1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --ms ms --------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 to 7 1 to 7 0 to 1 1 to 7 3 to 60 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 1 ----------s ------------------------1 1 1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Selector Switch Actuals (Read Only) F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F300 F083 F300 F300 F300 F300 F083 F300 F084 F109 F102 --0 1 0 (Disabled) 7 50 0 0 (Time-out) 0 0 0 0 0 (Time-out) 0 0 (Restore) 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) ---
Selector Switch (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
Flexcurve C (Read/Write Setting) F011 F011 F102 F519 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Reset Dominant) 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 Flexcurve D (Read/Write Setting) Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules) F102 0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
B-35
ADDR B001 B015 B016 B018 B01A B01B B01C B01D B020 B040 B060 B080 B0A0 B0C0 B0E0 B100 B120 B140 B160 B180 B1A0 B1C0 B1E0 B300 B301 B307 B30A B30B B30C B30D B30F B311 B312 B313 B314 B315 B320 B340 B360 B380 B3A0 B3C0 B3E0 C000 C006 C007 C008 C010 C018 C020 C028 REGISTER NAME Digital Element 1 Name Digital Element 1 Input Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay Digital Element 1 Reset Delay Digital Element 1 Block Digital Element 1 Target Digital Element 1 Events Digital Element 1 Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Digital Counter 1 Function Digital Counter 1 Name Digital Counter 1 Units Digital Counter 1 Block Digital Counter 1 Up Digital Counter 1 Down Digital Counter 1 Preset Digital Counter 1 Compare Digital Counter 1 Reset Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset Digital Counter 1 Reserved (11 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 Contact Input x Name Contact Input x Events Contact Input x Debounce Time ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 --0 to 1 0 to 16 ----ms --1 0.5 F205 F102 F001 0 to 1 ----0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 -2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483647 to 2147483647 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----------------------------1 ----1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --F102 F205 F206 F300 F300 F300 F004 F004 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 RANGE --0 to 65535 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --UNITS ----s s --------STEP --1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 --FORMAT F203 F300 F003 F003 F300 F109 F102 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT Dig Element 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules) 0 (Disabled) Counter 1 (none) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) Cont Ip 1 0 (Disabled) 20
B-36
GE Multilin

ADDR C030 C038 C040 C048 C050 C058 C060 C068 C070 C078 C080 C088 C090 C098 C0A0 C0A8 C0B0 C0B8 C0C0 C0C8 C0D0 C0D8 C0E0 C0E8 C0F0 C0F8 C100 C108 C110 C118 C120 C128 C130 C138 C140 C148 C150 C158 C160 C168 C170 C178 C180 C188 C190 C198 C1A0 C1A8 C1B0 C1B8 C1C0 C1C8 C1D0 C1D8 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
B-37
ADDR C1E0 C1E8 C1F0 C1F8 C200 C208 C210 C218 C220 C228 C230 C238 C240 C248 C250 C258 C260 C268 C270 C278 C280 C288 C290 C298 C2A0 C2A8 C2B0 C2B8 C2C0 C2C8 C2D0 C2D8 C2E0 C2E8 C2F0 C2F8 C600 C680 C690 C691 C69B C69C C69D C69E C69F C6A0 C6B0 C6C0 C6D0 C6E0 C6F0 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 ...Repeated for module number 65 ...Repeated for module number 66 ...Repeated for module number 67 ...Repeated for module number 68 ...Repeated for module number 69 ...Repeated for module number 70 ...Repeated for module number 71 ...Repeated for module number 72 ...Repeated for module number 73 ...Repeated for module number 74 ...Repeated for module number 75 ...Repeated for module number 76 ...Repeated for module number 77 ...Repeated for module number 78 ...Repeated for module number 79 ...Repeated for module number 80 ...Repeated for module number 81 ...Repeated for module number 82 ...Repeated for module number 83 ...Repeated for module number 84 ...Repeated for module number 85 ...Repeated for module number 86 ...Repeated for module number 87 ...Repeated for module number 88 ...Repeated for module number 89 ...Repeated for module number 90 ...Repeated for module number 91 ...Repeated for module number 92 ...Repeated for module number 93 ...Repeated for module number 94 ...Repeated for module number 95 ...Repeated for module number 96 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout Virtual Input x Function Virtual Input x Name Virtual Input x Programmed Type Virtual Input x Events Virtual Input x UCA SBOClass Virtual Input x UCA SBOEna Virtual Input x Reserved ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 0 to 3 1 to 60 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 2 0 to 1 ----s --------------1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 --F128 F001 F102 F205 F127 F102 F001 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting) 1 (33 Vdc) 30 0 (Disabled) Virt Ip 1 0 (Latched) 0 (Disabled) 1 0 (Disabled) 0 Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting) Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
B-38
GE Multilin

ADDR C700 C710 C720 C730 C740 C750 C760 C770 C780 C790 C7A0 C7B0 C7C0 C7D0 C7E0 C7F0 C800 C810 C820 C830 C840 C850 C860 C870 C880 CC90 CC9A CC9B CCA0 CCB0 CCC0 CCD0 CCE0 CCF0 CD00 CD10 CD20 CD30 CD40 CD50 CD60 CD70 CD80 CD90 CDA0 CDB0 CDC0 CDD0 CDE0 CDF0 CE00 CE10 CE20 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Virtual Output x Name Virtual Output x Events Virtual Output x Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 --0 to 1 ----------1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules) F205 F102 F001 Virt Op 1 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-39
ADDR CE30 CE40 CE50 CE60 CE70 CE80 CE90 CEA0 CEB0 CEC0 CED0 CEE0 CEF0 CF00 CF10 CF20 CF30 CF40 CF50 CF60 CF70 CF80 CF90 CFA0 CFB0 CFC0 CFD0 CFE0 CFF0 D000 D010 D020 D030 D040 D050 D060 D070 D080 D280 D281 D282 D283 D290 D29A D29B D29C D29D D29E D29F D2A0 D2B0 D2C0 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 Test Mode Function (Read/Write Setting) Force VFD and LED (Read/Write) Test Mode Initiate (Read/Write Setting) Clear All Relay Records Command (R/W Command) Contact Output x Name Contact Output x Operation Contact Output x Seal In Latching Output x Reset Contact Output x Events Latching Output x Type Reserved ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------------------------1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 --F102 F126 F300 F126 F205 F300 F300 F300 F102 F090 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Mandatory 0 (Disabled) 0 (No) 1 0 (No) Cont Op 1 0 0 0 1 (Enabled) 0 (Operate-dominant) 0
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
B-40
GE Multilin

ADDR D2D0 D2E0 D2F0 D300 D310 D320 D330 D340 D350 D360 D370 D380 D390 D3A0 D3B0 D3C0 D3D0 D3E0 D3F0 D400 D410 D420 D430 D440 D450 D460 D470 D480 D490 D4A0 D4B0 D4C0 D4D0 D4E0 D4F0 D500 D510 D520 D530 D540 D550 D560 D570 D580 D590 D5A0 D5B0 D5C0 D5D0 D5E0 D5F0 D600 D610 D620 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 ...Repeated for module number 33 ...Repeated for module number 34 ...Repeated for module number 35 ...Repeated for module number 36 ...Repeated for module number 37 ...Repeated for module number 38 ...Repeated for module number 39 ...Repeated for module number 40 ...Repeated for module number 41 ...Repeated for module number 42 ...Repeated for module number 43 ...Repeated for module number 44 ...Repeated for module number 45 ...Repeated for module number 46 ...Repeated for module number 47 ...Repeated for module number 48 ...Repeated for module number 49 ...Repeated for module number 50 ...Repeated for module number 51 ...Repeated for module number 52 ...Repeated for module number 53 ...Repeated for module number 54 ...Repeated for module number 55 ...Repeated for module number 56 ...Repeated for module number 57 ...Repeated for module number 58 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
B-41
ADDR D630 D640 D650 D660 D670 D680 D800 D810 D811 D812 D814 D816 D818 D81A D81C D820 D822 D823 D824 D825 D826 D829 D82B D82D D82E D8B0 D910 DB40 DB41 DB42 DB43 DB44 DB48 DB41 DB42 DB43 DB44 DB50 DB51 DB52 DB53 DB54 DB58 DB5C DB60 DB64 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 59 ...Repeated for module number 60 ...Repeated for module number 61 ...Repeated for module number 62 ...Repeated for module number 63 ...Repeated for module number 64 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset Control Pushbutton 1 Function Control Pushbutton 1 Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 Clear Fault Reports Operand Clear Event Records Operand Clear Oscillography Operand Clear Data Logger Operand Clear Breaker Arcing Amps 1 Operand Clear Breaker Arcing Amps 2 Operand Clear Energy Operand Clear Unauthorized Access Operand Clear Platform Direct I/O Stats Operand Clear Relay Records Reserved Force Contact Input x State (96 items) Force Contact Output x State (64 items) Direct Device ID Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 1 Configuration Function Platform Direct I/O Data Rate Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 2 Configuration Function Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function Platform Direct I/O Clear Counters Command Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 1 Configuration Function Platform Direct I/O Data Rate Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 2 Configuration Function Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function Direct Input 1 Device Number Direct Input 1 Number Direct Input 1 Default State Direct Input 1 Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 0 to 2 0 to 3 1 to 8 0 to 1 64 to 128 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 64 to 128 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 8 0 to 96 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------kbps --------kbps ------------1 1 1 1 64 1 1 1 1 64 1 1 1 1 1 1 F144 F131 F001 F126 F001 F126 F102 F126 F126 F001 F126 F102 F001 F001 F108 F102 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 F300 F102 F102 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Reset (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
Clear Relay Records (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 0 (No) 64 0 (No) 0 (Disabled) 0 (No) 0 (No) 64 0 (No) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled) Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) Platform Direct I/O (Read/Write Setting)
Platform Direct I/O Commands (Read/Write Command)
Platform Direct Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
B-42
GE Multilin

ADDR DB68 DB6C DB70 DB74 DB78 DB7C DB80 DB84 DB88 DB8C DB90 DB94 DB98 DB9C DBA0 DBA4 DBA8 DBAC DBB0 DBB4 DBB8 DBBC DBC0 DBC4 DBC8 DBCC DD00 DD01 DD02 DD04 DD06 DD08 DD0A DD0C DD0E DD10 DD12 DD14 DD16 DD18 DD1A DD1C DD1E DD20 DD22 DD24 DD26 DD28 DD2A DD2C DD2E DD30 DD32 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Direct Output 1 Operand Direct Output 1 Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 0 to 65535 0 to 1 ----1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) F300 F102 0 0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
B-43
ADDR DD34 DD36 DD38 DD3A DD3C DD3E DE00 DE01 DE02 DE03 DE04 DE08 DE09 DE0A DE0B DE0C DE10 DE11 DE12 DE13 DE14 DE18 DE19 DE1A DE1B DE1C E000 E00A E014 E01E E028 E032 E03C E046 E050 E05A E064 E06E E078 E082 E08C E096 E100 E101 E102 E103 E104 E108 E10C E110 E114 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Function Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Message Count Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Threshold Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Events ...Reserved (4 items) Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Function Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Message Count Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Threshold Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Events ...Reserved (4 items) Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events ...Reserved (4 items) Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events ...Reserved (4 items) Remote Device 1 ID ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 Remote Input x Device Remote Input x Bit Pair Remote Input x Default State Remote Input x Events ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 1 to 16 0 to 64 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------1 1 1 1 F001 F156 F108 F102 ------F202 0 to 1 100 to 1000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 --------1 1 1 1 F102 F001 F001 F102 0 to 1 100 to 1000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 --------1 1 1 1 F102 F001 F001 F102 0 to 1 100 to 1000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 --------1 1 1 1 F102 F001 F001 F102 0 to 1 100 to 1000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 --------1 1 1 1 F102 F001 F001 F102 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Platform Direct I/O Alarms (Read/Write Setting) 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled)
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules) Remote Device 1
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) 1 0 (None) 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled)
B-44
GE Multilin

ADDR E118 E11C E120 E124 E128 E12C E130 E134 E138 E13C E140 E144 E148 E14C E150 E154 E158 E15C E160 E164 E168 E16C E170 E174 E178 E17C E600 E601 E602 E604 E608 E60C E610 E614 E618 E61C E620 E624 E628 E62C E630 E634 E638 E63C E640 E644 E648 E64C E650 E654 E658 E65C E660 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Remote Output DNA x Operand Remote Output DNA x Events Remote Output DNA x Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) F300 F102 F001 0 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-45
ADDR E664 E668 E66C E670 E674 E678 E67C E680 E681 E682 E684 E688 E68C E690 E694 E698 E69C E6A0 E6A4 E6A8 E6AC E6B0 E6B4 E6B8 E6BC E6C0 E6C4 E6C8 E6CC E6D0 E6D4 E6D8 E6DC E6E0 E6E4 E6E8 E6EC E6F0 E6F4 E6F8 E6FC REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 Remote Output UserSt x Operand Remote Output UserSt x Events Remote Output UserSt x Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 ...Repeated for module number 7 ...Repeated for module number 8 ...Repeated for module number 9 ...Repeated for module number 10 ...Repeated for module number 11 ...Repeated for module number 12 ...Repeated for module number 13 ...Repeated for module number 14 ...Repeated for module number 15 ...Repeated for module number 16 ...Repeated for module number 17 ...Repeated for module number 18 ...Repeated for module number 19 ...Repeated for module number 20 ...Repeated for module number 21 ...Repeated for module number 22 ...Repeated for module number 23 ...Repeated for module number 24 ...Repeated for module number 25 ...Repeated for module number 26 ...Repeated for module number 27 ...Repeated for module number 28 ...Repeated for module number 29 ...Repeated for module number 30 ...Repeated for module number 31 ...Repeated for module number 32 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 F300 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) 0 0 (Disabled) 0
B-46
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001 UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F040 UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F002 UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER) Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970.
F003 UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) High order word is stored in the first register. Low order word is stored in the second register.
F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050) First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January, 2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F004 UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) High order word is stored in the first register/ Low order word is stored in the second register.
F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050) First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx). Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm; Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Seconds 1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s) (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
F005 UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F006 UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F011 UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points) A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time value is stored.
F060 FLOATING_POINT IEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F070 HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
F012 DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING (unsigned 16-bit integer) MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the number of decimal points to display. Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is 12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F013 POWER_FACTOR PWR FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER) Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indicate leading.
F080 ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE MODE 0 = 1 & 3 Pole, 1 = 1 Pole, 2 = 3 Pole-A, 3 = 3 Pole-B
F081 ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR FAIL OPTION 0 = Continue, 1 = Lockout
GE Multilin
B-47
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask curve shape IAC Very Inv bitmask
APPENDIX B
curve shape
F082 ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR SEQUENCE 0 = 1, 1 = 2, 2 = 1 & 2, 3 = 1 2, 4 = 2 1
F104 ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
F083 ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES 0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
F105 ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT F084 ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP 0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore F106 ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION F085 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING SHAPE 0 = Mho Shape, 1 = Quad Shape F108 ENUMERATION: OFF/ON F086 ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On F109 ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION F090 ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE 0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant F110 ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL F100 ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Wye; 1 = Delta F111 ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES F101 ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY 0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100% F112 ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES F102 ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
bitmask 0 1 2 value 300 1200 2400 4800 bitmask 4 5 6 7 value 9600 19200 38400 57600 bitmask 8 9 10 11 value 115200 14400 28800 33600
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
0 = Off, 1 = On
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
F103 ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 curve shape IEEE Mod Inv IEEE Very Inv IEEE Ext Inv IEC Curve A IEC Curve B IEC Curve C IEC Short Inv IAC Ext Inv bitmask 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 curve shape IAC Inverse IAC Short Inv I2t Definite Time FlexCurve A FlexCurve B FlexCurve C FlexCurve D
F113 ENUMERATION: PARITY 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
F114 ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE 0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
B-48
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F115 ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS 0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
F122 ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE 0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
F117 ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS 0 = 172 cycles, 1 = 336 cycles, 2 = 718 cycles, 3 = 159 cycles
F123 ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY 0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
F118 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE 0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
F124 ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS

bitmask 0 element PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC2 PH DIR1 PH DIR2 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC2 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC2 NTRL DIR OC1 NTRL DIR OC2 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC2 GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC2 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC2 NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC2 NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC2 NEG SEQ OV AUX UV1 PHASE UV1 PHASE UV2 AUX OV1 PHASE OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 PH DIST 1 PH DIST 2 PH DIST 3 PH DIST 4 LINE PICKUP GND DIST 1 GND DIST 2 GND DIST 3 GND DIST 4 LOAD ENCHR DUTT
F119 ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS

mask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 value 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 mask 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 value 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 1.03 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.80 mask 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 value 2.90 3.00 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 3.50 3.60 3.70 3.80 3.90 4.00 4.10 4.20 4.30 4.40 4.50 4.60 4.70 4.80 4.90 5.00 5.10 5.20 5.30 5.40 5.50 5.60 5.70 5.80 mask 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 value 5.90 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 10.50 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.50 13.00 13.50 14.00 14.50 15.00 15.50 16.00 16.50 17.00 17.50 18.00 18.50 19.00 19.50 20.00
1 16 17 24 25 32 33 48 49 56 57 60 61 64 65 80 81 96 97 112 113 120 140 144 145 148 152 156 160 161 162 163 168 176 177
F120 ENUMERATION: DISTANCE SHAPE 0 = Mho, 1 = Quad
178 179 180 184
GE Multilin
B-49
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask 185 186 187 188 190 element PUTT POTT HYBRID POTT BLOCK SCHEME POWER SWING SRC1 VT FF SRC2 VT FF SRC3 VT FF SRC4 VT FF SRC5 VT FF SRC6 VT FF SRC1 50DD SRC2 50DD SRC3 50DD SRC4 50DD SRC5 50DD SRC6 50DD OPEN POLE BREAKER 1 BREAKER 2 BREAKER FAIL 1 BREAKER FAIL 2 BREAKER ARCING 1 BREAKER ARCING 2 AUTORECLOSE 1 AUTORECLOSE 2 AUTORECLOSE 3 AUTORECLOSE 4 AUTORECLOSE 5 AUTORECLOSE 6 SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHROCHECK 2 SETTING GROUP RESET TRIP DUTT PUTT POTT HYBRID POTT DIRECTIONAL BLOCK AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P SELECTOR 1 SELECTOR 2 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 2 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 3 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 4 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 5 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 6 CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 7 FLEX ELEMENT 1 FLEX ELEMENT 2 FLEX ELEMENT 3 bitmask 403 404 405 406 407 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 element FLEX ELEMENT 4 FLEX ELEMENT 5 FLEX ELEMENT 6 FLEX ELEMENT 7 FLEX ELEMENT 8 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 1 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 2 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 3 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 4 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 5 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 6 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 7 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 8 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 9 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 10 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 11 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 12 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 13 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 14 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 15 NON-VOLATILE LATCH 16 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 DIGITAL ELEMENT 3 DIGITAL ELEMENT 4 DIGITAL ELEMENT 5 DIGITAL ELEMENT 6 DIGITAL ELEMENT 7 DIGITAL ELEMENT 8 DIGITAL ELEMENT 9 DIGITAL ELEMENT 10 DIGITAL ELEMENT 11 DIGITAL ELEMENT 12 DIGITAL ELEMENT 13 DIGITAL ELEMENT 14 DIGITAL ELEMENT 15 DIGITAL ELEMENT 16 DIGITAL COUNTER 1 DIGITAL COUNTER 2 DIGITAL COUNTER 3 DIGITAL COUNTER 4 DIGITAL COUNTER 5 DIGITAL COUNTER 6 DIGITAL COUNTER 7 DIGITAL COUNTER 8 PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 2 PUSHBUTTON 3 PUSHBUTTON 4 PUSHBUTTON 5 PUSHBUTTON 6 PUSHBUTTON 7 PUSHBUTTON 8
APPENDIX B
224 225 226 227 228 229 232 233 234 235 236 237 242 272 273 280 281 288 289 304 305 306 307 308 309 312 313 336 337 360 366 368 370 372 374 376 385 386 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 400 401 402
B-50
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask 688 689 690 691 element PUSHBUTTON 9 PUSHBUTTON 10 PUSHBUTTON 11 PUSHBUTTON 12
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F136 ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS 0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles 3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F125 ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL 0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
F138 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE 0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F126 ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE 0 = No, 1 = Yes
F140 ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE, DISABLED 0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V, 3 = Current 4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A, 6 = Notched 2 A
F127 ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING 0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
F141 ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR

bitmask error ANY SELF TESTS IRIG-B FAILURE DSP ERROR NO DSP INTERRUPTS UNIT NOT CALIBRATED PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN EQUIPMENT MISMATCH UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED SYSTEM EXCEPTION LATCHING OUT ERROR SNTP FAILURE BATTERY FAIL PRI ETHERNET FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL EEPROM DATA ERROR SRAM DATA ERROR PROGRAM MEMORY WATCHDOG ERROR LOW ON MEMORY REMOTE DEVICE OFF DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK ANY MINOR ERROR ANY MAJOR ERROR
F128 ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD 0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
0 1 2 4
F129 ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE 0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
5 9 10 11 13
F130 ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE 0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
14 15 18 19 20
F131 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
21 22 23 24
F133 ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE 0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
25 26 27 28 29
F134 ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL 0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
30 31
F135 ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION 0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
F142 ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE 0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
GE Multilin
B-51
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F143 UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number) A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
F148 ENUMERATION: FAULT TYPE

bitmask 0 fault type NA AG BG CG AB BC bitmask 6 7 8 9 10 11 fault type AC ABG BCG ACG ABC ABCG
F144 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
1 2 3 4 5
F145 ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER

bitmask type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 null A B C D E F bitmask type 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 G H I J K L M bitmask type 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 N O P Q R S T bitmask type 21 22 23 24 25 26 U V W X Y Z
F151 ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 RTD# NONE RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 RTD 11 RTD 12 RTD 13 RTD 14 RTD 15 RTD 16 bitmask 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 RTD# RTD 17 RTD 18 RTD 19 RTD 20 RTD 21 RTD 22 RTD 23 RTD 24 RTD 25 RTD 26 RTD 27 RTD 28 RTD 29 RTD 30 RTD 31 RTD 32 bitmask 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 RTD# RTD 33 RTD 34 RTD 35 RTD 36 RTD 37 RTD 38 RTD 39 RTD 40 RTD 41 RTD 42 RTD 43 RTD 44 RTD 45 RTD 46 RTD 47 RTD 48
F146 ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 definition EVENTS CLEARED OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIGGERED DATE/TIME CHANGED DEF SETTINGS LOADED TEST MODE ON TEST MODE OFF POWER ON POWER OFF RELAY IN SERVICE RELAY OUT OF SERVICE WATCHDOG RESET OSCILLOGRAPHY CLEAR REBOOT COMMAND LED TEST INITIATED FLASH PROGRAMMING
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F152 ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP 0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3 4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
F153 ENUMERATION: DISTANCE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

bitmask type None Dy1 Dy3 Dy5 Dy7 bitmask 5 6 7 8 9 type Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 bitmask 10 11 12 type Yd7 Yd9 Yd11
F147 ENUMERATION: LINE LENGTH UNITS 0 = km, 1 = miles
0 1 2 3 4
F154 ENUMERATION: DISTANCE DIRECTION 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse
B-52
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F155 ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE 0 = Offline, 1 = Online
F167 ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE 0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4, 4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F156 ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 RTD# NONE DNA-1 DNA-2 DNA-3 DNA-4 DNA-5 DNA-6 DNA-7 DNA-8 DNA-9 DNA-10 DNA-11 DNA-12 DNA-13 DNA-14 DNA-15 DNA-16 DNA-17 DNA-18 DNA-19 DNA-20 DNA-21 bitmask 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 RTD# DNA-22 DNA-23 DNA-24 DNA-25 DNA-26 DNA-27 DNA-28 DNA-29 DNA-30 DNA-31 DNA-32 UserSt-1 UserSt-2 UserSt-3 UserSt-4 UserSt-5 UserSt-6 UserSt-7 UserSt-8 UserSt-9 UserSt-10 UserSt-11 bitmask 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 RTD# UserSt-12 UserSt-13 UserSt-14 UserSt-15 UserSt-16 UserSt-17 UserSt-18 UserSt-19 UserSt-20 UserSt-21 UserSt-22 UserSt-23 UserSt-24 UserSt-25 UserSt-26 UserSt-27 UserSt-28 UserSt-29 UserSt-30 UserSt-31 UserSt-32
F168 ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
F169 ENUMERATION: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 = Disabled, 1 = 5th
F170 ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET & GAIN TRANSDUCER I/O SELECTION 0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
F171 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE 0 = dcmA IN, 1 = OHMS IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT
F172 ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS

bitmask 0 1 2 slot F G H J bitmask 4 5 6 7 slot K L M N bitmask 8 9 10 11 slot P R S T bitmask 12 13 14 15 slot U V W X
F157 ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE 0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
F173 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE

bitmask 0 1 2 3 dcmA I/O range 0 to 1 mA 0 to 1 mA 1 to 1 mA 0 to 5 mA 0 to 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
F158 ENUMERATION: SCHEME CALIBRATION TEST 0 = Normal, 1 = Symmetry 1, 2 = Symmetry 2, 3 = Delay 1 4 = Delay 2
F159 ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING 0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
4 5 6
F166 ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
F174 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE 0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel, 2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
GE Multilin
B-53
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F175 ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
F186 ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE 0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
F176 ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 synchrocheck dead source None LV1 and DV2 DV1 and LV2 DV1 or DV2 DV1 Xor DV2 DV1 and DV2
F190 ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS

bitmsk 0 keypress --use between real keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Decimal Pt Plus/Minus Value Up Value Down Message Up Message Down Message Left Message Right Menu Help bitmsk 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 keypress Escape Enter Reset User 1 User 2 User 3 User-programmable key 1 User-programmable key 2 User-programmable key 3 User-programmable key 4 User-programmable key 5 User-programmable key 6 User-programmable key 7 User-programmable key 8 User-programmable key 9 User-programmable key 10 User-programmable key 11 User-programmable key 12 User 4 (control pushbutton) User 5 (control pushbutton) User 6 (control pushbutton) User 7 (control pushbutton)
1 2 3 4 5 6
F177 ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT 0 = NONE, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485, 3 = FRONT PANEL-RS232, 4 = NETWORK
7 8 9 10 11
F178 ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES 0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min, 5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min
12 13 14 15 16
F179 ENUMERATION: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIR OC TYPE 0 = Neg Sequence, 1 = Zero Sequence
17 18 19 20
F180 ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND 0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
F192 ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE 0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
F181 ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE 0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F194 ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000, 7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
F183 ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 definition Off 8 samples/cycle 16 samples/cycle 32 samples/cycle 64 samples/cycle
F195 ENUMERATION: SINGLE POLE TRIP MODE A bitmask of 0 = Disabled, 1 = 3 Pole Only, 2 = 3 Pole & 1 Pole
F196 ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL DIR OC OPERATE CURRENT 0 = Calculated 3I0, 1 = Measured IG
F185 ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
B-54
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask Input Point Block Elements 465 to 480 Elements 481 to 496 Elements 497 to 512 Elements 513 to 528 Elements 529 to 544 Elements 545 to 560 LED States 1 to 16 LED States 17 to 32 Self Tests 1 to 16 Self Tests 17 to 32
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F197 ENUMERATION: DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Input Point Block Not Used Virtual Inputs 1 to 16 Virtual Inputs 17 to 32 Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 Virtual Outputs 17 to 32 Virtual Outputs 33 to 48 Virtual Outputs 49 to 64 Contact Inputs 1 to 16 Contact Inputs 17 to 32 Contact Inputs 33 to 48 Contact Inputs 49 to 64 Contact Inputs 65 to 80 Contact Inputs 81 to 96 Contact Outputs 1 to 16 Contact Outputs 17 to 32 Contact Outputs 33 to 48 Contact Outputs 49 to 64 Remote Inputs 1 to 16 Remote Inputs 17 to 32 Remote Devs 1 to 16 Elements 1 to 16 Elements 17 to 32 Elements 33 to 48 Elements 49 to 64 Elements 65 to 80 Elements 81 to 96 Elements 97 to 112 Elements 113 to 128 Elements 129 to 144 Elements 145 to 160 Elements 161 to 176 Elements 177 to 192 Elements 193 to 208 Elements 209 to 224 Elements 225 to 240 Elements 241 to 256 Elements 257 to 272 Elements 273 to 288 Elements 289 to 304 Elements 305 to 320 Elements 321 to 336 Elements 337 to 352 Elements 353 to 368 Elements 369 to 384 Elements 385 to 400 Elements 401 to 406 Elements 417 to 432 Elements 433 to 448 Elements 449 to 464
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
F198 ENUMERATION: PILOT SCHEME COMMUNICATION BITS 0 = 1, 1 = 2, 2 = 4
F199 ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom
F200 TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F201 TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE 4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F202 TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F203 TEXT16: 16-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
GE Multilin
B-55
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F222 ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION 0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F400 UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION

bitmask 0 bank selection Card 1 Contact 1 to 4 Card 1 Contact 5 to 8 Card 2 Contact 1 to 4 Card 2 Contact 5 to 8 Card 3 Contact 1 to 4 Card 3 Contact 5 to 8
F230 ENUMERATION: DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING 0 = Voltage, 1 = Current, 2 = Dual
1 2 3 4 5
F231 ENUMERATION: POLARIZING VOLTAGE 0 = Calculated V0, 1 = Measured VX F500 UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD First register indicates I/O state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB) corresponding to I/0 state 1-16. The second register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 17-32 (if required) The third register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 33-48 (if required). The fourth register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 49-64 (if required). The number of registers required is determined by the specific data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
F300 UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6-bit type) The FlexLogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value. The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD, where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE type, and D represents bits for the descriptor. The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix [PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range. [0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value [0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value [2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96) [3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96) [4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64) [6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64) [10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64) [11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64) [12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64) [13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64) [14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32) [28] INSERT (Via Keypad only) [32] END [34] NOT (1 INPUT) [36] 2 INPUT XOR (0) [38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs) [40] OR (2 to 16 inputs) [42] AND (2 to 16 inputs) [44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs) [46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs) [48] TIMER (1 to 32) [50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64) [52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range) [56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6) [62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range) [64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
F501 UR_UINT16: LED STATUS Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
F502 BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F504 BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 element state Pickup Operate Pickup Phase A Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Operate Phase A Operate Phase B Operate Phase C
F505 BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
B-56
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F506| BITFIELD: 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate
F517 ENUMERATION: ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION 0 = OVER, 1 = UNDER
F507 BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE 0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
F518 ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT UNITS 0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
F508 BITFIELD: DISTANCE ELEMENT STATE

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 distance element state Pickup Operate Pickup AB Pickup BC Pickup CA Operate AB Operate BC Operate CA Timed Operate IAB Operate IBC Operate ICA
F519 ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH 0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant
F530 ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 keypress None Menu Message Up 7 8 9 Help Message Left 4 5 6 Escape Message Right 1 2 3 Enter Message Down 0 Decimal +/ Value Up
~
bitmask 22 23 24 25 26 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47
keypress Value Down Reset User 1 User 2 User 3 User PB 1 User PB 2 User PB 3 User PB 4 User PB 5 User PB 6 User PB 7 User PB 8 User PB 9 User PB 10 User PB 11 User PB 12 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7
F509 BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Operate
9 10 11 12 13
F511 BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
14 15 16 17
F513 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING MODE 0 = Two Step, 1 = Three Step
18 19 20 21
F514 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING TRIP MODE 0 = Delayed, 1 = Early
F600 UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER The 16-bit value corresponds to the modbus address of the value to be used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all the metering quantities used in protection)
F515 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE
F516 ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE 0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA
GE Multilin
B-57
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B-58
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONSC.1UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL C.1.1 UCA
The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) Version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference documents available from the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software libraries that describe the complete capabilities of the UCA. Following, is a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The reference document set includes: Introduction to UCA version 2 Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE) Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS UCA Version 2 Profiles
These documents can be obtained from the UCA Users Group at http://www.ucausersgroup.org. It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set. COMMUNICATION PROFILES: The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Reference Model. The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the "UCA Version 2 Profiles" reference document for details. The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK communication link. These addresses are set in the SETTINGS menu. Note that the UR relay supports UCA operation over the TP4/CLNP or the TCP/IP stacks and also supports operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to two simultaneous connections. This is in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections. C.1.2 MMS a) DESCRIPTION The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to form objects and be mapped to MMS services. Refer to the GOMSFE and CASM reference documents for details. SUPPORTED OBJECTS: The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items, some of which are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relay supports the following GOMSFE objects: DI (device identity) GCTL (generic control) GIND (generic indicator) GLOBE (global data) MMXU (polyphase measurement unit) PBRL (phase balance current relay) PBRO (basic relay object) PDIF (differential relay) PDIS (distance) PDOC (directional overcurrent) PDPR (directional power relay) PFRQ (frequency relay) PHIZ (high impedance ground detector) PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay) POVR (overvoltage relay) PTOC (time overcurrent relay) PUVR (under voltage relay) PVPH (volts per hertz relay) ctRATO (CT ratio information) vtRATO (VT ratio information) RREC (reclosing relay) RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay) XCBR (circuit breaker)
UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
GE Multilin
C-1
C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:
APPENDIX C
Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information, using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported via the use of the UR Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferred between any UCA conforming devices. FILE SERVICES: MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of Oscillography, Event Record, or other files from a UR relay. COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES: The exact structure and values of the implemented objects can be seen by connecting to a UR relay with an MMS browser, such as the MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc. NON-UCA DATA:
The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed through the "UR" MMS domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain. b) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION AND CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (PICS) The UR relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the following list of supported services is for server operation only:
NOTE
The MMS supported services are as follows: CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES: Initiate Conclude Cancel Abort Reject
VMD SUPPORT SERVICES: Status GetNameList Identify
VARIABLE ACCESS SERVICES: Read Write InformationReport GetVariableAccessAttributes GetNamedVariableListAttributes
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES: (none) SEMAPHORE MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none) DOMAIN MANAGEMENT SERVICES: GetDomainAttributes PROGRAM INVOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none) EVENT MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none)
C-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C JOURNAL MANAGEMENT SERVICES: (none) FILE MANAGEMENT SERVICES: ObtainFile FileOpen FileRead FileClose FileDirectory
The following MMS parameters are supported: STR1 (Arrays) STR2 (Structures) NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 and STR2) - 1 VNAM (Named Variables) VADR (Unnamed Variables) VALT (Alternate Access Variables) VLIS (Named Variable Lists) REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)
c) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC) This section provides details of the UCA object models supported by the UR series relays. Note that not all of the protective device functions are applicable to all the UR series relays. Table C1: DEVICE IDENTITY DI
NAME Name Class d Own Loc VndID M/O m o o o o m RWEC rw rw rw rw rw r
Table C2: GENERIC CONTROL GCTL

FC ST CO CF DC NAME BO<n> BO<n> BO<n> LN BO<n> CLASS SI SI SBOCF d d RWECS rw rw rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Generic Single Point Indication Generic Binary Output SBO Configuration Description for brick Description for each point
Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:

NOTE
GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points SI1 to SI32); includes SBO functionality.
Table C3: GENERIC INDICATORS GIND 1 TO 6

FC ST DC RP NAME SIG<n> LN BrcbST CLASS SIG d BasRCB RWECS r rw rw DESCRIPTION Generic Indication (block of 16) Description for brick Controls reporting of STATUS
GE Multilin
C-3
APPENDIX C
Table C4: GENERIC INDICATOR GIND7

FC ST DC RP OBJECT NAME SI<n> LN SI<n> BrcbST SI d d BasRCB CLASS r rw rw rw RWECS DESCRIPTION Generic single point indication Description for brick Description for all included SI Controls reporting of STATUS
Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:

NOTE
GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points SIG1 to SIG6) GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points SIG1 to SIG4) GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points SIG1 to SIG2) GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points SIG1 to SIG4) GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points SIG1 to SIG2) GIND6 = Flex States (16 total points SIG1 representing Flex States 1 to 16) GIND7 = Flex States (16 total points SI1 to SI16 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
Table C5: GLOBAL DATA GLOBE

FC ST OBJECT NAME ModeDS LocRemDS ActSG EditSG CO CF RP CopySG IndRs ClockTOD GOOSE CLASS SIT SIT INT8U INT8u INT8U BOOL BTIME PACT RWECS r r r r w w rw rw DESCRIPTION Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthy The mode of control, local or remote (DevST) Active Settings Group Settings Group selected for read/write operation Selects Settings Group for read/write operation Resets ALL targets Date and time Reports IED Inputs and Outputs
Table C6: MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) MMXU

FC MX OBJECT NAME V PPV A W TotW Var TotVar VA TotVA PF AvgPF Hz CF DC RP All MMXU.MX LN All MMXU.MX BrcbMX CLASS WYE DELTA WYE WYE AI WYE AI WYE AI WYE AI AI ACF d d BasRCB RWECS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Voltage on phase A, B, C to G Voltage on AB, BC, CA Current in phase A, B, C, and N Watts in phase A, B, C Total watts in all three phases Vars in phase A, B, C Total vars in all three phases VA in phase A, B, C Total VA in all 3 phases Power Factor for phase A, B, C Average Power Factor for all three phases Power system frequency Configuration of ALL included MMXU.MX Description for brick Description of ALL included MMXU.MX Controls reporting of measurements
Actual instantiation of MMXU objects is as follows:

NOTE
1 MMXU per Source (as determined from the product order code)
C-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
Table C7: PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

FC ST OBJECT NAME Out Tar FctDS PuGrp CO EnaDisFct RsTar RsLat DC LN ElementSt CLASS BOOL PhsTar SIT INT8U DCO BO BO d d RWECS r r r r w w w rw r DESCRIPTION 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated Targets since last reset Function is enabled/disabled Settings group selected for use 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled Reset ALL Elements/Targets Reset ALL Elements/Targets Description for brick Element state string
The following GOMSFE objects are defined by the object model described via the above table: PBRO (basic relay object) PDIF (differential relay) PDIS (distance) PDOC (directional overcurrent) PDPR (directional power relay) PFRQ (frequency relay) PHIZ (high impedance ground detector) PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay) POVR (over voltage relay) PTOC (time overcurrent relay) PUVR (under voltage relay) RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay) POVR (overvoltage) PVPH (volts per hertz relay) PBRL (phase balance current relay) Actual instantiation of these objects is determined by the number of the corresponding elements present in the D60 as per the product order code.
NOTE
Table C8: CT RATIO INFORMATION ctRATO

OBJECT NAME PhsARat NeutARat LN CLASS RATIO RATIO d RWECS rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Primary/secondary winding ratio Primary/secondary winding ratio Description for brick (current bank ID)
Table C9: VT RATIO INFORMATION vtRATO

OBJECT NAME PhsVRat LN CLASS RATIO d RWECS rw rw DESCRIPTION Primary/secondary winding ratio Description for brick (current bank ID)
Actual instantiation of ctRATO and vtRATO objects is as follows:

NOTE
1 ctRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code). 1 vtRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).
GE Multilin
C-5
APPENDIX C
Table C10: RECLOSING RELAY RREC

FC ST OBJECT NAME Out FctDS PuGrp SG CO ReclSeq EnaDisFct RsTar RsLat CF ReclSeq LN ElementSt DC CLASS BOOL SIT INT8U SHOTS DCO BO BO ACF d d RWECS r r r rw w w w rw rw r DESCRIPTION 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated Function is enabled/disabled Settings group selected for use Reclosing Sequence 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled Reset ALL Elements/Targets Reset ALL Elements/Targets Configuration for RREC.SG Description for brick Element state string
Actual instantiation of RREC objects is determined by the number of autoreclose elements present in the D60 as per the product order code.
NOTE
Also note that the Shots class data (i.e. Tmr1, Tmr2, Tmr3, Tmr4, RsTmr) is specified to be of type INT16S (16 bit signed integer); this data type is not large enough to properly display the full range of these settings from the D60. Numbers larger than 32768 will be displayed incorrectly. Table C11: CIRCUIT BREAKER XCBR
FC ST OBJECT NAME SwDS SwPoleDS PwrSupSt PresSt PoleDiscSt TrpCoil CO CF DC RP ODSw ODSwSBO LN brcbST CLASS SIT BSTR8 SIG SIT SI SI DCO SBOCF d BasRCB RWECS rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw rw DESCRIPTION Switch Device Status Switch Pole Device Status Health of the power supply The condition of the insulating medium pressure All CB poles did not operate within time interval Trip coil supervision The command to open/close the switch Configuration for all included XCBR.CO Description for brick Controls reporting of Status Points
Actual instantiation of XCBR objects is determined by the number of breaker control elements present in the D60 as per the product order code.
NOTE
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the UR to detect "dead" connections. If there is no data traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the UR. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using UCA reporting, clients should configure BasRCB objects such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the UR will not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.
C-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS.D.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard. 1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
System Definition Controlling Station Definition (Master) Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION: Point-to-Point Multiple Point-to-Point 3. PHYSICAL LAYER Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: 100 bits/sec. 200 bits/sec. 300 bits/sec. 600 bits/sec. 1200 bits/sec. Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec. 38400 bits/sec. 56000 bits/sec. 64000 bits/sec.
Multipoint Multipoint Star
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):

Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: 100 bits/sec. 200 bits/sec. 300 bits/sec. 600 bits/sec. 1200 bits/sec. Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27: 2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec. 38400 bits/sec. 56000 bits/sec. 64000 bits/sec.
4.
LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Balanced Transmision Unbalanced Transmission Address Field of the Link: Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only) One Octet Two Octets Structured Unstructured Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin
D-1
APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission: The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows: A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows: 5. APPLICATION LAYER Transmission Mode for Application Data: Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion stanadard. Common Address of ADSU: One Octet
Two Octets
Information Object Address: One Octet
Structured Unstructured
Two Octets
Three Octets
Cause of Transmission: One Octet
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system. Selection of standard ASDUs: For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard. Process information in monitor direction cannot be
<1> := Single-point information

<2> := Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1 M_ME_NA_1 M_NE_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_NE_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_NE_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1 M_EP_TA_1 M_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_SP_NA_1
<3> := Double-point information

<4> := Double-point information with time tag
<5> := Step position information

<6> := Step position information with time tag
<7> := Bitstring of 32 bits

<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag
<9> := Measured value, normalized value

<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag
<11> := Measured value, scaled value

<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value

<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
<15> := Integrated totals

<16> := Integrated totals with time tag <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
<20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection
D-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D

M_ME_ND_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 M_ST_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_ME_TD_1 M_ME_TE_1 M_ME_TF_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TE_1 M_EP_TF_1
<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor

<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set <30> to <40> are used. Process information in control direction

<45> := Single command <46> := Double command <47> := Regulating step command <48> := Set point command, normalized value <49> := Set point command, scaled value <50> := Set point command, short floating point value <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1 C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1 C_SC_TA_1 C_DC_TA_1 C_RC_TA_1 C_SE_TA_1 C_SE_TB_1 C_SE_TC_1 C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used. System information in monitor direction
<70> := End of initialization

System information in control direction
M_EI_NA_1

<100> := Interrogation command <101> := Counter interrogation command <102> := Read command <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) <104> := Test command
C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NA_1 C_RP_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1 C_TS_TA_1
<105> := Reset process command

<106> := Delay acquisition command
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a
GE Multilin
D-3
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL Parameter in control direction
APPENDIX D
<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value <113> := Parameter activation
PE_ME_NA_1 PE_ME_NB_1 PE_ME_NC_1 PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
<120> := File Ready <121> := Section Ready <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section <123> := Last section, last segment <124> := Ack file, ack section <125> := Segment <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction)
F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments (station-specific parameters) In the following table: Shaded boxes are not required. Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard. Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used. X if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU 45 INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
NO. <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8>
MNEMONIC M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1
3 X
5 X
10
11 X
12 X
13
20 to 36 X
37 to 41
D-4
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION 44
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
NO. <9> <10> <11> <12> <13> <14> <15> <16> <17> <18> <19> <20> <21> <30> <31> <32> <33> <34> <35> <36> <37> <38> <39> <40> <45> <46> <47> <48> <49>
MNEMONIC M_ME_NA_1 M_ME_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1 M_EP_TA_1 M_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_PS_NA_1 M_ME_ND_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 M_ST_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_ME_TD_1 M_ME_TE_1 M_ME_TF_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TE_1 M_EP_TF_1 C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1
10
11
12
13
20 to 36
37 to 41
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
45
GE Multilin
D-5
APPENDIX D
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
NO.
MNEMONIC C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1 C_SC_TA_1 C_DC_TA_1 C_RC_TA_1 C_SE_TA_1 C_SE_TB_1 C_SE_TC_1 C_BO_TA_1 M_EI_NA_1*) C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NA_1 C_RP_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1 C_TS_TA_1 P_ME_NA_1 P_ME_NB_1 P_ME_NC_1 P_AC_NA_1 F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 F_DR_TA_1*)
10
11
12
13
20 to 36
37 to 41
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
45
<50> <51> <58> <59> <60> <61> <62> <63> <64> <70> <100> <101> <102> <103> <104> <105> <106> <107> <110> <111> <112> <113> <120> <121> <122> <123> <124> <125> <126>
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
D-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D 6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Station Initialization:
Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Cyclic data transmission

Read Procedure:
Read procedure
Spontaneous Transmission:
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous: The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list.
Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1 Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1 Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1 Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project) Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1 Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1 Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Global Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

Clock synchronization:
Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)

Command transmission:
Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
GE Multilin
D-7
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL Transmission of integrated totals:
APPENDIX D
Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously Counter read Counter freeze without reset Counter freeze with reset Counter reset General request counter Request counter group 1 Request counter group 2
Request counter group 3 Request counter group 4

Parameter loading:
Threshold value Smoothing factor Low limit for transmission of measured values High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

Test procedure:
Test procedure
File transfer: File transfer in monitor direction:
Transparent file Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment Transmission of sequences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Transparent file
Background scan:
Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay: Acquisition of transmission delay
D-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE 30 s 15 s 10 s 20 s REMARKS Timeout of connection establishment Timeout of send or test APDUs
SELECTED VALUE 120 s 15 s 10 s 20 s
t0 t1 t2 t3
Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE 12 APDUs 8 APDUs REMARKS Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs SELECTED VALUE 12 APDUs 8 APDUs
k w
Maximum range of values k: Maximum range of values w: Portnumber:

PARAMETER Portnumber VALUE 2404
1 to 32767 (215 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
REMARKS In all cases
RFC 2200 suite: RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard.
Ethernet 802.3 Serial X.21 interface Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
GE Multilin
D-9
APPENDIX D D.1.2 POINT LIST
Table D1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 1 OF 3)

POINT 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 DESCRIPTION SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle SRC 1 Ground Current RMS SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Positive Seq Current Magnitude SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Negative Seq Current Magnitude SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Differential Gnd Current Magnitude SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude UNITS A A A A A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees A A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees V V V V degrees V degrees V degrees V V V V degrees V degrees V degrees V V degrees V M_ME_NC_1 Points
Table D1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 2 OF 3)

POINT 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 DESCRIPTION SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Positive Seq Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Negative Seq Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power SRC 1 Phase A Real Power SRC 1 Phase B Real Power SRC 1 Phase C Real Power SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor SRC 1 Frequency Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase Tracking Frequency FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 2 Actual FlexElement 3 Actual FlexElement 4 Actual FlexElement 5 Actual FlexElement 6 Actual FlexElement 7 Actual FlexElement 8 Actual Current Setting Group UNITS degrees V degrees V degrees W W W W var var var var VA VA VA VA none none none none Hz kA2-cyc kA2-cyc kA2-cyc kA2-cyc kA2-cyc kA2-cyc V Hz degrees V Hz degrees Hz none none none none none none none none none
D-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D Table D1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 3 OF 3)

POINT 5000 5096 DESCRIPTION Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points UNITS P_ME_NC_1 Points
M_SP_NA_1 Points 100 - 115 Virtual Input States[0] 116 - 131 Virtual Input States[1] 132 - 147 Virtual Output States[0] 148 - 163 Virtual Output States[1] 164 - 179 Virtual Output States[2] 180 - 195 Virtual Output States[3] 196 - 211 Contact Input States[0] 212 - 227 Contact Input States[1] 228 - 243 Contact Input States[2] 244 - 259 Contact Input States[3] 260 - 275 Contact Input States[4] 276 - 291 Contact Input States[5] 292 - 307 Contact Output States[0] 308 - 323 Contact Output States[1] 324 - 339 Contact Output States[2] 340 - 355 Contact Output States[3] 356 - 371 Remote Input x States[0] 372 - 387 Remote Input x States[1] 388 - 403 Remote Device x States 404 - 419 LED Column x State[0] 420 - 435 LED Column x State[1] C_SC_NA_1 Points 1100 1115 1116 1131 Point 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required -
M_IT_NA_1 Points Description Digital Counter 1 Value Digital Counter 2 Value Digital Counter 3 Value Digital Counter 4 Value Digital Counter 5 Value Digital Counter 6 Value Digital Counter 7 Value Digital Counter 8 Value -
GE Multilin
D-11
APPENDIX D
D-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3) (Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section) Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin Device Name: UR Series Relay Highest DNP Level Supported: For Requests: Level 2 For Responses: Level 2 Device Function:
Master Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): Binary Inputs (Object 1) Binary Input Changes (Object 2) Binary Outputs (Object 10) Binary Counters (Object 20) Frozen Counters (Object 21) Counter Change Event (Object 22) Frozen Counter Event (Object 23) Analog Inputs (Object 30) Analog Input Changes (Object 32) Analog Deadbands (Object 34) Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Received: 292 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 240 Received: 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None Fixed at 2 Configurable

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
None Configurable
Never Always Sometimes Configurable
GE Multilin
E-1
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 2 of 3) Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
APPENDIX E

Never Always When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Complete Appl. Fragment: Application Confirm: Complete Appl. Response: Others: Transmission Delay: Inter-character Timeout: Need Time Delay: Select/Operate Arm Timeout: Binary input change scanning period: Packed binary change process period: Analog input change scanning period: Counter change scanning period: Frozen counter event scanning period: Unsolicited response notification delay: Unsolicited response retry delay Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Queue Clear Queue No intentional delay 50 ms Configurable (default = 24 hrs.) 10 s 8 times per power system cycle 1s 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms configurable 0 to 60 sec.

None None None None

Fixed at 3 s Fixed at ____ Fixed at 4 s Fixed at ____
Variable Variable Variable Variable
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never Never Never

Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes
Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never Never Never Never
Always Always Always Always Always
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never
Always Always
Sometimes Sometimes
Configurable Configurable
Explanation of Sometimes: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both Pulse On and Latch On operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the On state. If the Virtual Input is set to Self-Reset, it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. Pulse Off and Latch Off operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the Off state. Trip and Close operations both put the appropriate Virtual Input into the On state.
E-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 3 of 3) Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested:

Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable
Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change

No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 20 Default Object:

Default Variation: 1 Point-by-point list attached

No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits (Counter 8) 32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9) Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes No
GE Multilin
E-3
APPENDIX E E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the UR in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 00, 01(start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) QUALIFIER CODES (HEX)
Binary Input
1 (read) 22 (assign class)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
Binary Input with Status (default see Note 1)
1 (read) 22 (assign class)
129 (response)
0 1
Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) request default variation) Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) Binary Input Change with Time (default see Note 1) Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 1 (read)
E
10
2 3
(parse only)
129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response 130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index)
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) request default variation)
Binary Output Status (default see Note 1)
1 (read)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
12
20
Note 1:
3 (select) 129 (response) echo of request 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, noack) 00, 01(start-stop) 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) (Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited quantity) variation) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) (default see Note 1) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Control Relay Output Block
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 2 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter contd REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class)
RESPONSE QUALIFIER FUNCTION CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
21
22
23
Note 1:
00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) (default see Note 1) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) to request default variation) 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) (default see Note 1) 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) (default see Note 1) 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-5
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 3 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time contd 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 30
APPENDIX E
E
32
34
Note 1:
RESPONSE QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) (default see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 5 short floating point 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06(no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08(limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28(index) 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) Time (default see Note 1) 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) without Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) with Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) (Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all) variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) (default see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read)
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 4 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read)
contd
2 (write)
Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) Deadband
50
Time and Date
1 (read)
Time and Date (default see Note 1)
1 (read) 2 (write)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07 (limited qty=1) 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 129 (response)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
129 (response)
129 (response)
52 60
2 0
Time Delay Fine Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
E
06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 2
Class 0 Data Class 1 Data
Class 2 Data
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
Class 3 Data
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
80 ------Note 1:
Internal Indications
00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart) see Note 3 No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.) A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-7
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS E.2DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 10)

POINT INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Virtual Input 17 Virtual Input 18 Virtual Input 19 Virtual Input 20 Virtual Input 21 Virtual Input 22 Virtual Input 23 Virtual Input 24 Virtual Input 25 Virtual Input 26 Virtual Input 27 Virtual Input 28 Virtual Input 29 Virtual Input 30 Virtual Input 31 Virtual Input 32 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 2 of 10)

POINT INDEX 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Output 1 Virtual Output 2 Virtual Output 3 Virtual Output 4 Virtual Output 5 Virtual Output 6 Virtual Output 7 Virtual Output 8 Virtual Output 9 Virtual Output 10 Virtual Output 11 Virtual Output 12 Virtual Output 13 Virtual Output 14 Virtual Output 15 Virtual Output 16 Virtual Output 17 Virtual Output 18 Virtual Output 19 Virtual Output 20 Virtual Output 21 Virtual Output 22 Virtual Output 23 Virtual Output 24 Virtual Output 25 Virtual Output 26 Virtual Output 27 Virtual Output 28 Virtual Output 29 Virtual Output 30 Virtual Output 31 Virtual Output 32 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
E-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 3 of 10)

POINT INDEX 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Output 33 Virtual Output 34 Virtual Output 35 Virtual Output 36 Virtual Output 37 Virtual Output 38 Virtual Output 39 Virtual Output 40 Virtual Output 41 Virtual Output 42 Virtual Output 43 Virtual Output 44 Virtual Output 45 Virtual Output 46 Virtual Output 47 Virtual Output 48 Virtual Output 49 Virtual Output 50 Virtual Output 51 Virtual Output 52 Virtual Output 53 Virtual Output 54 Virtual Output 55 Virtual Output 56 Virtual Output 57 Virtual Output 58 Virtual Output 59 Virtual Output 60 Virtual Output 61 Virtual Output 62 Virtual Output 63 Virtual Output 64 Contact Input 1 Contact Input 2 Contact Input 3 Contact Input 4 Contact Input 5 Contact Input 6 Contact Input 7 Contact Input 8 Contact Input 9 Contact Input 10 Contact Input 11 Contact Input 12 Contact Input 13 Contact Input 14 Contact Input 15 Contact Input 16 Contact Input 17 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS Table E3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 4 of 10)
POINT INDEX 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 NAME/DESCRIPTION Contact Input 18 Contact Input 19 Contact Input 20 Contact Input 21 Contact Input 22 Contact Input 23 Contact Input 24 Contact Input 25 Contact Input 26 Contact Input 27 Contact Input 28 Contact Input 29 Contact Input 30 Contact Input 31 Contact Input 32 Contact Input 33 Contact Input 34 Contact Input 35 Contact Input 36 Contact Input 37 Contact Input 38 Contact Input 39 Contact Input 40 Contact Input 41 Contact Input 42 Contact Input 43 Contact Input 44 Contact Input 45 Contact Input 46 Contact Input 47 Contact Input 48 Contact Input 49 Contact Input 50 Contact Input 51 Contact Input 52 Contact Input 53 Contact Input 54 Contact Input 55 Contact Input 56 Contact Input 57 Contact Input 58 Contact Input 59 Contact Input 60 Contact Input 61 Contact Input 62 Contact Input 63 Contact Input 64 Contact Input 65 Contact Input 66 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GE Multilin
E-9
POINT INDEX 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 NAME/DESCRIPTION Contact Input 67 Contact Input 68 Contact Input 69 Contact Input 70 Contact Input 71 Contact Input 72 Contact Input 73 Contact Input 74 Contact Input 75 Contact Input 76 Contact Input 77 Contact Input 78 Contact Input 79 Contact Input 80 Contact Input 81 Contact Input 82 Contact Input 83 Contact Input 84 Contact Input 85 Contact Input 86 Contact Input 87 Contact Input 88 Contact Input 89 Contact Input 90 Contact Input 91 Contact Input 92 Contact Input 93 Contact Input 94 Contact Input 95 Contact Input 96 Contact Output 1 Contact Output 2 Contact Output 3 Contact Output 4 Contact Output 5 Contact Output 6 Contact Output 7 Contact Output 8 Contact Output 9 Contact Output 10 Contact Output 11 Contact Output 12 Contact Output 13 Contact Output 14 Contact Output 15 Contact Output 16 Contact Output 17 Contact Output 18 Contact Output 19 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

POINT INDEX 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 NAME/DESCRIPTION Contact Output 20 Contact Output 21 Contact Output 22 Contact Output 23 Contact Output 24 Contact Output 25 Contact Output 26 Contact Output 27 Contact Output 28 Contact Output 29 Contact Output 30 Contact Output 31 Contact Output 32 Contact Output 33 Contact Output 34 Contact Output 35 Contact Output 36 Contact Output 37 Contact Output 38 Contact Output 39 Contact Output 40 Contact Output 41 Contact Output 42 Contact Output 43 Contact Output 44 Contact Output 45 Contact Output 46 Contact Output 47 Contact Output 48 Contact Output 49 Contact Output 50 Contact Output 51 Contact Output 52 Contact Output 53 Contact Output 54 Contact Output 55 Contact Output 56 Contact Output 57 Contact Output 58 Contact Output 59 Contact Output 60 Contact Output 61 Contact Output 62 Contact Output 63 Contact Output 64 Remote Input 1 Remote Input 2 Remote Input 3 Remote Input 4 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
E-10
GE Multilin

POINT INDEX 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 320 321 328 NAME/DESCRIPTION Remote Input 5 Remote Input 6 Remote Input 7 Remote Input 8 Remote Input 9 Remote Input 10 Remote Input 11 Remote Input 12 Remote Input 13 Remote Input 14 Remote Input 15 Remote Input 16 Remote Input 17 Remote Input 18 Remote Input 19 Remote Input 20 Remote Input 21 Remote Input 22 Remote Input 23 Remote Input 24 Remote Input 25 Remote Input 26 Remote Input 27 Remote Input 28 Remote Input 29 Remote Input 30 Remote Input 31 Remote Input 32 Remote Device 1 Remote Device 2 Remote Device 3 Remote Device 4 Remote Device 5 Remote Device 6 Remote Device 7 Remote Device 8 Remote Device 9 Remote Device 10 Remote Device 11 Remote Device 12 Remote Device 13 Remote Device 14 Remote Device 15 Remote Device 16 PHASE IOC1 Element OP PHASE IOC2 Element OP PHASE TOC1 Element OP PHASE TOC2 Element OP PH DIR1 Element OP CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
POINT INDEX 329 336 337 352 353 360 361 364 365 368 369 384 385 400 401 416 417 444 448 449 452 456 460 464 465 466 467 472 480 481 482 483 484 488 489 490 491 492 494 528 529 530 531 532 533 536 537 538 539 NAME/DESCRIPTION PH DIR2 Element OP NEUTRAL IOC1 Element OP NEUTRAL IOC2 Element OP NEUTRAL TOC1 Element OP NEUTRAL TOC2 Element OP NTRL DIR OC1 Element OP NTRL DIR OC2 Element OP NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Elem. OP NEG SEQ DIR OC2 Elem OP GROUND IOC1 Element OP GROUND IOC2 Element OP GROUND TOC1 Element OP GROUND TOC2 Element OP NEG SEQ IOC1 Element OP NEG SEQ IOC2 Element OP NEG SEQ TOC1 Element OP NEG SEQ TOC2 Element OP AUX UV1 Element OP PHASE UV1 Element OP PHASE UV2 Element OP AUX OV1 Element OP PHASE OV1 Element OP NEUTRAL OV1 Element OP PH DIST Z1 Element OP PH DIST Z2 Element OP PH DIST Z3 Element OP PH DIST Z4 Element OP LINE PICKUP Element OP GND DIST Z1 Element OP GND DIST Z2 Element OP GND DIST Z3 Element OP GND DIST Z4 Element OP LOAD ENCHR Element OP DUTT Element OP PUTT Element OP POTT Element OP HYBRID POTT Element OP BLOCK SCHEME Element OP POWER SWING Element OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP SRC2 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP SRC3 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP SRC4 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP SRC5 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP SRC6 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP SRC1 50DD Element OP SRC2 50DD Element OP SRC3 50DD Element OP SRC4 50DD Element OP CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GE Multilin
E-11
POINT INDEX 540 541 554 576 577 584 585 592 593 608 609 610 611 612 613 616 617 640 641 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 848 849 850 851 852 853 NAME/DESCRIPTION SRC5 50DD Element OP SRC6 50DD Element OP STUB BUS Element OP BREAKER 1 Element OP BREAKER 2 Element OP BKR FAIL 1 Element OP BKR FAIL 2 Element OP BKR ARC 1 Element OP BKR ARC 2 Element OP AR 1 Element OP AR 2 Element OP AR 3 Element OP AR 4 Element OP AR 5 Element OP AR 6 Element OP SYNC 1 Element OP SYNC 2 Element OP SETTING GROUP Element OP RESET Element OP FLEXELEMENT 1 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 2 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 3 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 4 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 5 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 6 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 7 Element OP FLEXELEMENT 8 Element OP DIG ELEM 1 Element OP DIG ELEM 2 Element OP DIG ELEM 3 Element OP DIG ELEM 4 Element OP DIG ELEM 5 Element OP DIG ELEM 6 Element OP DIG ELEM 7 Element OP DIG ELEM 8 Element OP DIG ELEM 9 Element OP DIG ELEM 10 Element OP DIG ELEM 11 Element OP DIG ELEM 12 Element OP DIG ELEM 13 Element OP DIG ELEM 14 Element OP DIG ELEM 15 Element OP DIG ELEM 16 Element OP COUNTER 1 Element OP COUNTER 2 Element OP COUNTER 3 Element OP COUNTER 4 Element OP COUNTER 5 Element OP COUNTER 6 Element OP CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

POINT INDEX 854 855 864 865 866 867 868 869 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 916 917 921 922 923 925 926 927 NAME/DESCRIPTION COUNTER 7 Element OP COUNTER 8 Element OP LED State 1 (IN SERVICE) LED State 2 (TROUBLE) LED State 3 (TEST MODE) LED State 4 (TRIP) LED State 5 (ALARM) LED State 6(PICKUP) LED State 9 (VOLTAGE) LED State 10 (CURRENT) LED State 11 (FREQUENCY) LED State 12 (OTHER) LED State 13 (PHASE A) LED State 14 (PHASE B) LED State 15 (PHASE C) LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND) SNTP FAILURE BATTERY FAIL PRI ETHERNET FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL EEPROM DATA ERROR SRAM DATA ERROR PROGRAM MEMORY WATCHDOG ERROR LOW ON MEMORY REMOTE DEVICE OFF DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK ANY MINOR ERROR ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY SELF-TESTS IRIG-B FAILURE DSP ERROR NO DSP INTERUPTS UNIT NOT CALIBRATED PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN EQUIPMENT MISMATCH UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED SYSTEM EXCEPTION LATCHING OUT ERROR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANGE EVENT CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
E-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close. BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Virtual Input 17 Virtual Input 18 Virtual Input 19 Virtual Input 20 Virtual Input 21 Virtual Input 22 Virtual Input 23 Virtual Input 24 Virtual Input 25 Virtual Input 26 Virtual Input 27 Virtual Input 28 Virtual Input 29 Virtual Input 30 Virtual Input 31 Virtual Input 32
GE Multilin
E-13
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time) Change Event Buffer Size: 10 Default Class for all points: 2 FROZEN COUNTERS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time) Change Event Buffer Size: 10 Default Class for all points: 2 Table E5: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NAME/DESCRIPTION Digital Counter 1 Digital Counter 2 Digital Counter 3 Digital Counter 4 Digital Counter 5 Digital Counter 6 Digital Counter 7 Digital Counter 8 Oscillography Trigger Count Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. D60 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.
E-14
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement. The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34. When using the D60 in DNP systems with limited memory, the Analog Input Points below may be replaced with a userdefinable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with the Modbus User Map settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Modbus address of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog Input points, COMMUNICATIONS set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the DNP Analog Input Points List webpage, accessible from the Device Information menu webpage. After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the setting to take effect.
NOTE
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting is increased, data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points. Units for Analog Input points are as follows: Current: Voltage: Real Power: Reactive Power: Apparent Power: Energy A (amps) V (volts) W (watts) var (vars) VA (volt-amps) Wh, varh (watt-hours, var-hours) Frequency: Angle: Ohm Input: RTD Input: Hz (hertz) degrees ohms C (degrees Celsius)
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time) Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms Change Event Buffer Size: 800 Default Class for all Points: 1
Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4)

POINT 0 1 2 3 4 5 DESCRIPTION SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle
Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)

POINT 6 7 8 9 10 11 DESCRIPTION SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
GE Multilin
E-15
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4)
POINT 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 DESCRIPTION SRC 1 Ground Current RMS SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power SRC 1 Phase A Real Power SRC 1 Phase B Real Power SRC 1 Phase C Real Power SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
APPENDIX E Table E6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)

POINT 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 DESCRIPTION SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor SRC 1 Positive Watthour SRC 1 Negative Watthour SRC 1 Positive Varhour SRC 1 Negative Varhour SRC 1 Frequency Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude Prefault Zero Seq Current Prefault Pos Seq Current Prefault Neg Seq Current Prefault Phase A Voltage Prefault Phase B Voltage Prefault Phase C Voltage Last Fault Location Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase Tracking Frequency FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 2 Actual FlexElement 3 Actual FlexElement 4 Actual FlexElement 5 Actual FlexElement 6 Actual FlexElement 7 Actual FlexElement 8 Actual FlexElement 9 Actual FlexElement 10 Actual FlexElement 11 Actual FlexElement 12 Actual FlexElement 13 Actual FlexElement 14 Actual FlexElement 15 Actual FlexElement 16 Actual Current Setting Group
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
E-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES
F.1 CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N 1601-0089-0.1 1601-0089-A1 1601-0089-A2 1601-0089-A3 1601-0089-A4 1601-0089-A4a 1601-0089-B1 1601-0089-B2 1601-0089-B3 1601-0089-B4 1601-0089-B5 1601-0089-B6 1601-0089-B7 1601-0089-B8 1601-0089-C1 1601-0089-C2 1601-0089-C3 1601-0089-C4 1601-0089-C5 1601-0089-C6 1601-0089-D1 1601-0089-D2 1601-0089-E1 1601-0089-E2 1601-0089-F1 1601-0089-F2 1601-0089-F3 1601-0089-F4 1601-0089-F5 D60 REVISION 1.5x (beta) 2.0x 2.0x 2.2x 2.2x 2.2x 2.4x 2.4x 2.6x 2.8x 2.9x 2.9x 2.9x 2.6x 3.0x 3.1x 3.0x 3.1x 3.0x 3.1x 3.2x 3.2x 3.3x 3.3x 3.4x 3.4x 3.4x 3.4x 3.4x RELEASE DATE 23 August 1999 17 December 1999 14 January 2000 12 May 2000 14 June 2000 28 June 2000 08 September 2000 03 November 2000 08 March 2001 27 September 2001 03 December 2001 07 January 2002 15 March 2002 27 February 2004 02 July 2002 30 August 2002 18 November 2002 18 November 2002 11 February 2003 11 February 2003 11 February 2003 02 June 2003 01 May 2003 29 May 2003 10 December 2003 09 February 2004 27 February 2004 25 March 2008 18 September 2009 ECO N/A N/A URD-001 URD-002 URD-003 URD-003a URD-004 URD-005 URD-006 URD-007 URD-008 URD-009 URD-010 URX-120 URD-010 URD-012 URD-016 URD-017 URD-020 URD-021 URD-023 URX-084 URX-080 URX-083 URX-111 URX-115 URX-130 08-0164 09-1189
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE D60 MANUAL
Table F2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F5

PAGE (F4) Title 5-112 5-121 PAGE (F5) Title 5-112 5-121 CHANGE Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-F5 Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
Table F3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F4 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE (F3) Title PAGE (F4) Title CHANGE Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-F4.
GE Multilin
F-1
F.1 CHANGE NOTES Table F3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F4 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE (F3) 2-12 5-8 5-12 5-192 E-8 PAGE (F4) 2-12 5-8 5-12 5-192 E-8 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Updated INPUTS specifications section Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section Updated NETWORK sub-section
APPENDIX F
The LATCHING OUTPUTS section is now a sub-section of the CONTACT OUTPUTS Updated BINARY INPUTS section

PAGE (F1) Title 5-83 PAGE (F2) Title 5-83 CHANGE Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-F3. Updated GROUND DISTANCE section.

PAGE (F1) Title 3-15 5-8 5-43 5-104 5-105 PAGE (F2) Title 3-15 5-8 5-44 5-106 5-107 5-135 5-136 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-F2. Updated TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827831A9-X1. Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section. Updated DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827061AM. Updated PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827072A4. Updated PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827033A6. Updated PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827039AB. Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827066A5.
5-133 5-134
Table F6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE (E2) Title 1-5 2-4 2-5 3-10 3-12 5-71 5-73 5-73 5-78 5-85 5-145 5-157 5-158 5-159 PAGE (F1) Title 1-5 2-4 2-5 3-10 3-12 5-72 5-74 5-75 5-80 5-87 5-147 5-159 5-160 5-161 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-F1. Updated software installation procedure. Updated ORDER CODES table to add the 67 Digital I/O option. Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to add the 67 Module option. Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 67 module. Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to show the 67 module. Updated LINE PICKUP section to reflect new AR ACCELERATION setting and updated logic. Updated DISTANCE OVERVIEW section to reflect new FORCE SELF-POLAR setting Updated MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC diagram to 827842A5 Updated PHASE DISTANCE Z2 TO Z4 OP SCHEME logic diagram to 837020A6 Updated GROUND DISTANCE Z2 TO Z4 OP SCHEME logic diagram to 837019A6 Updated TRIP OUTPUT section to reflect updated logic diagram 837025A9. Updated SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 3) diagram to 827089AG Updated SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 3) diagram to 827090AA Updated SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 3 of 3) diagram to 827833A9
F-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F Table F6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE (E2) 5-168 8-18 B-8 PAGE (F1) 5-170 8-18 B-8 CHANGE Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Updated VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827093AF Updated SINGLE POLE OPERATION diagram to 837026A4 Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.4x.
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION E2

PAGE (E1) Title 4-4 PAGE (E2) Title 4-4 CHANGE Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-E2. Updated UR VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS figure to remove incorrect reference to UserProgrammable Pushbuttons.
Table F8: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION E1

PAGE (D1) Title 2-5 PAGE (E1) Title 2-5 CHANGE Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0089-E1. Added specifications for ENERGY METERING, SELECTOR SWITCH, CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS, USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS, DIRECT INPUTS, DIRECT OUTPUTS, LATCHING OUTPUTS, and LED TEST. Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4L modules. Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CX. Added section for IEEE C37.94 Direct I/O communications. Added CLEAR RELAY RECORDS section. Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section to include LED Test feature. Added CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS section. Updated USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section. Updated DIRECT I/O section to include CRC Alarm and Unreturned Messages Alarm features. Added SELECTOR SWITCH section. Added LATCHING OUTPUTS section. Updated TESTING section. Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section. Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.3x features.
3-11 3-13 3-28 5-9 5-20 5-21 5-23 5-25 5-129 5-176 5-186 7-3 B-8
3-11 3-13 3-28 5-9 5-21 5-24 5-27 5-29 5-138 5-188 5-200 7-3 B-8
Update Update Add Add Update Add Update Update Add Add Update Update Update
GE Multilin
F-3
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.2ABBREVIATIONS

A..................... Ampere AC .................. Alternating Current A/D ................. Analog to Digital AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity AMP ............... Ampere ANG ............... Angle ANSI............... American National Standards Institute AR .................. Automatic Reclosure ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit ASYM ............. Asymmetry AUTO ............. Automatic AUX................ Auxiliary AVG ................ Average BER................ Bit Error Rate BF................... Breaker Fail BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate BKR................ Breaker BLK ................ Block BLKG.............. Blocking BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic BRKR ............. Breaker CAP................ Capacitor CC .................. Coupling Capacitor CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer CFG................ Configure / Configurable .CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files CHK................ Check CHNL ............. Channel CLS ................ Close CLSD.............. Closed CMND ............ Command CMPRSN........ Comparison CO.................. Contact Output COM............... Communication COMM............ Communications COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison CONN............. Connection CONT ............. Continuous, Contact CO-ORD......... Coordination CPU................ Central Processing Unit CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code CRT, CRNT .... Current CSA................ Canadian Standards Association CT .................. Current Transformer CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer D/A ................. Digital to Analog DC (dc)........... Direct Current DD .................. Disturbance Detector DFLT .............. Default DGNST........... Diagnostics DI.................... Digital Input DIFF ............... Differential DIR ................. Directional DISCREP ....... Discrepancy DIST ............... Distance DMD ............... Demand DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol DPO ............... Dropout DSP................ Digital Signal Processor dt .................... Rate of Change DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute .EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files EXT ................ Extension, External F ..................... Field FAIL................ Failure FD .................. Fault Detector FDH................ Fault Detector high-set FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set FLA................. Full Load Current FO .................. Fiber Optic
APPENDIX F F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

FREQ ............. Frequency FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol FxE ................ FlexElement FWD............... Forward G .................... Generator GE.................. General Electric GND............... Ground GNTR............. Generator GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS ............... Global Positioning System HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics HCT ............... High Current Time HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT) HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HYB ............... Hybrid I...................... Instantaneous I_0.................. Zero Sequence current I_1.................. Positive Sequence current I_2.................. Negative Sequence current IA ................... Phase A current IAB ................. Phase A minus B current IB ................... Phase B current IBC................. Phase B minus C current IC ................... Phase C current ICA................. Phase C minus A current ID ................... Identification IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IG ................... Ground (not residual) current Igd.................. Differential Ground current IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence INIT ................ Initiate INST............... Instantaneous INV................. Inverse I/O .................. Input/Output IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group ISO................. International Standards Organization IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation kA................... kiloAmpere kV................... kiloVolt LED................ Light Emitting Diode LEO................ Line End Open LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder LOOP............. Loopback LPU................ Line Pickup LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer M.................... Machine mA ................. MilliAmpere MAG............... Magnitude MAN............... Manual / Manually MAX ............... Maximum MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes MMI................ Man Machine Interface MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification MRT ............... Minimum Response Time MSG............... Message MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle MTR ............... Motor MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase) MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A) MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B) MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
F-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A) MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B) MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase) MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C) MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour N..................... Neutral N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable NEG ............... Negative NMPLT ........... Nameplate NOM............... Nominal NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol NTR................ Neutral O .................... Over OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent O/P, Op........... Output OP .................. Operate OPER ............. Operate OPERATG...... Operating O/S ................. Operating System OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking OUT................ Output OV .................. Overvoltage OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency OVLD ............. Overload P..................... Phase PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer PCNT ............. Percent PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase) PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A) PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B) PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C) PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop PHS................ Phase PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance Statement PKP ................ Pickup PLC ................ Power Line Carrier POS................ Positive POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip PRESS ........... Pressure PRI ................. Primary PROT ............. Protection PSEL .............. Presentation Selector pu ................... Per Unit PUIB............... Pickup Current Block PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated PWR............... Power QUAD............. Quadrilateral R..................... Rate, Reverse RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle REF ................ Reference REM ............... Remote REV................ Reverse RI.................... Reclose Initiate RIP ................. Reclose In Progress RGT BLD........ Right Blinder ROD ............... Remote Open Detector RST ................ Reset RSTR ............. Restrained RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver s ..................... second S..................... Sensitive
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
SAT .................CT Saturation SBO ................Select Before Operate SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC ................Secondary SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection SENS ..............Sensitive SEQ ................Sequence SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol SRC ................Source SSB.................Single Side Band SSEL...............Session Selector STATS.............Statistics SUPN..............Supervision SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision SV ...................Supervision, Service SYNC..............Synchrocheck SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck T......................Time, transformer TC ...................Thermal Capacity TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier TEMP..............Temperature TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion TMR ................Timer TOC ................Time Overcurrent TOV ................Time Overvoltage TRANS............Transient TRANSF .........Transfer TSEL...............Transport Selector TUC ................Time Undercurrent TUV.................Time Undervoltage TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter U .....................Under UC...................Undercurrent UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture UDP ................User Datagram Protocol UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories UNBAL............Unbalance UR...................Universal Relay URC ................Universal Recloser Control .URS ...............Filename extension for settings files UV...................Undervoltage V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage VA ...................Phase A voltage VAB.................Phase A to B voltage VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage VARH ..............Var-hour voltage VB ...................Phase B voltage VBA.................Phase B to A voltage VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage VC...................Phase C voltage VCA ................Phase C to A voltage VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage VF ...................Variable Frequency VIBR ...............Vibration VT ...................Voltage Transformer VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal WDG ...............Winding WH..................Watt-hour w/ opt ..............With Option WRT................With Respect To X .....................Reactance XDUCER.........Transducer XFMR..............Transformer Z......................Impedance, Zone
GE Multilin
F-5
F.3 WARRANTY F.3WARRANTY
APPENDIX F F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory. In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge. Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment. For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.
F-6
GE Multilin
INDEX
Index
Numerics
10BASE-F communications options ................................................. 3-16 description .................................................................... 3-18 interface ........................................................................ 3-27 redundant option ........................................................... 3-16 settings ......................................................................... 5-12 specifications ................................................................ 2-13
A
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-4 AC CURRENT INPUTS ..................................... 2-12, 3-8, 5-37 AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................. 2-12, 3-8 ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-11, 4-12 ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-72 ACTUAL VALUES maintenance ................................................................. 6-18 metering .......................................................................... 6-8 product information ........................................................ 6-19 records ......................................................................... 6-15 status .............................................................................. 6-3 ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-24 ALTITUDE ....................................................................... 2-14 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-2 APPARENT POWER ................................................2-11, 6-13 APPLICATION EXAMPLES breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-168 contact inputs .............................................................. 5-191 pilot schemes .................................................................. 9-4 series compensated lines ........................................ 8-15, 9-7 stepped distance scheme ................................................. 9-2 APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-15 ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-52 ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-171 AUTORECLOSE actual values ................................................................... 6-4 description .................................................................. 5-156 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-54 logic ....................................................... 5-162, 5-163, 5-164 sequence .................................................................... 5-165 settings ................... 5-155, 5-157, 5-158, 5-159, 5-160, 5-161 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-54 logic ............................................................................ 5-140 settings ....................................................................... 5-140 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-54 logic ............................................................................ 5-139 settings ....................................................................... 5-139 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ....................................... 3-8 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-12
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... E-13 BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3 BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-4 BLOCKING SCHEME application of settings ...................................................... 9-6 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-54 logic ............................................................................ 5-189 settings ............................................................ 5-187, 5-188 BREAKER ARCING FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-54 BREAKER ARCING CURRENT clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-2 logic ............................................................................ 5-172 measurement ............................................................... 5-172 settings ....................................................................... 5-171 BREAKER CONTROL actual values ................................................................. 6-18 control of 2 breakers ........................................................ 4-8 description ....................................................................... 4-8 dual breaker logic .......................................................... 5-44 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-55 settings ......................................................................... 5-42 BREAKER FAILURE description ................................................................... 5-126 determination ............................................................... 5-127 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-54 logic ............................................ 5-130, 5-131, 5-132, 5-133 main path sequence ..................................................... 5-127 settings ............................................................ 5-125, 5-128 specifications ................................................................... 2-9 BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6 BRIGHTNESS .................................................................... 5-8
C
C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS .................................... 3-28, 3-29 CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-15 CHANGES TO D60 MANUAL ..............................................F-1 CHANGES TO MANUAL ...................................... F-1, F-2, F-3 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-20 CHANNELS banks ................................................................... 5-37, 5-38 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-166 CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-15 CLEAR RECORDS ........................................... 5-10, 7-1, B-42 CLOCK setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2 settings ......................................................................... 5-17 COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1 COMMUNICATIONS 10BASE-F ................................................... 3-16, 3-18, 5-12 channel ......................................................................... 3-20 connecting to the UR ................................................. 1-7, 1-8 CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2 dnp ................................................................ 5-12, 5-17, E-1 G.703 ............................................................................ 3-23 half duplex ...................................................................... B-1 HTTP ............................................................................. 5-15 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-16 inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-14 Modbus .................................................. 5-12, 5-17, B-1, B-3 network ......................................................................... 5-12 overview .......................................................................... 1-9 RS232 ........................................................................... 3-16 RS485 ......................................................... 3-16, 3-17, 5-11
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-37, 5-38 BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4 BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8
GE Multilin
INDEX
INDEX
settings ............................................... 5-12, 5-15, 5-16, 5-17 specifications........................................................ 2-13, 2-14 UCA/MMS ........... 5-15, 5-42, 5-192, 5-196, 5-197, 5-198, C-1 web server..................................................................... 5-15 COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7 CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-15 CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1 CONTACT INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-3 dry connections ............................................................. 3-14 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-59 Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9 module assignments ...................................................... 3-10 settings ....................................................................... 5-190 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 thresholds ................................................................... 5-190 wet connections ............................................................. 3-14 wiring ............................................................................ 3-12 CONTACT OUTPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-4 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-59 Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9 module assignments ...................................................... 3-10 settings ....................................................................... 5-193 wiring ............................................................................ 3-12 CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-141 CONTROL POWER description....................................................................... 3-8 specifications ................................................................. 2-13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-54 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-42 settings ......................................................................... 5-25 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 COUNTERS actual values ................................................................... 6-5 settings ....................................................................... 5-169 CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-35 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ....................................... 2-13, 3-7 CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-15 CT BANKS settings ......................................................................... 5-37 CT INPUTS ............................................................... 5-6, 5-37 CT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-8 CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-37 CURRENT METERING actual values ................................................................. 6-11 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 CURVES definite time.......................................................5-103, 5-134 FlexCurves ...................................................... 5-45, 5-103 I2T .............................................................................. 5-103 IAC ............................................................................. 5-102 IEC ............................................................................. 5-101 IEEE ........................................................................... 5-100 inverse time undervoltage ............................................ 5-134 types ............................................................................. 5-99 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10 settings ..........................................................................5-21 specifications .................................................................2-11 DATE ................................................................................ 7-2 DCMA INPUTS .................................................................6-14 settings ........................................................................ 5-203 specifications .................................................................2-12 DEFINITE TIME CURVE ...................................... 5-103, 5-134 DEMAND METERING specifications .................................................................2-11 DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3 DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-196 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ..........................................2-15, 3-7 DIGITAL COUNTER FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-55 DIGITAL COUNTERS actual values ................................................................... 6-5 logic ............................................................................ 5-170 Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9 settings ........................................................................ 5-169 DIGITAL ELEMENT FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-55 DIGITAL ELEMENTS application example ...................................................... 5-167 logic ............................................................................ 5-166 settings ........................................................................ 5-166 DIGITAL INPUTS see entry for CONTACT INPUTS DIGITAL OUTPUTS see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS DIMENSIONS .................................................................... 3-1 DIRECT DEVICES actual values ................................................................... 6-7 DIRECT I/O see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS application example ........................................... 5-200, 5-201 configuration examples ................................. 5-31, 5-35, 5-36 settings ..............................................5-31, 5-35, 5-36, 5-199 DIRECT INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-6 application example ........................................... 5-200, 5-201 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 settings ........................................................................ 5-199 specifications .................................................................2-12 DIRECT OUTPUTS application example ........................................... 5-200, 5-201 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 settings ........................................................................ 5-200 DIRECT UNDERREACH TRANSER TRIP see entry for DUTT DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC ..................................... 8-3 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING see BLOCKING SCHEME DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL entries DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION ...................................... 5-108 DISPLAY ..............................................................1-9, 4-8, 5-8 DISTANCE analysis of elements ........................................................ 8-6 characteristics ................................................................. 8-2 ground ....................................................................2-7, 5-83 mho characteristic ................................................. 5-77, 5-78 phase .....................................................................2-6, 5-76 quad characteristic ................................................ 5-78, 5-79 settings ..........................................................................5-75 stepped distance ............................................................. 9-2 DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
INDEX
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS .............................................B-47 DATA LOGGER clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1 Modbus ................................................................... B-6, B-7
ii
GE Multilin
INDEX
FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-59 internal ......................................................................... 5-40 DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................ 5-198 DNP COMMUNICATIONS binary counters ............................................................. E-14 binary input points ........................................................... E-8 binary output points ....................................................... E-13 control relay output blocks ............................................. E-13 device profile document ................................................... E-1 frozen counters ............................................................. E-14 implementation table ....................................................... E-4 settings ......................................................................... 5-12 user map ....................................................................... 5-14 DUPLEX, HALF .................................................................. B-1 DUTT application of settings ...................................................... 9-4 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-55 logic ............................................................................ 5-177 settings ....................................................................... 5-176 DYNAMIC REACH CONTROL ........................................... 8-16 actual values ................................................................. 6-15 clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1 Modbus .......................................................................... B-7 settings ......................................................................... 5-18 FAULT TYPE .................................................................... 6-15 FAX NUMBERS .................................................................. 1-1 FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1 Fiber ................................................................................ 3-21 FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-19 FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2 FLASH MESSAGES ............................................................ 5-8 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS actual values ................................................................... 6-5 Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9 settings ......................................................................... 5-28 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 FLEXCURVES equation ...................................................................... 5-103 settings ......................................................................... 5-45 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 table .............................................................................. 5-45 FLEXELEMENTS actual values ................................................................. 6-14 direction ........................................................................ 5-69 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-55 hysteresis ...................................................................... 5-69 pickup ........................................................................... 5-69 scheme logic ................................................................. 5-68 settings ....................................................... 5-67, 5-68, 5-70 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 FLEXLOGIC editing with URPC ............................................................ 4-1 equation editor ............................................................... 5-66 evaluation ...................................................................... 5-61 example ............................................................... 5-52, 5-62 example equation ......................................................... 5-141 gate characteristics ........................................................ 5-60 operands .............................................................. 5-53, 5-54 operators ....................................................................... 5-61 rules .............................................................................. 5-61 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 timers ............................................................................ 5-66 worksheet ...................................................................... 5-63 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-66 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS .................................................... 5-66 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-205 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-206 FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-17 FORM-A RELAY high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-10 outputs .......................................................... 3-9, 3-10, 3-14 specifications ................................................................. 2-13 FORM-C RELAY outputs ................................................................... 3-9, 3-14 specifications ................................................................. 2-13 FREQUENCY actual values ................................................................. 6-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-39 FREQUENCY METERING Modbus registers .......................................................... B-12 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 values ........................................................................... 6-13 FREQUENCY TRACKING ................................................. 5-39 FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-38 FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4 FUSE ............................................................................... 2-12 FUSE FAILURE see VT FUSE FAILURE
E
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ....................................... 2-15 ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3 ENERGY METERING actual values ................................................................. 6-13 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 ENERGY METERING, CLEARING .................................... 5-10 EQUATIONS definite time curve ............................................. 5-103, 5-134 FlexCurve ................................................................ 5-103 It curves ..................................................................... 5-103 IAC curves .................................................................. 5-102 IEC curves .................................................................. 5-101 IEEE curves ................................................................ 5-100 ETHERNET actual values ................................................................... 6-6 configuration ................................................................... 1-7 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10 settings ......................................................................... 5-12 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ............................................. 4-5 EVENT RECORDER actual values ................................................................. 6-17 clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1 Modbus ........................................................................... B-7 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2 EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-4 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-5
F
F485 ................................................................................. 1-9 FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1 FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-7 FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-13 FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-15 FAULT LOCATOR logic .............................................................................. 6-16 operation ....................................................................... 6-15 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 FAULT REPORT
GE Multilin
iii
INDEX
INDEX
virtual .......................................................................... 5-192 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-1 INSTALLATION communications .............................................................3-16 contact inputs/outputs .................................. 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 CT inputs ........................................................................ 3-8 RS485 ...........................................................................3-17 settings ..........................................................................5-36 VT inputs ........................................................................ 3-8 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries INSULATION RESISTANCE ..............................................2-15 INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................ 1-2 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ..................................2-14 INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-134 IOC see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries IP ADDRESS ....................................................................5-12 IRIG-B connection .....................................................................3-18 settings ..........................................................................5-17 specifications .................................................................2-12 ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ................................................2-15
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 3-27 GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-102 GOMSFE .......................................................................... C-1 GOOSE ............... 5-15, 5-196, 5-197, 5-198, 5-199, 5-200, 6-5 GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-11 GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION .......................... 5-88 GROUND DISTANCE application of settings ...................................................... 9-3 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-55 op scheme ..................................................................... 5-88 scheme logic ........................................................ 5-86, 5-87 settings ......................................................................... 5-83 specifications ................................................................... 2-7 GROUND IOC FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-55 logic ............................................................................ 5-118 settings ....................................................................... 5-117 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for GROUND TOC GROUND TOC FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-55 logic ............................................................................ 5-117 settings ....................................................................... 5-117 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-72
K
KEYPAD ....................................................................1-10, 4-8
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1 HTTP PROTOCOL ........................................................... 5-15 HUMIDITY ....................................................................... 2-14 HYBRID PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP see entry for HYBRID POTT HYBRID POTT application of settings ...................................................... 9-5 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-186 settings .............................................................5-183, 5-185
L
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2 LASER MODULE ..............................................................3-21 LATCHING OUTPUTS application example ........................................... 5-194, 5-195 settings ........................................................................ 5-193 specifications .................................................................2-13 LED INDICATORS ................................ 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 5-24, B-8 LED TEST FlexLogic operand .......................................................5-60 settings ..........................................................................5-22 specifications .................................................................2-10 LINE pickup ............................................................................5-73 settings ..........................................................................5-41 LINE LENGTH ..................................................................5-41 LINE PICKUP FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-56 logic ..............................................................................5-74 settings ..........................................................................5-73 specifications .................................................................. 2-8 LINK POWER BUDGET .....................................................2-14 LOAD ENCROACHMENT FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-56 settings ................................................................. 5-97, 5-98 specifications .................................................................2-10 LOGIC GATES .................................................................5-61 LOST PASSWORD ............................................................ 5-7
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-103 IAC CURVES ................................................................. 5-102 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL interoperability document ................................................ D-1 settings ......................................................................... 5-16 IEC CURVES ................................................................. 5-101 IED .................................................................................... 1-2 IED SETUP ........................................................................ 1-5 IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-28, 3-29 IEEE CURVES ............................................................... 5-100 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4 IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-11, 7-3 INPUTS AC current ............................................................ 2-12, 5-37 AC voltage ........................................................... 2-12, 5-38 contact inputs .................................. 2-12, 3-12, 5-190, 5-205 dcmA inputs ............................................... 2-12, 3-15, 5-203 direct inputs ................................................................... 2-12 IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-12, 3-18 remote inputs ........................................... 2-12, 5-196, 5-197 RTD inputs ................................................. 2-12, 3-15, 5-204
INDEX
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-2 MANUFACTURING DATE .................................................6-19 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ..................................... B-47
iv
GE Multilin
INDEX
MEMORY POLARIZATION .......................................... 8-5, 9-1 MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC ............................................. 5-76 MENU HEIRARCHY .................................................1-10, 4-10 MENU NAVIGATION ......................................... 1-10, 4-9, 4-10 METERING conventions .............................................................. 6-8, 6-9 current .......................................................................... 2-11 demand ......................................................................... 2-11 frequency ...................................................................... 2-11 power ............................................................................ 2-11 voltage .......................................................................... 2-11 METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................... 6-9 MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC ......................... 5-77, 8-2 MIC ...................................................................................C-3 MMS see entry for UCA/MMS MODBUS data logger ...............................................................B-6, B-7 event recorder ................................................................. B-7 exception responses ........................................................ B-5 execute operation ............................................................ B-4 fault report ...................................................................... B-7 flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-28 function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3 function code 05h ............................................................ B-4 function code 06h ............................................................ B-4 function code 10h ............................................................ B-5 introduction ..................................................................... B-1 memory map data formats .............................................. B-47 obtaining files .................................................................. B-6 oscillography ................................................................... B-6 passwords ....................................................................... B-7 read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3 settings .................................................................5-12, 5-17 store multiple settings ...................................................... B-5 store single setting .......................................................... B-4 supported function codes ................................................. B-3 user map ....................................................................... 5-17 user map Modbus registers .............................................. B-9 Modbus ............................................................................. B-7 MODEL INFORMATION ................................................... 6-19 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-19 MODULES communications ............................................................ 3-16 contact inputs/outputs ................................... 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 CT .................................................................................. 3-8 CT/VT ...................................................................... 3-8, 5-6 direct inputs/outputs ...................................................... 3-21 insertion .......................................................................... 3-4 order codes ..................................................................... 2-5 ordering .......................................................................... 2-5 power supply ................................................................... 3-7 transducer I/O ............................................................... 3-15 VT .................................................................................. 3-8 withdrawal ....................................................................... 3-4 MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................. 5-171 MOUNTING ....................................................................... 3-1 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-121 settings ....................................................................... 5-121 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-138 settings ....................................................................... 5-138 specifications ................................................................... 2-9 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-120 settings ....................................................................... 5-120 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-116 polarization .................................................................. 5-114 settings ....................................................................... 5-112 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL IOC NEUTRAL IOC FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-111 settings ....................................................................... 5-111 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-137 settings ....................................................................... 5-137 specifications ................................................................... 2-9 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL TOC NEUTRAL TOC FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-110 settings ....................................................................... 5-110 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-56 settings ......................................................................... 5-71 specifications ................................................................. 2-10
O
ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-61 OPEN POLE DETECTOR FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-57 logic ............................................................................ 5-175 settings ....................................................................... 5-174 OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-14 OPERATING TIMES ........................................................... 2-6 ORDER CODES ................................................. 2-4, 6-19, 7-2 ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-2 ORDERING ................................................................. 2-4, 2-5 OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING .............................. 2-15 OSCILLOGRAPHY actual values ................................................................. 6-17 clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1 Modbus .......................................................................... B-6 settings ......................................................................... 5-19 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 with URPC ....................................................................... 4-2
N
NAMEPLATE ..................................................................... 1-1 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT characteristics ............................................................. 5-123 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-56 logic ............................................................................ 5-124 settings ............................................................. 5-122, 5-124
GE Multilin
INDEX
INDEX
OST .......................................................................... 2-9, 5-90 OUT-OF-STEP TRIPPING ......................................... 2-9, 5-90 OUTPUTS contact outputs ........................................... 3-10, 3-12, 5-193 control power ................................................................. 2-13 critical failure relay ........................................................ 2-13 Fast Form-C relay .......................................................... 2-13 Form-A relay ......................................... 2-13, 3-9, 3-10, 3-14 Form-C relay ................................................. 2-13, 3-9, 3-14 latching outputs .................................................. 2-13, 5-193 remote outputs ..................................................5-198, 5-199 virtual outputs .............................................................. 5-195 OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ...................................... 5-99 OVERCURRENT CURVES definite time................................................................. 5-103 FlexCurves ............................................................... 5-103 I2T .............................................................................. 5-103 IAC ............................................................................. 5-102 IEC ............................................................................. 5-101 IEEE ........................................................................... 5-100 OVERVOLTAGE auxiliary ............................................................... 2-9, 5-140 negative sequence ....................................................... 5-138 negative-sequence ........................................................... 2-9 neutral .................................................................. 2-9, 5-137 phase ................................................................... 2-9, 5-136 specifications .................................................................. 2-8 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-57 logic ............................................................................ 5-136 settings ........................................................................ 5-136 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 PHASE ROTATION ...........................................................5-38 PHASE SELECT FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-58 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE TOC PHASE TOC FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-58 logic ............................................................................ 5-105 settings ........................................................................ 5-104 specifications .................................................................. 2-8 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-58 logic ............................................................................ 5-135 settings ........................................................................ 5-135 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 PHASOR ESTIMATION ...................................................... 8-1 PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................ 1-1 PICS ................................................................................. C-2 PILOT SCHEMES application of settings ...................................................... 9-4 blocking ....................................................................... 5-187 directional comparison blocking .................................... 5-187 DUTT ........................................................................... 5-176 hybrid POTT ................................................................ 5-183 POTT ........................................................................... 5-180 PUTT ........................................................................... 5-178 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 POTT application of settings ...................................................... 9-4 FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-58 hybrid POTT ................................................................ 5-183 logic ............................................................................ 5-182 settings ...................................................5-180, 5-181, 5-182 POWER METERING Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11 specifications .................................................................2-11 values ............................................................................6-12 POWER SUPPLY description ...................................................................... 3-7 low range .......................................................................2-12 specifications .................................................................2-12 POWER SWING BLOCKING ......................................2-9, 5-90 POWER SWING DETECT FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-58 logic ..................................................................... 5-95, 5-96 settings ................................................................. 5-89, 5-93 specifications .................................................................. 2-9 PRODUCT INFORMATION ................................................6-19 Modbus registers ............................................................. B-8 PRODUCT SETUP ............................................................. 5-7 PRODUCTION TESTS ......................................................2-15 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3 PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4 PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS PUTT application of settings ...................................................... 9-4 FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-58 logic ............................................................................ 5-179 settings ........................................................................ 5-178
P
PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................ 3-1 PASSWORD SECURITY ..................................................... 5-7 PASSWORDS changing ....................................................................... 4-13 lost password ......................................................... 4-13, 5-7 Modbus .......................................................................... B-7 overview ........................................................................ 1-11 security ........................................................................... 5-7 settings ........................................................................... 5-7 PC SOFTWARE see entry for URPC PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................. 5-134 PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP see entry for POTT PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP see entry for PUTT PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4 PHASE ANGLE METERING ................................................ 6-9 PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-11 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-57 logic ............................................................................ 5-109 phase A polarization .................................................... 5-107 settings .............................................................5-107, 5-108 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 PHASE DISTANCE application of settings ...................................................... 9-2 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-57 logic .............................................................................. 5-82 op scheme ..................................................................... 5-82 settings ......................................................................... 5-76 specifications ................................................................... 2-6 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE IOC PHASE IOC FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-57 logic ............................................................................ 5-106
INDEX
vi
GE Multilin
INDEX
Q
QUAD DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC ............... 5-78, 5-79, 8-4
S
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1 SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4 SELECTOR SWITCH actual values ................................................................... 6-5 application example ..................................................... 5-147 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-59 logic ............................................................................ 5-147 settings ....................................................................... 5-142 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 timing ............................................................... 5-145, 5-146 SELF-TESTS description ....................................................................... 7-3 error messages ................................................................ 7-4 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-60 Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8 SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................. 6-19 SERIAL PORTS ............................................................... 5-11 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES ................................ 8-15, 9-7 SETTING GROUPS .......................................5-59, 5-72, 5-141 SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-11 SIGNAL SOURCES description ....................................................................... 5-5 metering ........................................................................ 6-11 settings ......................................................................... 5-40 SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-1, 2-2 SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1 SNTP PROTOCOL settings ......................................................................... 5-17 SOFTWARE installation ....................................................................... 1-5 see entry for URPC SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4 SOFTWARE, PC see entry for URPC SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES .................................... 5-134 SOURCES description ....................................................................... 5-5 metering ........................................................................ 6-11 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-10 settings ................................................................ 5-39, 5-40 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 2-6 ST TYPE CONNECTORS .................................................. 3-18 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ............................................F-4 STATUS INDICATORS ....................................................... 4-5 STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME .......................................... 9-2 STUB BUS ........................................................................ 0-iii SURGE IMMUNITY ........................................................... 2-15 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING .......................6-9 SYNCHROCHECK actual values ................................................................. 6-13 FlexLogic operands ..................................................... 5-59 logic ............................................................................ 5-154 settings ............................................................ 5-151, 5-152 specifications ................................................................... 2-9 SYSTEM FREQUENCY ..................................................... 5-38 SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................. 5-37
R
REACTIVE POWER .................................................2-11, 6-12 REAL POWER .........................................................2-11, 6-12 REAL TIME CLOCK ......................................................... 5-17 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ..................................... 3-5 RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-48, 5-103 RECLOSING description .................................................................. 5-156 logic ....................................................... 5-162, 5-163, 5-164 sequence .................................................................... 5-165 settings ................... 5-155, 5-157, 5-158, 5-159, 5-160, 5-161 REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-16 RELAY ACTIVATION ....................................................... 4-12 RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-52 RELAY MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 7-2 RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-36 RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................... 1-11 REMOTE DEVICES actual values ................................................................... 6-4 device ID ..................................................................... 5-196 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-60 Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9 settings ....................................................................... 5-196 statistics ......................................................................... 6-5 REMOTE INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-3 FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-59 settings ....................................................................... 5-197 specifications ................................................................ 2-12 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA-1 bit pair ............................................................. 5-198 UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................ 5-199, 5-200 REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................... 2-5 RESETTING .......................................................... 5-60, 5-199 REVISION HISTORY .......................................................... F-1 RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ...................................................... 2-15 RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-15 RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-11 RMS VOLTAGE ............................................................... 2-11 RS232 configuration ................................................................... 1-7 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 wiring ............................................................................ 3-16 RS422 configuration ................................................................. 3-25 timing ............................................................................ 3-26 two-channel application ................................................. 3-25 with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-27 RS485 communications ............................................................ 3-16 description .................................................................... 3-17 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 RTD INPUTS actual values ................................................................. 6-14 settings ....................................................................... 5-204 specifications ................................................................ 2-12
TARGET MESSAGES ......................................................... 7-3 TARGET SETTING ............................................................. 5-4 TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-3
GE Multilin
vii
INDEX
INDEX
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................ 5-15 TEMPERATURE, OPERATING ......................................... 2-14 TERMINALS ....................................................................... 3-5 TESTING force contact inputs ..................................................... 5-205 force contact outputs ................................................... 5-206 lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2 self-test error messages ................................................... 7-3 THEORY OF OPERATION .................................................. 8-1 TIME ................................................................................. 7-2 TIME OVERCURRENT see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries TIMERS ........................................................................... 5-66 TOC ground ......................................................................... 5-117 neutral ......................................................................... 5-110 phase .......................................................................... 5-104 specifications ................................................................... 2-8 TRACKING FREQUENCY ................................................. 6-14 TRANSDUCER I/O actual values ................................................................. 6-14 settings .............................................................5-203, 5-204 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 wiring ............................................................................ 3-15 TRIP LEDs ....................................................................... 5-24 TRIP OUTPUT FlexLogic operands .................................................... 5-59 logic ............................................................................ 5-150 settings ....................................................................... 5-148 specifications ................................................................... 2-9 TROUBLE INDICATOR .............................................. 1-11, 7-3 TYPE TESTS ................................................................... 2-15 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .............................................. 3-6 introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 oscillography ................................................................... 4-2 overview ......................................................................... 4-1 requirements ................................................................... 1-5 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS example .........................................................................5-30 invoking and scrolling .....................................................5-29 Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9 settings ................................................................. 5-29, 5-30 specifications .................................................................2-10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs custom labeling ............................................................... 4-7 defaults ........................................................................... 4-6 description ...................................................................... 4-6 settings ..........................................................................5-24 specifications .................................................................2-10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-60 settings ..........................................................................5-27 specifications .................................................................2-10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS settings ..........................................................................5-25 USERST-1 BIT PAIR ............................................ 5-199, 5-200
V
VAR-HOURS ........................................................... 2-11, 6-13 VIBRATION TESTING .......................................................2-15 VIRTUAL INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-3 commands ...................................................................... 7-1 FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-60 logic ............................................................................ 5-192 Modbus registers ...................................................... B-8, B-9 settings ........................................................................ 5-192 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-4 FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-60 settings ........................................................................ 5-195 VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................5-38 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ...................................................2-15 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-134 VOLTAGE METERING Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11 specifications .................................................................2-11 values ............................................................................6-11 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-104 VT FUSE FAILURE logic ............................................................................ 5-173 settings ........................................................................ 5-173 VT INPUTS ................................................................5-6, 5-38 VT WIRING ....................................................................... 3-8 VTFF FlexLogic operands .....................................................5-59 see VT FUSE FAILURE
U
UCA SBO TIMER for breaker control ......................................................... 5-42 for virtual inputs ........................................................... 5-192 UCA/MMS device ID ..................................................................... 5-196 DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-198 MIC ................................................................................ C-3 overview ......................................................................... C-1 PICS .............................................................................. C-2 remote device settings ................................................. 5-196 remote inputs .............................................................. 5-197 reporting ......................................................................... C-6 SBO timeout ....................................................... 5-42, 5-192 settings ......................................................................... 5-15 UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................5-199, 5-200 UL APPROVAL ................................................................. 2-15 UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS resetting ................................................................. 5-10, 7-2 UNDERVOLTAGE auxiliary .......................................................................... 2-9 phase ................................................................... 2-9, 5-135 UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS .......................... 5-134 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................... 5-36 UNPACKING THE RELAY ................................................... 1-1 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM ................................. 5-36 UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2 URPC creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2
W
WARRANTY ...................................................................... F-6 WATT-HOURS ......................................................... 2-11, 6-13 WEB SERVER PROTOCOL ...............................................5-15 WEBSITE .......................................................................... 1-1 WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................ 3-6
INDEX
viii
GE Multilin

Ge - D60 Relay

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Ge - D60 Relay

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Title Page

D60 Line Distance Relay

Manual P/N: 1601-0089-F5 (GEK-106440D) Copyright 2009 GE Multilin

GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2000 QMI # 005094 UL # A3775

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.5 USING THE RELAY

D60 Line Distance Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

D60 Line Distance Relay

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O

D60 Line Distance Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.3 METERING

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS

8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS

8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS

8.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING

9.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES

D60 Line Distance Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS 9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)

9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES

9.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES

9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.2 FUNCTION CODES

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL

D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS.

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

D60 Line Distance Relay

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.3 WARRANTY

D60 Line Distance Relay

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

D60 Line Distance Relay

D60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A 000 ZZZZZZ D MAZB98000029 D 1998/01/05

D60 Line Distance Relay

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

D60 Line Distance Relay

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

LAN Programming Device Operator Interface

D60 Line Distance Relay

1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION

D60 Line Distance Relay

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

D60 Line Distance Relay

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 6.

D60 Line Distance Relay

D60 Line Distance Relay